EM341
High-Performance, Integrated RF4CE System-on-Chip
Features
- 32-bit ARM® Cortex -M3 processor
- 2.4 GHz IEEE 802.15.4-2003 transceiver & lower MAC
- 128 kB flash, with optional read protection
- 12 kB RAM memory
- AES128 encryption accelerator
- Flexible ADC, UART/SPI/TWI serial communications,
and general purpose timers
- 24 highly configurable GPIOs with Schmitt trigger inputs
Industry-leading ARM® Cortex -M3 processor
- Leading 32-bit processing performance
- Highly efficient Thumb-2 instruction set
- Operation at 6, 12, or 24 MHz
- Flexible Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller
400 nA without/800 nA with sleep timer
timing
- High-frequency internal RC oscillator for fast (110 µs)
processor start-up from sleep
point; Data Watchpoint & Trace; Instrumentation Trace
Macrocell
Application Flexibility
- Single voltage operation: 2.1–3.6 V with internal 1.8 and
1.25 V regulators
- Optional 32.768 kHz crystal for higher timer accuracy
- Low external component count with single 24 MHz
crystal
PA
SYNTH
DAC
LNA
IF
ADC
HF crystal
OSC
VDD_CORE
1.25V
Regulator
VREG_OUT
1.8V
Regulator
Internal HF
RC-OSC
Calibration
ADC
General
purpose
timers
GPIO
registers
General
Purpose
ADC
POR
LF crystal
OSC
MAC
+
Baseband
Data
RAM
12 kB
Program
Flash
128 kB
ARM® CortexTM-M3
CPU with NVIC
and MPU
2nd level
Interrupt
controller
CPU debug
TPIU/ITM/
FPB/DWT
Encryption
acclerator
Packet Trace
Bias
nRESET
Innovative network and processor debug
- Packet Trace Port for non-intrusive packet trace with
TX_ACTIVE
PA
OSCB
+8 dBm
- Robust Wi-Fi and Bluetooth coexistence
- Support for external power amplifier
- Small 7x7 mm 48-pin QFN package
PA select
OSCA
–102 dBm (1% PER, 20 byte packet)
- +3 dB normal mode output power; configurable up to
Ember development tools
- Low-frequency internal RC oscillator for low-power sleep
RF_P,N
to 110 dB
- –100 dBm normal RX sensitivity; configurable to
- Serial Wire/JTAG interface
- Standard ARM debug capabilities: Flash Patch & Break-
Low power consumption, advanced management
- RX Current (w/ CPU): 26 mA
- TX Current (w/ CPU, +3 dBm TX): 31 mA
- Low deep sleep current, with retained RAM and GPIO:
RF_TX_ALT_P,N
Exceptional RF Performance
- Normal mode link budget up to 103 dB; configurable up
Internal LF
RC-OSC
UART/
SPI/TWI
Always
Powered
Domain
Watchdog
Serial
Wire and
JTAG
debug
Chip
manager
Sleep
timer
SWCLK,
JTCK
GPIO multiplexor switch
PA[7:0], PB[7:0], PC[7:0]
Rev 1.0 8/14
Copyright © 2014 by Silicon Laboratories
EM341
EM341
Ta b l e o f C o n t e n ts
1. Typical Application ..............................................................................................................4
2. Electrical Specifications......................................................................................................7
2.1. Absolute Maximum Ratings............................................................................................7
2.2. Recommended Operating Conditions ............................................................................7
2.3. Environmental Characteristics........................................................................................8
2.4. DC Electrical Characteristics..........................................................................................8
2.5. Digital I/O Specifications .............................................................................................. 13
2.6. Non-RF System Electrical Characteristics ................................................................... 14
2.7. RF Electrical Characteristics ........................................................................................ 15
3. Functional Description ...................................................................................................... 21
4. Radio Module ..................................................................................................................... 24
4.1. Receive (RX) Path........................................................................................................24
4.2. Transmit (TX) Path ....................................................................................................... 24
4.3. Calibration .................................................................................................................... 24
4.4. Integrated MAC Module ............................................................................................... 25
4.5. Packet Trace Interface (PTI) ........................................................................................ 25
4.6. Random Number Generator......................................................................................... 25
5. ARM® Cortex™-M3 and Memory Modules ...................................................................... 26
5.1. ARM® Cortex™-M3 Microprocessor............................................................................26
5.2. Embedded Memory ...................................................................................................... 26
5.3. Memory Protection Unit................................................................................................ 32
6. System Modules.................................................................................................................33
6.1. Power Domains ............................................................................................................ 34
6.2. Resets .......................................................................................................................... 35
6.3. Clocks........................................................................................................................... 38
6.4. System Timers ............................................................................................................. 43
6.5. Power Management ..................................................................................................... 44
6.6. Security Accelerator ..................................................................................................... 47
7. GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output) ............................................................................. 48
7.1. GPIO Ports ................................................................................................................... 49
7.2. Configuration ................................................................................................................ 49
7.3. Forced Functions.......................................................................................................... 50
7.4. Reset ............................................................................................................................ 50
7.5. Boot Configuration........................................................................................................51
7.6. GPIO Modes................................................................................................................. 51
7.7. Wake Monitoring .......................................................................................................... 52
7.8. External Interrupts ........................................................................................................53
7.9. Debug Control and Status ............................................................................................ 54
7.10.GPIO Signal Assignment Summary............................................................................. 55
7.11.Registers......................................................................................................................56
8. Serial Controllers ...............................................................................................................68
8.1. Overview ......................................................................................................................68
8.2. Configuration ................................................................................................................ 69
8.3. SPI—Slave Mode ......................................................................................................... 74
2
Rev 1.0
EM341
8.4. UART—Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter............................................... 78
8.5. DMA Channels ............................................................................................................. 86
9. Interrupt System .............................................................................................................. 100
9.1. Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC).............................................................. 100
9.2. Event Manager ........................................................................................................... 102
9.3. Non-Maskable Interrupt (NMI).................................................................................... 104
9.4. Faults.......................................................................................................................... 105
9.5. Registers ....................................................................................................................106
10. Trace Port Interface Unit (TPIU)...................................................................................... 113
11. Instrumentation Trace Macrocell (ITM) ..........................................................................114
12. Data Watchpoint and Trace (DWT) .................................................................................115
13. Flash Patch and Breakpoint (FPB) .................................................................................116
14. Integrated Voltage Regulator.......................................................................................... 117
15. Serial Wire and JTAG (SWJ) Interface ........................................................................... 119
16. Ordering Information ....................................................................................................... 120
17. Pin Definitions.................................................................................................................. 121
17.1.Pin Definitions ............................................................................................................ 121
18. Package ............................................................................................................................ 128
19. Top Marking...................................................................................................................... 131
Appendix A—Register Address Table.................................................................................132
Appendix B—Abbreviations and Acronyms....................................................................... 137
Appendix C—References ..................................................................................................... 141
Document Change List ......................................................................................................... 142
Contact Information .............................................................................................................. 143
Rev 1.0
3
EM341
1. Typical Application
Figure 1.1 illustrates the typical application circuit, and Table 1.1 contains an example bill of materials (BOM) for
the off-chip components required by the EM341.
Note: The circuit shown in Figure 1.1 is for example purposes only, and the BOM is for budgetary quotes only. For a complete
reference design, please download one of the latest Ember Hardware Reference Designs from the Silicon Labs website
(www.silabs.com/zigbee-support).
The Balun provides an impedance transformation from the antenna to the EM341 for both TX and RX modes.
L1 tunes the impedance presented to the RF port for maximum transmit power and receive sensitivity.
The harmonic filter (L2, L3, C5, C6 and C9) provides additional suppression of the second harmonic, which
increases the margin over the FCC limit.
The 24 MHz crystal Y1 with loading capacitors is required and provides the high-frequency crystal oscillator source
for the EM341's main system clock. The 32.768 kHz crystal with loading capacitors generates a highly accurate
low-frequency crystal oscillator for use with peripherals, but it is not mandatory as the low-frequency internal RC
oscillator can be used.
Loading capacitance and ESR (C1 and R3) provides stability for the internal 1.8 V regulator.
Loading capacitance C2 provides stability for the internal 1.25 V regulator, no ESR is required because it is
contained within the chip.
Resistor R1 reduces the operating voltage of the flash memory, this reduces current consumption and improves
sensitivity by 1 dB when compared to not using it.
Various decoupling capacitors are required, these should be placed as close to their corresponding pins as
possible. For values and locations see one of the latest reference designs.
An antenna matched to 50 is required.
4
Rev 1.0
EM341
Y1
C3
C4
VBRD
1
Antenna
2
L2
RF_P
EM341
L1
PB0
PC4
PC3
PC2
JTCK
4
5
6
7
8
C5 C6
9
Harmonic
Filter
RF_N
PB2
VDD_RF
RF_TX_ ALT_P
RF_TX_ ALT_N
VDD_IF
PB1
PA6
VDD_ PADS
NC
PA5
10
11
12
VDD_ PADSA
PC5
nRESET
PA4
PA3
GND
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
49
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
C9
VDD_ VCO
PC6
PC7
VREG_OUT
VDD_PADS
VDD_CORE
PA7
PB3
PB4
PA0
PA1
VDD_PADS
PA2
L3
VDD_24MHz
DC
Ceramic
Balun
3
OSCA
OSCB
VDD_SYNTH
VDD_PRE
VDD_CORE
PB5
PB6
PB7
PC0
VDD_MEM
PC1
VDD_PADS
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
R1
C7
Optional
C2
Y2
C8
PC2
PC0
PC3
R3
JTCK
PC4
C1
nReset
PA4
Programing and
debug interface
( these pins should be
routed to test points
)
PA5
Figure 1.1. Typical Application Circuit
Rev 1.0
5
EM341
Table 1.1 contains a typical Bill of Materials for the application circuit shown in Figure 1.1. The information within
this table should be used for a rough cost analysis. For a more detailed BOM, please refer to one of Ember EM357based reference designs at the Silicon Labs website (www.silabs.com/zigbee-support).
Table 1.1. Bill of Materials for Typical Application Circuit
Item Qty
6
Reference
Description
Manufacturer
1
1
C2
CAPACITOR, 1 µF, 6.3 V, X5R, 10%, 0402
<not specified>
2
1
C1
CAPACITOR, 2.2 µF, 10 V, X5R, 10%, 0603
<not specified>
3
1
C7
CAPACITOR, 22 pF, ±5%, 50 V, NPO, 0402
<not specified>
4
2
C3,C4
CAPACITOR, 18 pF, ±5%, 50 V, NPO, 0402
<not specified>
5
1
C8
CAPACITOR, 33 pF, ±5%, 50 V, NPO, 0402
<not specified>
6
2
C5, C9
CAPACITOR, 1 pF, ±0.25 pF, 50 V, 0402, NPO
<not specified>
7
1
C6
CAPACITOR, 1.8 pF, ±0.25 pF, 50 V, 0402, NPO
8
1
L1
INDUCTOR, 5.1 nH, ±0.3 nH, 0402 MULTILAYER
Murata LQG15HS5N1
9
2
L2, L3
INDUCTOR, 2.7 nH, ±0.3 nH, 0402, MULTILAYER
Murata LQG15HS2N7
10
1
R1
RESISTOR, 10 Ω, 5%, 0402
<not specified>
11
1
R3
RESISTOR, 1 Ω, 5%, 0402
<not specified>
12
1
U1
EM341 SINGLE-CHIP RF4CE SOLUTION
Ember EM341
13
1
Y1
CRYSTAL, 24.000 MHz, ± 25 ppm STABILITY
OVER –40 to +85 ºC, 18 pF
ILSI, Abracon, KDS,
Epson
14
1
Y2 (Optional)
CRYSTAL, 32.768 kHz, ±20 ppm INITIAL TOLERANCE AT +25ºC, 12.5 pF
Abracon, KDS, Epson
15
1
BLN1
BALUN, CERAMIC 50/100 Ω
Wurth 748421245
Johanson
2450BL15B100E
Murata LDB212G4010C
16
1
ANT1
ANTENNA
Johanson
2450AT18B100E
Rev 1.0
EM341
2. Electrical Specifications
2.1. Absolute Maximum Ratings
Table 2.1 lists the absolute maximum ratings for the EM341.
Table 2.1. Absolute Maximum Ratings
Parameter
Test Condition
Min
Max
Unit
Regulator input voltage (VDD_PADS)
–0.3
+3.6
V
Analog, Memory and Core voltage (VDD_24MHZ,
VDD_VCO, VDD_RF, VDD_IF, VDD_PADSA,
VDD_MEM, VDD_PRE, VDD_SYNTH, VDD_CORE)
–0.3
+2.0
V
Voltage on RF_P,N; RF_TX_ALT_P,N
–0.3
+3.6
V
—
+15
dBm
Voltage on any GPIO (PA[7:0], PB[7:0], PC[7:0]),
SWCLK, nRESET, VREG_OUT
–0.3
VDD_PADS
+0.3
V
Voltage on any GPIO pin (PA4, PA5, PB5, PB6, PB7,
PC1), when used as an input to the general purpose
ADC
–0.3
2.0
V
Voltage on OSCA, OSCB, NC
–0.3 VDD_PADSA
+0.3
V
Storage temperature
–40
°C
RX signal into a lossless
balun
RF Input Power
(for max level for correct packet reception see
Table 2.7)
+140
Note: Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
2.2. Recommended Operating Conditions
Table 2.2 lists the rated operating conditions of the EM341.
Table 2.2. Operating Conditions
Parameter
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Regulator input voltage (VDD_PADS)
2.1
—
3.6
V
Analog and memory input voltage
(VDD_24MHZ, VDD_VCO, VDD_RF, VDD_IF,
VDD_PADSA, VDD_MEM, VDD_PRE,
VDD_SYNTH)
1.7
1.8
1.9
V
Core input voltage when supplied from internal
regulator (VDD_CORE)
1.18
1.25
1.32
V
Core input voltage when supplied externally
(VDD_CORE)
1.18
—
1.9
V
Operating temperature range, TA
–40
—
+85
°C
Note: Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
Rev 1.0
7
EM341
2.3. Environmental Characteristics
Table 2.3 lists the rated environmental characteristics of the EM341.
Table 2.3. Environmental Characteristics
Parameter
Symbol
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
On any pin
—
—
±2
kV
ESD (charged device model)
Non-RF pins
—
—
±400
V
ESD (charged device model)
RF pins
—
—
±225
V
ESD (human body model)
JA
Package Thermal Resistance*
27.1
°C/W
*Note: Thermal resistance assumes multi-layer PCB with exposed pad soldered to a PCB board.
2.4. DC Electrical Characteristics
Table 2.4 lists the dc electrical characteristics of the EM341.
Table 2.4. DC Characteristics
Measured on Silicon Labs’ EM357 reference design with TA = 25 °C and VDD = 3 V, unless otherwise noted.
Parameter
Test Condition
Regulator input voltage
(VDD_PADS)
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
2.1
—
3.6
V
Power supply range (VDD_MEM)
Regulator output or external input
1.7
1.8
1.9
V
Power supply range (VDD_CORE)
Regulator output
1.18
1.25
1.32
V
–40 °C, VDD_PADS=3.6 V
—
0.4
—
A
+25 °C, VDD_PADS=3.6 V
—
0.4
—
A
+85 °C, VDD_PADS=3.6 V
—
0.7
—
A
–40 °C, VDD_PADS=3.6 V
—
0.7
—
A
+25 °C, VDD_PADS=3.6 V
—
0.7
—
A
+85°C, VDD_PADS=3.6 V
—
1.1
—
A
–40 °C, VDD_PADS=3.6 V
—
0.8
—
A
+25 °C, VDD_PADS=3.6 V
—
1.0
—
A
+85 °C, VDD_PADS=3.6 V
—
1.5
—
A
–40 °C, VDD_PADS=3.6 V
—
1.1
—
A
+25 °C, VDD_PADS=3.6 V
—
1.3
—
A
+85 °C, VDD_PADS=3.6 V
—
1.8
—
A
With no debugger activity
—
300
—
A
Deep Sleep Current
Quiescent current, internal RC
oscillator disabled
Quiescent current, including
internal RC oscillator
Quiescent current, including
32.768 kHz oscillator
Quiescent current, including
internal RC oscillator and
32.768 kHz oscillator
Simulated deep sleep (debug
mode) current
8
Rev 1.0
EM341
Table 2.4. DC Characteristics (Continued)
Measured on Silicon Labs’ EM357 reference design with TA = 25 °C and VDD = 3 V, unless otherwise noted.
Parameter
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Typ at 25 °C/3.0 V
Max at 85 °C/3.6 V
—
1.2
2.0
mA
ARM® CortexTM-M3, RAM, and
flash memory
25 °C, 1.8 V memory and
1.25 V core
ARM® CortexTM-M3 running at 12 MHz
from crystal oscillator
Radio and all peripherals off
—
6.5
—
mA
ARM® CortexTM-M3, RAM, and
flash memory
25 °C, 1.8 V memory and
1.25 V core
ARM® CortexTM-M3 running at 24 MHz
from crystal oscillator
Radio and all peripherals off
—
7.5
—
mA
ARM® CortexTM-M3, RAM, and
flash memory sleep current
25 °C, 1.8 V memory and
1.25 V core
ARM® CortexTM-M3 sleeping, CPU
clock set to 12 MHz from the crystal
oscillator
Radio and all peripherals off
—
3.0
—
mA
ARM® CortexTM-M3, RAM, and
flash memory sleep current
25 °C, 1.8 V memory and
1.25 V core
®
ARM CortexTM-M3 sleeping, CPU
clock set to 6 MHz from the high frequency RC oscillator
Radio and all peripherals off
—
2.0
—
mA
Serial controller current
For each controller at maximum data
rate
—
0.2
—
mA
General purpose timer current
For each timer at maximum clock rate
—
0.25
—
mA
General purpose ADC current
At maximum sample rate, DMA enabled
—
1.1
—
mA
ARM® CortexTM-M3 sleeping, CPU
clock set to 12 MHz
—
22.0
—
mA
25 °C, VDD_PADS=3.0 V
Total RX current ( = IRadio receiver,
MAC and baseband, CPU + IRAM, ARM® CortexTM-M3 running at 12 MHz
and Flash memory )
25 °C, VDD_PADS=3.0 V
ARM® CortexTM-M3 running at 24 MHz
—
25.5
—
mA
—
26.5
—
mA
Boost mode total RX current ( =
IRadio receiver, MAC and baseband, CPU+ IRAM, and flash
memory )
25 °C, VDD_PADS=3.0 V
ARM CortexTM-M3 running at 12 MHz
—
27.5
—
mA
25 °C, VDD_PADS=3.0 V
ARM® CortexTM-M3 running at 24 MHz
—
28.5
—
mA
Reset Current
Quiescent current, nRESET
asserted
Processor and Peripheral Currents
RX Current
Radio receiver, MAC, and baseband
®
Rev 1.0
9
EM341
Table 2.4. DC Characteristics (Continued)
Measured on Silicon Labs’ EM357 reference design with TA = 25 °C and VDD = 3 V, unless otherwise noted.
Parameter
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Radio transmitter, MAC, and baseband
25 °C and 1.8 V core; max. power out
(+3 dBm typical)
®
ARM CortexTM-M3 sleeping, CPU
clock set to 12 MHz
—
26.0
—
mA
Total TX current ( = IRadio transmitter, MAC and baseband, CPU +
IRAM, and flash memory)
25 °C, VDD_PADS=3.0 V; maximum
power setting (+8 dBm); ARM®
CortexTM-M3 running at 12 MHz
—
42.5
—
mA
25 °C, VDD_PADS=3.0 V; +3 dBm
power setting; ARM® CortexTM-M3
running at 12 MHz
—
30.0
—
mA
25 °C, VDD_PADS=3.0 V; 0 dBm power
setting; ARM® CortexTM-M3 running at
12 MHz
—
27.5
—
mA
25 °C, VDD_PADS=3.0 V; minimum
power setting; ARM® CortexTM-M3
running at 12 MHz
—
21.5
—
mA
25 °C, VDD_PADS=3.0 V; maximum
power setting (+8 dBm); ARM® CortexTM-M3 running at 24 MHz
—
43.5
—
mA
25 °C, VDD_PADS=3.0 V; +3 dBm
power setting; ARM® CortexTM-M3
running at 24 MHz
—
31.0
—
mA
25 °C, VDD_PADS=3.0 V; 0 dBm power
setting; ARM® CortexTM-M3 running at
24 MHz
—
28.5
—
mA
25 °C, VDD_PADS=3.0 V; minimum
power setting; ARM® CortexTM-M3
running at 24 MHz
—
22.5
—
mA
TX Current
10
Rev 1.0
EM341
Figure 2.1 shows the variation of current in transmit mode (with the ARM® CortexTM-M3 running at 12 MHz).
Figure 2.1. Transmit Power Consumption
Rev 1.0
11
EM341
Figure 2.2 shows typical output power against power setting on the Silicon Labs reference design.
Figure 2.2. Transmit Output Power
12
Rev 1.0
EM341
2.5. Digital I/O Specifications
Table 2.5 lists the digital I/O specifications for the EM341. The digital I/O power (named VDD_PADS) comes from
three dedicated pins (pins 23, 28 and 37). The voltage applied to these pins sets the I/O voltage.
Table 2.5. Digital I/O Specifications
Parameter
Test Condition
Voltage supply (regulator input voltage)
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
2.1
—
3.6
V
Low Schmitt switching threshold
VSWIL
Schmitt input threshold going
from high to low
0.42 x
VDD_PADS
—
0.50 x
VDD_PADS
V
High Schmitt switching threshold
VSWIH
Schmitt input threshold going
from low to high
0.62 x
VDD_PADS
—
0.80 x
VDD_PADS
V
Input current for logic 0
IIL
—
—
–0.5
μA
Input current for logic 1
IIH
—
—
+0.5
μA
Input pull-up resistor value
RIPU
24
29
34
k
Input pull-down resistor value
RIPD
24
29
34
k
Output voltage for logic 0
VOL
(IOL = 4 mA for standard pads,
8 mA for high current pads)
0
—
0.18 x
VDD_PADS
V
Output voltage for logic 1
VOH
0.82 x
VDD_PADS
(IOH = 4 mA for standard pads,
8 mA for high current pads)
—
VDD_PADS
V
Output source current
(standard current pad)
IOHS
—
—
4
mA
Output sink current
(standard current pad)
IOLS
—
—
4
mA
Output source current high current pad:
PA6, PA7, PB6, PB7, PC0
IOHH
—
—
8
mA
Output sink current high current pad:
PA6, PA7, PB6, PB7, PC0
IOLH
—
—
8
mA
IOH + IOL
—
—
40
mA
Total output current (for I/O Pads)
Rev 1.0
13
EM341
Table 2.6 lists the nRESET pin specifications for the EM341. The digital I/O power (named VDD_PADS) comes
from three dedicated pins (pins 23, 28 and 37). The voltage applied to these pins sets the I/O voltage.
Table 2.6. nReset Pin Specifications
Parameter
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Low Schmitt switching threshold
VSWIL
Schmitt input threshold going from
high to low
0.42 x
VDD_PADS
—
0.50 x
VDD_PADS
V
High Schmitt switching threshold
VSWIH
Schmitt input threshold going from
low to high
0.62 x
VDD_PADS
—
0.80 x
VDD_PADS
V
Input current for logic 0
IIL
—
—
–0.5
μA
Input current for logic 1
IIH
—
—
+0.5
μA
Input pull-up resistor value
RIPU
Pull-up value while the chip is not
reset
24
29
34
k
Input pull-up resistor value
RIPURESET
Pull-up value while the chip is
reset
12
14.5
17
k
2.6. Non-RF System Electrical Characteristics
Table 2.7 lists the non-RF system level characteristics for the EM341.
Table 2.7. Non-RF System Electrical Characteristics
Measured on Silicon Labs’ EM357 reference design with TA = 25 °C and VDD = 3 V, unless otherwise noted.
Parameter
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
System wake time from deep
sleep
From wakeup event to first ARM® CortexTM-M3 instruction running from 6 MHz
internal RC clock
Includes supply ramp time and oscillator
startup time
—
110
—
µs
Shutdown time going into deep
sleep
From last ARM® CortexTM-M3 instruction
to deep sleep mode
—
5
—
µs
14
Rev 1.0
EM341
2.7. RF Electrical Characteristics
2.7.1. Receive
Table 2.8 lists the key parameters of the integrated IEEE 802.15.4-2003 receiver on the EM341.
Receive measurements were collected with the Silicon Labs EM357 Ceramic Balun Reference Design (Version
A0) at 2440 MHz. The typical number indicates one standard deviation above the mean, measured at room
temperature (25C). The min and max numbers were measured over process corners at room temperature.
Table 2.8. Receive Characteristics
Parameter
Test Condition
Frequency range
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
2400
—
2500
MHz
Sensitivity (boost mode)
1% PER, 20 byte packet defined by
IEEE 802.15.4-2003;
—
–102
–96
dBm
Sensitivity
1% PER, 20 byte packet defined by
IEEE 802.15.4-2003;
—
–100
–94
dBm
High-side adjacent channel rejection
IEEE 802.15.4-2003 interferer signal,
wanted IEEE 802.15.4-2003 signal
at –82 dBm
—
35
—
dB
Low-side adjacent channel rejection
IEEE 802.15.4-2003 interferer signal,
wanted IEEE 802.15.4-2003 signal
at –82 dBm
—
35
—
dB
2nd high-side adjacent channel rejection
IEEE 802.15.4-2003 interferer signal,
wanted IEEE 802.15.4-2003 signal
at –82 dBm
—
46
—
dB
2nd low-side adjacent channel rejection IEEE 802.15.4-2003 interferer signal,
wanted IEEE 802.15.4-2003 signal
at –82 dBm
—
46
—
dB
High-side adjacent channel rejection
Filtered IEEE 802.15.4-2003 interferer signal, wanted IEEE 802.15.42003 signal at –82 dBm
—
39
—
dB
Low-side adjacent channel rejection
Filtered IEEE 802.15.4-2003 interferer signal, wanted IEEE 802.15.42003 signal at –82 dBm
—
47
—
dB
2nd high-side adjacent channel
rejection
Filtered IEEE 802.15.4-2003 interferer signal, wanted IEEE 802.15.42003 signal at –82 dBm
—
49
—
dB
2nd low-side adjacent channel rejection
Filtered IEEE 802.15.4-2003 interferer signal, wanted IEEE 802.15.42003 signal at –82 dBm
—
49
—
dB
High-side adjacent channel rejection
CW interferer signal, wanted IEEE
802.15.4-2003 signal at –82 dBm
—
44
—
dB
Low-side adjacent channel rejection
CW interferer signal, wanted IEEE
802.15.4-2003 signal at –82 dBm
—
47
—
dB
Rev 1.0
15
EM341
Table 2.8. Receive Characteristics (Continued)
Parameter
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
2nd high-side adjacent channel
rejection
CW interferer signal, wanted IEEE
802.15.4-2003 signal at –82 dBm
—
59
—
dB
2nd low-side adjacent channel rejection
CW interferer signal, wanted IEEE
802.15.4-2003 signal at –82 dBm
—
59
—
dB
Channel rejection for all other channels IEEE 802.15.4-2003 interferer signal,
wanted IEEE 802.15.4-2003 signal
at –82 dBm
—
40
—
dB
802.11g rejection centered at +12 MHz IEEE 802.15.4-2003 interferer signal,
or –13 MHz
wanted IEEE 802.15.4-2003 signal
at –82 dBm
—
36
—
dB
Maximum input signal level for correct
operation
0
—
—
dBm
—
–6
—
dBc
Relative frequency error
(50% greater than the 2x40 ppm
required by IEEE 802.15.4-2003)
–120
—
+120
ppm
Relative timing error
(50% greater than the 2x40 ppm
required by IEEE 802.15.4-2003)
–120
—
+120
ppm
40
—
—
dB
–90
—
–40
dBm
Co-channel rejection
Linear RSSI range
IEEE 802.15.4-2003 interferer signal,
wanted IEEE 802.15.4-2003 signal
at –82 dBm
As defined by IEEE 802.15.4-2003
RSSI Range
16
Rev 1.0
EM341
Figure 2.3 shows the variation of receive sensitivity with temperature for boost mode and normal mode for a typical
chip.
Figure 2.3. Receive Sensitivity vs. Temperature
Rev 1.0
17
EM341
2.7.2. Transmit
Table 2.9 lists the key parameters of the integrated IEEE 802.15.4-2003 transmitter on the EM341.
Transmit measurements were collected with the Silicon Labs EM341 Ceramic Balun Reference Design (Version
A0) at 2440 MHz. The Typical number indicates one standard deviation below the mean, measured at room
temperature (25C). The Min and Max numbers were measured over process corners at room temperature. In
terms of impedance, this reference design presents a 3n3 inductor in parallel with a 100:50 Ω balun to the RF pins.
Table 2.9. Transmit Characteristics
Parameter
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Maximum output power
(boost mode)
At highest boost mode power setting (+8)
—
8
—
dBm
Maximum output power
At highest normal mode power setting (+3)
1
5
—
dBm
Minimum output power
At lowest power setting
—
–55
—
dBm
Error vector magnitude
(Offset-EVM)
As defined by IEEE 802.15.4-2003,
which sets a 35% maximum
—
5
15
%
–40
—
+40
ppm
Carrier frequency error
PSD mask relative
3.5 MHz away
–20
—
—
dB
PSD mask absolute
3.5 MHz away
–30
—
—
dBm
18
Rev 1.0
EM341
Figure 2.4 shows the variation of transmit power with temperature for maximum boost mode power, and normal
mode for a typical chip.
Figure 2.4. Transmit Power vs. Temperature
Rev 1.0
19
EM341
2.7.3. Synthesizer
Table 2.10 lists the key parameters of the integrated synthesizer on the EM341.
Table 2.10. Synthesizer Characteristics
Measured on Silicon Labs’ EM357 reference design with TA = 25 °C and VDD = 3 V, unless otherwise noted.
Parameter
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
2400
—
2500
MHz
—
11.7
—
kHz
From off
—
—
100
μs
Channel change or RX/TX turnaround
(IEEE 802.15.4-2003 defines 192 μs
turnaround time)
—
—
100
μs
Phase noise at 100 kHz offset
—
–75
—
dBc/Hz
Phase noise at 1 MHz offset
—
–100
—
dBc/Hz
Phase noise at 4 MHz offset
—
–108
—
dBc/Hz
Phase noise at 10 MHz offset
—
–114
—
dBc/Hz
Frequency range
Frequency resolution
Lock time
Relock time
20
Rev 1.0
EM341
3. Functional Description
The EM341 is a fully integrated system-on-chip that integrates a 2.4 GHz, IEEE 802.15.4-2003-compliant
transceiver, 32-bit ARM® Cortex-M3 microprocessor, flash and RAM memory, and peripherals of use to designers
of ZigBee-based RF4CE Remote control devices.
The transceiver uses an efficient architecture that exceeds the dynamic range requirements imposed by the IEEE
802.15.4-2003 standard by over 15 dB. The integrated receive channel filtering allows for robust co-existence with
other communication standards in the 2.4 GHz spectrum, such as IEEE 802.11-2007 and Bluetooth. The integrated
regulator, VCO, loop filter, and power amplifier keep the external component count low. An optional high
performance radio mode (boost mode) is software-selectable to boost dynamic range.
The integrated 32-bit ARM® Cortex-M3 microprocessor is highly optimized for high performance, low power
consumption, and efficient memory utilization. Including an integrated MPU, it supports two different modes of
operation—privileged mode and user mode. This architecture could allow for separation of the networking stack
from the application code, and prevents unwanted modification of restricted areas of memory and registers
resulting in increased stability and reliability of deployed solutions.
The EM341 has 128 kB of embedded flash memory. It has 12 kB of integrated RAM for data and program storage.
The Ember software for the EM341 employs an effective wear-leveling algorithm that optimizes the lifetime of the
embedded flash.
To maintain the strict timing requirements imposed by the ZigBee RF4CE and IEEE 802.15.4-2003 standards, the
EM341 integrates a number of MAC functions, AES128 encryption accelerator, and automatic CRC handling into
the hardware. The MAC hardware handles automatic ACK transmission and reception, automatic backoff delay,
and clear channel assessment for transmission, as well as automatic filtering of received packets. The Ember
Packet Trace Interface is also integrated with the MAC, allowing complete, non-intrusive capture of all packets to
and from the EM341 with Ember development tools.
The EM341 offers a number of advanced power management features that enable long battery life. A highfrequency internal RC oscillator allows the processor core to begin code execution quickly upon waking. Various
deep sleep modes are available with less than 1 µA power consumption while retaining RAM contents. To support
user-defined applications, on-chip peripherals include UART, SPI, TWI, ADC, and general-purpose timers, as well
as up to 24 GPIOs. Additionally, an integrated voltage regulator, power-on-reset circuit, and sleep timer are
available.
Finally, the EM341 utilizes standard Serial Wire and JTAG interfaces for powerful software debugging and
programming of the ARM Cortex-M3 core. The EM341 integrates the standard ARM system debug components:
Flash Patch and Breakpoint (FPB), Data Watchpoint and Trace (DWT), and Instrumentation Trace Macrocell (ITM).
RF4CE Remote Control is the target application for EM341.
The technical data sheet details the EM341 features available to customers using it with Ember software.
Rev 1.0
21
EM341
Figure 3.1 shows a detailed block diagram of the EM341.
TX_ACTIVE
PA select
RF_TX_ALT_P,N
PA
SYNTH
DAC
MAC
+
Baseband
PA
RF_P,N
LNA
IF
ADC
OSCB
HF crystal
OSC
VDD_CORE
1.25V
Regulator
VREG_OUT
1.8V
Regulator
nRESET
Internal HF
RC-OSC
Calibration
ADC
General
purpose
timers
GPIO
registers
General
Purpose
ADC
POR
LF crystal
OSC
Program
Flash
128 kB
ARM® CortexTM-M3
CPU with NVIC
and MPU
2nd level
Interrupt
controller
CPU debug
TPIU/ITM/
FPB/DWT
Encryption
acclerator
Packet Trace
Bias
OSCA
Data
RAM
12 kB
UART/
SPI/TWI
Internal LF
RC-OSC
Always
Powered
Domain
Watchdog
Serial
Wire and
JTAG
debug
Chip
manager
Sleep
timer
SWCLK,
JTCK
GPIO multiplexor switch
PA[7:0], PB[7:0], PC[7:0]
Figure 3.1. EM341 Block Diagram
The EM341 radio receiver is a low-IF, super-heterodyne receiver. The architecture has been chosen to optimize coexistence with other devices in the 2.4 GHz band (namely Wi-Fi and Bluetooth), and to minimize power
consumption. The receiver uses differential signal paths to reduce sensitivity to noise interference. Following RF
amplification, the signal is downconverted by an image-rejecting mixer, filtered, and then digitized by an ADC.
The digital section of the receiver uses a coherent demodulator to generate symbols for the hardware-based MAC.
The digital receiver also contains the analog radio calibration routines, and controls the gain within the receiver
path.
The radio transmitter uses an efficient architecture in which the data stream directly modulates the VCO frequency.
An integrated PA provides the output power. Digital logic controls TX path and output power calibration. If the
EM341 is to be used with an external PA, use the TX_ACTIVE or nTX_ACTIVE signal to control the timing of the
external switching logic.
The integrated 4.8 GHz VCO and loop filter minimize off-chip circuitry. Only a 24 MHz crystal with its loading
capacitors is required to establish the PLL local oscillator signal.
The MAC interfaces the on-chip RAM to the RX and TX baseband modules. The MAC provides hardware-based
IEEE 802.15.4-2003 packet-level filtering. It supplies an accurate symbol time base that minimizes the
synchronization effort of the Ember software and meets the protocol timing requirements. In addition, it provides
timer and synchronization assistance for the IEEE 802.15.4-2003 CSMA-CA algorithm.
The EM341 integrates hardware support for a packet trace module, which allows robust packet-based debug. This
element is a critical component of Ember Desktop, the Ember development environment, and provides advanced
network debug capability when used with the Ember Debug Adapter (ISA3).
The EM341 integrates an ARM® CortexTM-M3 microprocessor, revision r1p1. This industry-leading core provides
32-bit performance and is very power-efficient. It has excellent code density using the ARM® Thumb-2 instruction
22
Rev 1.0
EM341
set. The processor can be operated at 12 or 24 MHz when using the high-frequency crystal oscillator, or at 6 MHz
or 12 MHz when using the high-frequency internal RC oscillator.
The EM341 has 128 kB of flash memory. The chip has 12 kB of RAM on-chip, and the ARM configurable memory
protection unit (MPU).
The EM341 implements both the ARM Serial Wire and JTAG debug interfaces. These interfaces provide real time,
non-intrusive programming and debugging capabilities. Serial Wire and JTAG provide the same functionality, but
are mutually exclusive. The Serial Wire interface uses two pins; the JTAG interface uses five. Serial Wire is
preferred, since it uses fewer pins.
The EM341 contains 24 GPIO pins shared with other peripheral or alternate functions. Because of flexible routing
within the EM341, external devices can use the alternate functions on a variety of different GPIOs.The integrated
serial controller SC1 can be configured for SPI (master or slave), TWI (master-only), or UART operation, and the
serial controller SC2 can be configured for SPI (master or slave) or TWI (master-only) operation.
The EM341 has a general purpose ADC which can sample analog signals from six GPIO pins in single-ended or
differential modes. It can also sample the 1.8 V regulated supply VDD_PADSA, the voltage reference VREF, and
GND. The ADC has one voltage range: 0 to 1.2 V (normal). The ADC has a DMA mode to capture samples and
automatically transfer them into RAM. The integrated voltage reference for the ADC, VREF, can be made available
to external circuitry. The regulator input voltage, VDD_PADS, cannot be measured using the general purpose ADC,
but it can be measured through Ember software.
The EM341 contains four oscillators: a high-frequency 24 MHz external crystal oscillator, a high-frequency 12 MHz
internal RC oscillator, an optional low-frequency 32.768 kHz external crystal oscillator, and a low-frequency 10 kHz
internal RC oscillator.
The EM341 has an ultra low power, deep sleep state with a choice of clocking modes. The sleep timer can be
clocked with either the external 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator or with a 1 kHz clock derived from the internal 10 kHz
RC oscillator. Alternatively, all clocks can be disabled for the lowest power mode. In the lowest power mode, only
external events on GPIO pins will wake up the chip. The EM341 has a fast startup time (typically 110 µs) from deep
sleep to the execution of the first ARM® CortexTM-M3 instruction.
The EM341 contains three power domains. The always-on high voltage supply powers the GPIO pads and critical
chip functions. Regulated low voltage supplies power the rest of the chip. The low voltage supplies are disabled
during deep sleep to reduce power consumption. Integrated voltage regulators generate regulated 1.25 V and
1.8 V voltages from an unregulated supply voltage. The 1.8 V regulator output is decoupled and routed externally
to supply analog blocks, RAM, and flash memories. The 1.25 V regulator output is decoupled externally and
supplies the core logic.
Rev 1.0
23
EM341
4. Radio Module
The radio module consists of an analog front end and digital baseband as shown in Figure 3.1 on page 22.
4.1. Receive (RX) Path
The RX path uses a low-IF, super-heterodyne receiver that rejects the image frequency using complex mixing and
polyphase filtering. In the analog domain, the input RF signal from the antenna is first amplified and mixed down to
a 4 MHz IF frequency. The mixers’ output is filtered, combined, and amplified before being sampled by a 12 MSPS
ADC. The digitized signal is then demodulated in the digital baseband. The filtering within the RX path improves
the EM341’s co-existence with other 2.4 GHz transceivers such as Zigbee/ 802.15.4-2003, IEEE 802.11-2007, and
Bluetooth radios. The digital baseband also provides gain control of the RX path, both to enable the reception of
small and large wanted signals and to tolerate large interferers.
4.1.1. RX Baseband
The EM341 RX digital baseband implements a coherent demodulator for optimal performance. The baseband
demodulates the O-QPSK signal at the chip level and synchronizes with the IEEE 802.15.4-2003-defined
preamble. An automatic gain control (AGC) module adjusts the analog gain continuously every ¼ symbol until the
preamble is detected. Once detected, the gain is fixed for the remainder of the packet. The baseband despreads
the demodulated data into 4-bit symbols. These symbols are buffered and passed to the hardware-based MAC
module for packet assembly and filtering.
In addition, the RX baseband provides the calibration and control interface to the analog RX modules, including the
LNA, RX baseband filter, and modulation modules. The Ember software includes calibration algorithms that use
this interface to reduce the effects of silicon process and temperature variation.
4.1.2. RSSI and CCA
The EM341 calculates the RSSI over every 8-symbol period as well as at the end of a received packet. The linear
range of RSSI is specified to be at least 40 dB over temperature. At room temperature, the linear range is
approximately 60 dB (–90 dBm to –30 dBm input signal).
The EM341 RX baseband provides support for the IEEE 802.15.4-2003 RSSI CCA method. Clear channel reports
busy medium if RSSI exceeds its threshold.
4.2. Transmit (TX) Path
The EM341 TX path produces an O-QPSK-modulated signal using the analog front end and digital baseband. The
area- and power-efficient TX architecture uses a two-point modulation scheme to modulate the RF signal
generated by the synthesizer. The modulated RF signal is fed to the integrated PA and then out of the EM341.
4.2.1. TX Baseband
The EM341 TX baseband in the digital domain spreads the 4-bit symbol into its IEEE 802.15.4-2003-defined 32chip sequence. It also provides the interface for the Ember software to calibrate the TX module to reduce silicon
process, temperature, and voltage variations.
4.2.2. TX_ACTIVE and nTX_ACTIVE Signals
For applications requiring an external PA, two signals are provided called TX_ACTIVE and nTX_ACTIVE. These
signals are the inverse of each other. They can be used for external PA power management and RF switching
logic. In transmit mode the TX baseband drives TX_ACTIVE high, as described in Table 7.5 on page 55. In receive
mode the TX_ACTIVE signal is low. TX_ACTIVE is the alternate function of PC5, and nTX_ACTIVE is the alternate
function of PC6. See "7. GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output)" on page 48 for details of the alternate GPIO
functions. The digital I/O that provide these signals have a 4 mA output sink and source capability.
4.3. Calibration
The Ember software calibrates the radio using dedicated hardware resources.
24
Rev 1.0
EM341
4.4. Integrated MAC Module
The EM341 integrates most of the IEEE 802.15.4-2003 MAC requirements in hardware. This allows the ARM®
CortexTM-M3 CPU to provide greater bandwidth to application and network operations. In addition, the hardware
acts as a first-line filter for unwanted packets. The EM341 MAC uses a DMA interface to RAM to further reduce the
overall ARM® CortexTM-M3 CPU interaction when transmitting or receiving packets.
When a packet is ready for transmission, the Ember software configures the TX MAC DMA by indicating the packet
buffer RAM location. The MAC waits for the backoff period, then switches the baseband to TX mode and performs
channel assessment. When the channel is clear the MAC reads data from the RAM buffer, calculates the CRC, and
provides 4-bit symbols to the baseband. When the final byte has been read and sent to the baseband, the CRC
remainder is read and transmitted.
The MAC is in RX mode most of the time. In RX mode various format and address filters keep unwanted packets
from using excessive RAM buffers, and prevent the CPU from being unnecessarily interrupted. When the reception
of a packet begins, the MAC reads 4-bit symbols from the baseband and calculates the CRC. It then assembles the
received data for storage in a RAM buffer. RX MAC DMA provides direct access to RAM. Once the packet has
been received additional data, which provides statistical information on the packet to the Ember software, is
appended to the end of the packet in the RAM buffer space.
The primary features of the MAC are as follows:
CRC
generation, appending, and checking
timers and interrupts to achieve the MAC symbol timing
Automatic preamble and SFD pre-pending on TX packets
Address recognition and packet filtering on RX packets
Automatic acknowledgment transmission
Automatic transmission of packets from memory
Automatic transmission after backoff time if channel is clear (CCA)
Automatic acknowledgment checking
Time stamping received and transmitted messages
Attaching packet information to received packets (LQI, RSSI, gain, time stamp, and packet status)
IEEE 802.15.4-2003 timing and slotted/unslotted timing
Hardware
4.5. Packet Trace Interface (PTI)
The EM341 integrates a true PHY-level PTI for effective network-level debugging. It monitors all the PHY TX and
RX packets between the MAC and baseband modules without affecting their normal operation. It cannot be used to
inject packets into the PHY/MAC interface. This 500 kbps asynchronous interface comprises the frame signal
(PTI_EN, PA4) and the data signal (PTI_DATA, PA5). PTI is supported by the Ember development tools.
4.6. Random Number Generator
Thermal noise in the analog circuitry is digitized to provide entropy for a true random number generator (TRNG).
The TRNG produces 16-bit uniformly distributed numbers. The Ember software uses the TRNG to seed a pseudo
random number generator (PRNG). The TRNG is also used directly for cryptographic key generation.
Rev 1.0
25
EM341
5. ARM® Cortex™-M3 and Memory Modules
This chapter discusses the ARM® CortexTM-M3 Microprocessor, and reviews the EM341’s flash and RAM memory
modules as well as the Memory Protection Unit (MPU).
5.1. ARM® Cortex™-M3 Microprocessor
The EM341 integrates the ARM® CortexTM-M3 microprocessor, revision r1p1, developed by ARM Ltd., making the
EM341 a true System-on-Chip solution. The ARM® CortexTM-M3 is an advanced 32-bit modified Harvard
architecture processor that has separate internal program and data buses, but presents a unified program and data
address space to software. The word width is 32 bits for both the program and data sides. The ARM® CortexTM-M3
allows unaligned word and half-word data accesses to support efficiently-packed data structures.
The ARM® CortexTM-M3 in the EM341 has also been enhanced to support two separate memory protection levels.
Basic protection is available without using the MPU, but normal operation uses the MPU. The MPU allows for
protecting unimplemented areas of the memory map to prevent common software bugs from interfering with
software operation. The architecture could also allow for separation of the networking stack from the application
code using a fine granularity RAM protection module. Errant writes are captured and details are reported to the
developer to assist in tracking down and fixing issues.
5.2. Embedded Memory
Figure 5.1 shows the EM341 ARM® CortexTM-M3 memory map.
26
Rev 1.0
EM341
0xE00FFFFF
0xE00FF000
0xE0042000
0xE0041000
0xE0040000
0xE003 FFFF
0xE000F000
0xE000E000
0xE0003000
0xE0002000
0xE0001000
0xE0000000
ROM table
Not used
0xFFFFFFFF
Not used
Not used
TPIU
Private periph bus (external)
Not used
Private periph bus (internal)
NVIC
0xE0000000
0xDFFFFFFF
Not used
FPB
DWT
Not used
ITM
0x42002 XXX
Register bit band
alias region
mapped onto System
interface
(not used)
0xA0000000
0x9FFFFFFF
0x42000000
0x40000 XXX
0x40000000
0x22002000
Not used
Registers
mapped onto System
interface
RAM bit band
alias region
mapped onto System
interface
(not used)
0x60000000
0x5FFFFFFF
Peripheral
0x40000000
0x3FFFFFFF
0x22000000
0x20002FFF
0x20000000
0x08040 FFF
0x08040800
0x080407 FF
0x08040000
RAM (12kB)
mapped onto System
interface
RAM
0x20000000
0x1FFFFFFF
Customer Info Block (2kB)
Fixed Info Block (2kB)
Flash
0x0801 FFFF
0x00000000
Main Flash Block (128kB)
Upper mapping
(Boot mode)
0x08000000
Optional boot mode
maps Fixed Info Block
to the start of memory
0x0001 FFFF
0x000007 FF
Fixed Info Block (2kB)
Main Flash Block (128kB)
Lower mapping
(Normal Mode)
0x00000000
Figure 5.1. EM341 ARM® CortexTM-M3 Memory Map
Rev 1.0
27
EM341
5.2.1. Flash Memory
5.2.1.1. Flash Overview
The EM341 provides a total of 128 kB of flash memory. The flash memory is provided in three separate blocks:
Main
Flash Block (MFB)
Fixed Information Block (FIB)
Customer Information Block (CIB)
The MFB is divided into 2048-byte pages. The EM341 has 64 pages. The CIB is a single 2048-byte page. The FIB
is a single 2048-byte page. The smallest erasable unit is one page and the smallest writable unit is an aligned 16bit half-word. The flash is rated to have a guaranteed 20,000 write/erase cycles. The flash cell has been qualified
for a data retention time of >100 years at room temperature.
Flash may be programmed either through the Serial Wire/JTAG interface or through bootloader software.
Programming flash through Serial Wire/JTAG requires the assistance of RAM-based utility code. Programming
through a bootloader requires Ember software for over-the-air loading or serial link loading.
5.2.1.2. Main Flash Block
The start of the MFB is mapped to both address 0x00000000 and address 0x08000000 in normal boot mode, but is
mapped only to address 0x08000000 in FIB monitor mode (see also "7.5. Boot Configuration" on page 51).
Consequently, it is recommended that software intended to execute from the MFB is designed to operate from the
upper address, 0x08000000, since this address mapping is always available in all modes.
The MFB stores all program instructions and constant data. A small portion of the MFB is devoted to non-volatile
token storage using the Ember Simulated EEPROM system.
5.2.1.3. Fixed Information Block
The 2 kB FIB is used to store fixed manufacturing data including serial numbers and calibration values. The start of
the FIB is mapped to address 0x08040000. This block can only be programmed during production by Silicon Labs.
The FIB also contains a monitor program, which is a serial-link-only way of performing low-level memory accesses.
In FIB monitor mode (see "7.5. Boot Configuration" on page 51), the start of the FIB is mapped to both address
0x00000000 and address 0x08040000 so the monitor may be executed out of reset.
5.2.1.4. Customer Information Block
The 2048 byte CIB can be used to store customer data. The start of the CIB is mapped to address 0x08040800.
The CIB cannot be executed.
The first eight half-words of the CIB are dedicated to special storage called option bytes. An option byte is a 16 bit
quantity of flash where the lower 8 bits contain the data and the upper 8 contain the inverse of the lower 8 bits. The
upper 8 bits are automatically generated by hardware and cannot be written to by the user, see Table 5.1.
The option byte hardware also verifies the inverse of each option byte when exiting from reset and generates an
error, which prevents the CPU from executing code, if a discrepancy is found. All of this is transparent to the user.
28
Rev 1.0
EM341
Table 5.1. Option Byte Storage
Address
bits [15:8]
bits [7:0]
Notes
0x08040800 Inverse Option Byte 0
Option Byte 0 Configures flash read protection
0x08040802 Inverse Option Byte 1
Option Byte 1 Reserved
0x08040804 Inverse Option Byte 2
Option Byte 2 Available for customer use1
0x08040806 Inverse Option Byte 3
Option Byte 3 Available for customer use1
0x08040808 Inverse Option Byte 4
Option Byte 4 Configures flash write protection
0x0804080A Inverse Option Byte 5
Option byte 5
0x0804080C Inverse Option Byte 6
Option Byte 6 Reserved
0x0804080E Inverse Option Byte 7
Option Byte 7 Reserved
Configures flash write protection
Notes:
1. Option bytes 2 and 3 do not link to any specific hardware functionality other than the option byte loader.
Therefore, they are best used for storing data that requires a hardware verification of the data integrity.
Table 5.2 shows the mapping of the option bytes that are used for read and write protection of the flash. Each bit of
the flash write protection option bytes protects a 4 page region of the main flash block. The EM341 has 16 regions
and therefore option bytes 4 and 5 control flash write protection (option byte 6 is reserved/unused).These write
protection bits are active low, and therefore the erased state of 0xFF disables write protection. Like read protection,
write protection only takes effect after a reset. Write protection not only prevents a write to the region, but also
prevents page erasure.
Option byte 0 controls flash read protection. When option byte 0 is set to 0xA5, read protection is disabled. All other
values, including the erased state 0xFF, enable read protection when coming out of reset. The internal state of read
protection (active versus disabled) can only be changed by applying a full chip reset. If a debugger is connected to
the EM341, the intrusion state is latched. Read protection is combined with this latched intrusion signal. When both
read protection and intrusion are set, all flash is disconnected from the internal bus. As a side effect, the CPU
cannot execute code since all flash is disconnected from the bus. This functionality prevents a debug tool from
being able to read the contents of any flash. The only means of clearing the intrusion signal is to disconnect the
debugger and reset the entire chip using the nRESET pin. By requiring a chip reset, a debugger cannot install or
execute malicious code that could allow the contents of the flash to be read.
The only way to disable read protection is to program option byte 0 with the value 0xA5. Option byte 0 must be
erased before it can be programmed. Erasing option byte 0 while read protection is active automatically masserases the main flash block. By automatically erasing main flash, a debugger cannot disable read protection and
readout the contents of main flash without destroying its contents.
When read protection is active, the bottom four flash pages, addresses 0x08000000 to 0x08001FFF, are
automatically write-protected. Write protecting the bottom four flash pages of main flash prevents an attacker from
reprogramming the reset vector and executing arbitrary code.
In general, if read protection is active then write protection should also be active. This prevents an attacker from
reprogramming flash with malicious code that could readout the flash after the debugger is disconnected. Even
though read protection automatically protects the reset vector, the same technique of reprogramming flash could
be performed at an address outside the bottom four flash pages. To obtain fully protected flash, both read
protection and write protection should be active.
Rev 1.0
29
EM341
Table 5.2. Option Byte Write Protection Bit Map
Option Byte
Bit
Option Byte 0
bit [7:0]
Read protection of all flash (MFB, FIB, CIB)
Option Byte 1
bit [7:0]
Reserved for Silicon Labs use
Option Byte 2
bit [7:0]
Available for customer use
Option Byte 3
bit [7:0]
Available for customer use
Option Byte 4
bit [0]
Write protection of address range 0x08000000 – 0x08001FFF
bit [1]
Write protection of address range 0x08002000 – 0x08003FFF
bit [2]
Write protection of address range 0x08004000 – 0x08005FFF
bit [3]
Write protection of address range 0x08006000 – 0x08007FFF
bit [4]
Write protection of address range 0x08008000 – 0x08009FFF
bit [5]
Write protection of address range 0x0800A000 – 0x0800BFFF
bit [6]
Write protection of address range 0x0800C000 – 0x0800DFFF
bit [7]
Write protection of address range 0x0800E000 – 0x0800FFFF
bit [0]
Write protection of address range 0x08010000 – 0x08011FFF
bit [1]
Write protection of address range 0x08012000 – 0x08013FFF
bit [2]
Write protection of address range 0x08014000 – 0x08015FFF
bit [3]
Write protection of address range 0x08016000 – 0x08017FFF
bit [4]
Write protection of address range 0x08018000 – 0x08019FFF
bit [5]
Write protection of address range 0x0801A000 – 0x0801BFFF
bit [6]
Write protection of address range 0x0801C000 – 0x0801DFFF
bit [7]
Write protection of address range 0x0801E000 – 0x0801FFFF
Option Byte 6
bit[7:0]
Unused
Option Byte 7
bit [7:0]
Reserved for Silicon Labs use
Option Byte 5
30
Notes
Rev 1.0
EM341
5.2.1.5. Simulated EEPROM
Ember software reserves 8 kB of the main flash block as a simulated EEPROM storage area for stack and
customer tokens. The simulated EEPROM storage area implements a wear-leveling algorithm to extend the
number of simulated EEPROM write cycles beyond the physical limit of 20,000 write cycles for which each flash
cell is qualified.
5.2.2. RAM
5.2.2.1. RAM Overview
The EM341 has 12 kB of static RAM on-chip. The start of RAM is mapped to address 0x20000000. Although the
ARM® CortexTM-M3 allows bit band accesses to this address region, the standard MPU configuration does not
permit use of the bit-band feature.
The RAM is physically connected to the AHB System bus and is therefore accessible to both the ARM® CortexTMM3 microprocessor and the debugger. The RAM can be accessed for both instruction and data fetches as bytes,
half words, or words. The standard MPU configuration does not permit execution from the RAM, but for special
purposes the MPU may be disabled. To the bus, the RAM appears as 32-bit wide memory and in most situations
has zero wait state read or write access. In the higher CPU clock mode the RAM requires two wait states. This is
handled by hardware transparent to the user application with no configuration required.
5.2.2.2. Direct Memory Access (DMA) to RAM
Several of the peripherals are equipped with DMA controllers allowing them to transfer data into and out of RAM
autonomously. This applies to the radio (802.15.4-2003 MAC), general purpose ADC, and both serial controllers. In
the case of the serial controllers, the DMA is full duplex so that a read and a write to RAM may be requested at the
same time. Thus there are six DMA channels in total. See "8.7. DMA Channels" on page 99 and "10.1.4. DMA" on
page 173 for a description of how to configure the serial controllers and ADC for DMA operation. The DMA
channels do not use AHB system bus bandwidth as they access the RAM directly.
The EM341 integrates a DMA arbiter that ensures fair access to the microprocessor as well as the peripherals
through a fixed priority scheme appropriate to the memory bandwidth requirements of each master. The priority
scheme is as follows, with the top peripheral being the highest priority:
1. General Purpose ADC
2. Serial Controller 2 Receive
3. Serial Controller 2 Transmit
4. MAC
5. Serial Controller 1 Receive
6. Serial Controller 1 Transmit
5.2.2.3. RAM Memory Protection
The EM341 integrates two memory protection mechanisms. The first memory protection mechanism is through the
ARM® CortexTM-M3 Memory Protection Unit (MPU) described in “5.3. Memory Protection Unit”. The MPU may be
used to protect any area of memory. MPU configuration is normally handled by Ember software. The second
memory protection mechanism is through a fine granularity RAM protection module. This allows segmentation of
the RAM into 32-byte blocks where any block can be marked as write protected. An attempt to write to a protected
RAM block using a user mode write results in a bus error being signaled on the AHB System bus. A privileged
mode write is allowed at any time and reads are allowed in either mode. The main purpose of this fine granularity
RAM protection module is to notify the software of erroneous writes to system areas of memory. RAM protection is
configured using a group of registers that provide a bit map. Each bit in the map represents a 32-byte block of
RAM. When the bit is set the block is write-protected.
The fine granularity RAM memory protection mechanism is also available to the peripheral DMA controllers. A
register bit enables protection from DMA writes to protected memory. If a DMA write is made to a protected location
in RAM, a management interrupt is generated. At the same time the faulting address and the identification of the
peripheral is captured for later debugging. Note that only peripherals capable of writing data to RAM, such as
received packet data or a received serial port character, can generate this interrupt.
Rev 1.0
31
EM341
5.2.3. Registers
Appendix A, Register Address Table provides a short description of all application-accessible registers within the
EM341. Complete descriptions are provided at the end of each applicable peripheral’s description. The registers
are mapped to the system address space starting at address 0x40000000. These registers allow for the control
and configuration of the various peripherals and modules. The CPU only performs word-aligned accesses on the
system bus. The CPU performs a word aligned read-modify-write for all byte, half-word, and unaligned writes and a
word-aligned read for all reads. Silicon Labs recommends accessing all peripheral registers using word-aligned
addressing.
As with the RAM, the peripheral registers fall within an address range that allows for bit-band access by the ARM®
CortexTM-M3, but the standard MPU configuration does not allow access to this alias address range.
5.3. Memory Protection Unit
The EM341 includes the ARM® CortexTM-M3 Memory Protection Unit, or MPU. The MPU controls access rights
and characteristics of up to eight address regions, each of which may be divided into eight equal sub-regions.
Refer to the ARM® CortexTM-M3 Technical Reference Manual (DDI 0337A) for a detailed description of the MPU.
Ember software configures the MPU in a standard configuration and application software should not modify it. The
configuration is designed for optimal detection of illegal instruction or data accesses. If an illegal access is
attempted, the MPU captures information about the access type, the address being accessed, and the location of
the offending software. This simplifies software debugging and increases the reliability of deployed devices. As a
consequence of this MPU configuration, accessing RAM and register bit-band address alias regions is not
permitted, and generates a bus fault if attempted.
32
Rev 1.0
EM341
6. System Modules
System modules encompass power domains, resets, clocks, system timers, power management, and encryption.
Figure 6.1 shows these modules and how they interact.
CSYSPWRUPREQ
CDBGPWRUPREQ
WAKE_CORE
sleep timer wrap
sleep timer compare a
sleep timer compare b
IRQD
PB2
PA2
GPIO wake monitoring
OSCRC
Wakeup Recording
REG_EN
Power Management
Sleep Timer
Watchdog
CLK1K
DIV10
CLK32K
OSC32K
OSC32A
OSC32B
deep sleep
wakeup
watchdog
always-on supply
VDD_PADS
POR HV
POR HV
VREG_1V25
mem supply
VDD_MEM
POR LVmem
core supply
VDD_CORE
External
Regulator
POR LV
Reset Generation
VREG_1V8
Reset Recording
recomended
connections for
internal regulator VREG_OUT
POR LVcore
nRESET
optional
connections for
external regulator
Reset Filter
SWJ
CDBGRSTREQ
JTAG-TAP
JRST
registers
PRESETHV
SYSRESET
PORESET
DAPRESET
SYSRESETREQ
registers
PRESETLV
FLITF
Flash
always-on supply
RAM
AHB-AP
ARM®
Cortex -M3
CPU
ARM®
Cortex -M3
Debug
SYSCLK
Security Accelerator
mem domain
clock switch
mem supply
option byte error
always-on domain
OSCHF
OSC24M
OSCA
OSCB
core domain
Figure 6.1. System Module Block Diagram
Rev 1.0
33
EM341
6.1. Power Domains
The EM341 contains three power domains:
An
“always-on domain” containing all logic and analog cells required to manage the EM341’s power
modes, including the GPIO controller and sleep timer. This domain must remain powered.
A “core domain” containing the CPU, Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC), and peripherals. To save
power, this domain can be powered down using a mode called deep sleep.
A “memory domain” containing the RAM and flash memories. This domain is managed by the power
management controller. When in deep sleep, the RAM portion of this domain is powered from the alwayson domain supply to retain the RAM contents while the regulators are disabled. During deep sleep the flash
portion is completely powered down.
6.1.1. Internally Regulated Power
The preferred and recommended power configuration is to use the internal regulated power supplies to provide
power to the core and memory domains. The internal regulators (VREG_1V25 and VREG_1V8) generate nominal
1.25 and 1.8 V supplies. The 1.25 V supply is internally routed to the core domain and to an external pin. The 1.8 V
supply is routed to an external pin where it can be externally routed back into the chip to supply the memory
domain. The internal regulators are described in "14. Integrated Voltage Regulator" on page 117.
When using the internal regulators, the always-on domain must be powered between 2.1 and 3.6 V at all four
VDD_PADS pins.
When using the internal regulators, the VREG_1V8 regulator output pin (VREG_OUT) must be connected to the
VDD_MEM, VDD_PADSA, VDD_VCO, VDD_RF, VDD_IF, VDD_PRE, and VDD_SYNTH pins.
When using the internal regulators, the VREG_1V25 regulator output and supply requires a connection between
both VDD_CORE pins.
6.1.2. Externally Regulated Power
Optionally, the on-chip regulators may be left unused, and the core and memory domains may instead be powered
from external supplies. For simplicity, the voltage for the core domain can be raised to nominal 1.8 V, requiring only
one external regulator, or the core domain can be powered from the on-chip regulators while the other domains are
powered externally. Note that if the core domain is powered at a higher voltage (1.8 V instead of 1.25 V) then
power consumption increases. A regulator enable signal, REG_EN, is provided for control of external regulators.
This is an open-drain signal that requires an external pull-up resistor. If REG_EN is not required to control external
regulators it can be disabled (see "7.3. Forced Functions" on page 50).
Using an external regulator requires the always-on domain to be powered between 2.1 and 3.6 V at all four
VDD_PADS pins.
When using an external regulator, the VREG_1V8 regulator output pin (VREG_OUT) must be left unconnected.
When using an external regulator, this external nominal 1.8 V supply has to be connected to both VDD_CORE pins
and to the VDD_MEM, VDD_PADSA, VDD_VCO, VDD_RF, VDD_IF, VDD_PRE and VDD_SYNTH pins.
34
Rev 1.0
EM341
6.2. Resets
The EM341 resets are generated from a number of sources. Each of these reset sources feeds into central reset
detection logic that causes various parts of the system to be reset depending on the state of the system and the
nature of the reset event.
6.2.1. Reset Sources
6.2.1.1. Power-On-Resets (POR HV and POR LV)
The EM341 measures the voltage levels supplied to the three power domains. If a supply voltage drops below a
low threshold, then a reset is applied. The reset is released if the supply voltage rises above a high threshold.
There are three detection circuits for power-on-reset as follows:
POR
HV monitors the always-on domain supply voltage. Thresholds are given in Table 6.1.
LV core monitors the core domain supply voltage. Thresholds are given in Table 6.2.
POR LV mem monitors the memory supply voltage. Thresholds are given in Table 6.3.
POR
Table 6.1. POR HV Thresholds
Parameter
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Always-on domain release
0.62
0.95
1.20
V
Always-on domain assert
0.45
0.65
0.85
V
250
µs
Supply rise time
Test conditions
From 0.5 V to 1.7 V
Table 6.2. POR LVcore Thresholds
Parameter
Test conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
1.25 V domain release
0.9
1.0
1.1
V
1.25 V domain assert
0.8
0.9
1.0
V
Table 6.3. POR LVmem Thresholds
Parameter
Test conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
1.8 V domain release
1.35
1.5
1.65
V
1.8 V domain assert
1.26
1.4
1.54
V
The POR LVcore and POR LVmem reset sources are merged to provide a single reset source, POR LV, to the
Reset Generation module, since the detection of either event needs to reset the same system modules.
Rev 1.0
35
EM341
6.2.1.2. nRESET Pin
A single active low pin, nRESET, is provided to reset the system. This pin has a Schmitt triggered input.
To afford good noise immunity and resistance to switch bounce, the pin is filtered with the Reset Filter module and
generates the pin reset source, nRESET, to the Reset Generation module. Table 6.4 contains the specification for
the filter.
Table 6.4. Reset Filter Specification for nRESET
Parameter
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Reset filter time constant
2.1
12.0
16.0
µs
Reset pulse width to guarantee a reset
26.0
—
—
µs
0
—
1.0
µs
Reset pulse width guaranteed not to cause a reset
6.2.1.3. Watchdog Reset
The EM341 contains a watchdog timer (see also "6.4.1. Watchdog Timer" on page 42) that is clocked by the
internal 1 kHz timing reference. When the timer expires it generates the reset source WATCHDOG_RESET to the
Reset Generation module.
6.2.1.4. Software Reset
The ARM® CortexTM-M3 CPU can initiate a reset under software control. This is indicated with the reset source
SYSRESETREQ to the Reset Generation module.
6.2.1.5. Option Byte Error
The flash memory controller contains a state machine that reads configuration information from the information
blocks in the flash at system start time. An error check is performed on the option bytes that are read from flash
and, if the check fails, an error is signaled that provides the reset source OPT_BYTE_ERROR to the Reset
Generation module.
If an option byte error is detected, the system restarts and the read and check process is repeated. If the error is
detected again the process is repeated but stops on the 3rd failure. The system is then placed into an emulated
deep sleep where recovery is possible. In this state, flash memory readout protection is forced active to prevent
secure applications from being compromised.
6.2.1.6. Debug Reset
The Serial Wire/JTAG Interface (SWJ) provides access to the SWJ Debug Port (SWJ-DP) registers. By setting the
register bit CDBGRSTREQ in the SWJ-DP, the reset source CDBGRSTREQ is provided to the Reset Generation
module.
6.2.1.7. JRST
One of the EM341’s pins can function as the JTAG reset, conforming to the requirements of the JTAG standard.
This input acts independently of all other reset sources and, when asserted, does not reset any on-chip hardware
except for the JTAG TAP. If the EM341 is in the Serial Wire mode or if the SWJ is disabled, this input has no effect.
36
Rev 1.0
EM341
6.2.1.8. Deep Sleep Reset
The Power Management module informs the Reset Generation module of entry into and exit from the deep sleep
states. The deep sleep reset is applied in the following states: before entry into deep sleep, while removing power
from the memory and core domain, while in deep sleep, while waking from deep sleep, and while reapplying power
until reliable power levels have been detect by POR LV.
The Power Management module allows a special emulated deep sleep state that retains memory and core domain
power while in deep sleep.
6.2.2. Reset Recording
The EM341 records the last reset condition that generated a restart to the system. The reset conditions recorded
are as follows:
POR
HV
LV
nRESET
watchdog
always-on domain power supply failure
core domain (POR LVcore) or memory domain (POR LVmem) power supply failure
pin reset asserted
watchdog timer expired
SYSRESETREQ
software reset by SYSERSETREQ from ARM® CortexTM-M3 CPU
wake-up from deep sleep
error check failed when reading option bytes from flash
POR
deep
sleep wakeup
option byte error
Note: While CPU Lockup is shown as a reset condition in software, CPU Lockup is not specifically a reset event. CPU Lockup
is set to indicate that the CPU entered an unrecoverable exception. Execution stops but a reset is not applied. This is so
that a debugger can interpret the cause of the error. Silicon Labs recommends that in a live application (in other words,
no debugger attached) the watchdog be enabled by default so that the EM341 can be restarted.
6.2.3. Reset Generation Module
The Reset Generation module responds to reset sources and generates the following reset signals:
PORESET
Reset of the ARM® CortexTM-M3 CPU and ARM® CortexTM-M3 System Debug
components (Flash Patch and Breakpoint, Data Watchpoint and Trace,
Instrumentation Trace Macrocell, Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller). ARM
defines PORESET as the region that is reset when power is applied.
SYSRESET
Reset of the ARM® CortexTM-M3 CPU without resetting the Core Debug and
System Debug components, so that a live system can be reset without disturbing
the debug configuration.
Reset to the SWJ’s AHB Access Port (AHB-AP)
Peripheral reset for always-on power domain, for peripherals that are required to
retain their configuration across a deep sleep cycle
Peripheral reset for core power domain, for peripherals that are not required to
retain their configuration across a deep sleep cycle
DAPRESET
PRESETHV
PRESETLV
Rev 1.0
37
EM341
Table 6.5 shows which reset sources generate certain resets.
Table 6.5. Generated Resets
Reset Source
Reset Generation Module Output
POR HV
POR LV (due to waking from
normal deep sleep)
POR LV (not due to waking from
normal deep sleep)
nRESET
Watchdog
SYSRESETREQ
Option byte error
Normal deep sleep
Emulated deep sleep
Debug reset
PORESET
SYSRESET
DAPRESET
PRESETHV
PRESETLV
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
6.3. Clocks
The EM341 integrates four oscillators:
12
MHz RC oscillator
24 MHz crystal oscillator
10 kHz RC oscillator
32.768 kHz crystal oscillator
Figure 6.2 shows a block diagram of the clocks in the EM341. This simplified view shows all the clock sources and
the general areas of the chip to which they are routed.
Figure 6.2. Clocks Block Diagram
38
Rev 1.0
EM341
6.3.1. High-Frequency Internal RC Oscillator (OSCHF)
The high-frequency RC oscillator (OSCHF) is used as the default system clock source when power is applied to
the core domain. The nominal frequency coming out of reset is 12 MHz and Ember software calibrates this clock to
12 MHz. Table 6.6 contains the specification for the high frequency RC oscillator.
Most peripherals, excluding the radio peripheral, are fully functional using the OSCHF clock source. Application
software must be aware that peripherals are clocked at different speeds depending on whether OSCHF or
OSC24M is being used. Since the frequency step of OSCHF is 0.3 MHz and the high-frequency crystal oscillator is
used for calibration, the calibrated accuracy of OSCHF is ±150 kHz ±40 ppm. The UART and ADC peripherals may
not be usable due to the lower accuracy of the OSCHF frequency.
Table 6.6. High-Frequency RC Oscillator Specification
Parameter
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Frequency at reset
6
12
20
MHz
Frequency Steps
—
0.3
—
MHz
Duty cycle
40
—
60
%
—
—
5
%
Supply dependence
Test Conditions
Change in supply = 0.1 V
Test at supply changes: 1.8 to 1.7 V
6.3.2. High-Frequency Crystal Oscillator (OSC24M)
The high-frequency crystal oscillator (OSC24M) requires an external 24 MHz crystal with an accuracy of ±40 ppm.
Based upon the application’s bill of materials and current consumption requirements, the external crystal may
cover a range of ESR requirements. Table 6.7 contains the specification for the high frequency crystal oscillator.
The crystal oscillator has a software-programmable bias circuit to minimize current consumption. Ember software
configures the bias circuit for minimum current consumption.
All peripherals including the radio peripheral are fully functional using the OSC24M clock source. Application
software must be aware that peripherals are clocked at different speeds depending on whether OSCHF or
OSC24M is being used.
If the 24 MHz crystal fails, a hardware failover mechanism forces the system to switch back to the high-frequency
RC oscillator as the main clock source, and a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) is signaled to the ARM® CortexTM-M3
NVIC.
Rev 1.0
39
EM341
Table 6.7. High-Frequency Crystal Oscillator Specification
Parameter
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
—
24
—
MHz
Accuracy
–40
—
+40
ppm
Duty cycle
40
—
60
%
Start-up time at max bias
—
—
1
ms
Start up time at optimal bias
—
—
2
ms
Current consumption
—
200
300
μA
Current consumption at max bias
—
—
1
mA
Crystal with high ESR
—
—
100
Ω
Load capacitance
—
—
10
pF
Crystal capacitance
—
—
7
pF
Crystal power dissipation
—
—
200
µW
—
—
60
Ω
Load capacitance
—
—
18
pF
Crystal capacitance
—
—
7
pF
Crystal power dissipation
—
—
1
mW
Frequency
Crystal with low ESR
6.3.3. Low-Frequency Internal RC Oscillator (OSCRC)
A low-frequency RC oscillator (OSCRC) is provided as an internal timing reference. The nominal frequency coming
out of reset is 10 kHz, and Ember software calibrates this clock to 10 kHz. From the tuned 10 kHz oscillator
(OSCRC) Ember software calibrates a fractional-N divider to produce a 1 kHz reference clock, CLK1K. Table 6.8
contains the specification for the low frequency RC oscillator.
Table 6.8. Low-Frequency RC Oscillator Specification
Parameter
Nominal frequency
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
After trimming
9
10
11
kHz
—
0.5
—
kHz
For a voltage drop from 3.6 V to 3.1 V or 2.6 V to 2.1 V
(without re-calibration)
—
1
—
%
Frequency variation with temperature for a change
from –40 to +85 oC
(without re-calibration)
—
2
—
%
Analog trim step size
Supply dependence
Temperature
dependence
40
Rev 1.0
EM341
6.3.4. Low-Frequency Crystal Oscillator (OSC32K)
A low-frequency 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator (OSC32K) is provided as an optional timing reference for on-chip
timers. This oscillator is designed for use with an external watch crystal. When using the 32.768 kHz crystal, you
must connect it to GPIO PC6 and PC7 and must configure these two GPIOs for analog input. Alternatively, when
PC7 is configured as a digital input, PC7 can accept an external digital clock input instead of a 32.786 kHz crystal.
The digital clock input signal must be a 1 V peak-to-peak sine wave with a dc bias of 0.5 V. Refer to "7. GPIO
(General Purpose Input/Output)" on page 48 for GPIO configuration details. Using the low-frequency oscillator,
crystal or digital clock, is enabled through Ember software.
Table 6.9 contains the specification for the low frequency crystal oscillator.
Table 6.9. Low-Frequency Crystal Oscillator Specification
Parameter
Test conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
—
32.768
—
kHz
–20
—
+20
ppm
Load capacitance OSC32A
—
27
—
pF
Load capacitance OSC32B
—
18
—
pF
Crystal ESR
—
—
100
kΩ
Start-up time
—
—
2
s
—
—
0.5
μA
Frequency
Accuracy
Current consumption
At 25 ºC
At 25 °C, VDD_PADS=3.0 V
6.3.5. Clock Switching
The EM341 has two switching mechanisms for the main system clock, providing four clock modes. Table 6.10
shows these clock modes and how they affect the internal clocks.
The register bit OSC24M_CTRL_OSC24M_SEL in the OSC24M_CTRL register switches between the highfrequency RC oscillator (OSCHF) and the high-frequency crystal oscillator (OSC24M) as the main system clock
(SYSCLK). The peripheral clock (PCLK) is always half the frequency of SYSCLK.
The register bit CPU_CLKSEL_FIELD in the CPU_CLKSEL register switches between PCLK and SYSCLK to
produce the ARM® CortexTM-M3 CPU clock (FCLK). The default and preferred mode of operation is to run the
CPU at the higher PCLK frequency, 24 MHz, to give higher processing performance for all applications and
improved duty cycling for applications using sleep modes.
In addition to these modes, further automatic control is invoked by hardware when flash programming is enabled.
To ensure accuracy of the flash controller’s timers, the FCLK frequency is forced to 12 MHz during flash
programming and erase operations.
Table 6.10. System Clock Modes
OSC24M_CTRL_OSC24M_ CPU_CLKSEL_ SYSCLK
SEL
FIELD
PCLK
FCLK
Flash Program/
Erase Inactive
Flash Program/
Erase Active
0 (OSCHF)
0 (Normal CPU)
12 MHz
6 MHz
6 MHz
12 MHz
0 (OSCHF)
1 (Fast CPU)
12 MHz
6 MHz
12 MHz
12 MHz
1 (OSC24M)
0 (Normal CPU)
24 MHz
12 MHz
12 MHz
12 MHz
1 (OSC24M)
1 (Fast CPU)
24 MHz
12 MHz
24 MHz
12 MHz
Rev 1.0
41
EM341
6.4. System Timers
6.4.1. Watchdog Timer
The EM341 integrates a watchdog timer which can be enabled to provide protection against software crashes and
ARM® CortexTM-M3 CPU lockup. By default, it is disabled at power up of the always-on power domain. The
watchdog timer uses the calibrated 1 kHz clock (CLK1K) as its reference and provides a nominal 2.048 s timeout.
A low water mark interrupt occurs at 1.792 s and triggers an NMI to the ARM® CortexTM-M3 NVIC as an early
warning. When the watchdog is enabled, the timer must be periodically reset before it expires. The watchdog timer
is paused when the debugger halts the ARM® CortexTM-M3. Additionally, the Ember software that implements
deep sleep functionality disables the watchdog when entering deep sleep and restores the watchdog, if it was
enabled, when exiting deep sleep.
Ember software provides an API for enabling, resetting, and disabling the watchdog timer.
6.4.2. Sleep Timer
The EM341 integrates a 32-bit timer dedicated to system timing and waking from sleep at specific times. The sleep
timer can use either the calibrated 1 kHz reference (CLK1K), or the 32 kHz crystal clock (CLK32K). The default
clock source is the internal 1 kHz clock.
The sleep timer has a prescaler, a divider of the form 2^N, where N can be programmed from 1 to 2^15. This
divider allows for very long periods of sleep to be timed. Ember software’s default configuration is to use the
prescaler to always produce a 1024 Hz sleep timer tick. The timer provides two compare outputs and wrap
detection, all of which can be used to generate an interrupt or a wake up event.
While it is possible to do so, by default the sleep timer is not paused when the debugger halts the ARM® CortexTMM3. Silicon Labs does not advise pausing the sleep timer when the debugger halts the CPU.
To save current during deep sleep, the low-frequency internal RC oscillator (OSCRC) can be turned off. If OSCRC
is turned off during deep sleep and a low-frequency 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator is not being used, then the sleep
timer will not operate during deep sleep and sleep timer wake events cannot be used to wake up the EM341.
Ember software provides the system timer software API for interacting with the sleep timer as well as using the
sleep timer and RC oscillator during deep sleep.
Note: Because the system timer software module handles all interactions with the sleep timer, the module will return the correct value in all situations. In the situation where the chip performs a deep sleep that maintains the system time and is
woken up from an external event (that is, not a sleep timer event), the deep sleep module in the Ember software delays
until the next sleep timer clock tick (up to 1 ms) to guarantee that the sleep timer updates correctly.
6.4.3. Event Timer
The SysTick timer is an ARM® standard system timer in the NVIC. The SysTick timer can be clocked from either
the FCLK (the clock going into the CPU) or the Sleep Timer clock. FCLK is either the SYSCLK or PCLK as selected
by CPU_CLKSEL register (see “6.3.5. Clock Switching” ).
42
Rev 1.0
EM341
6.5. Power Management
The EM341’s power management system is designed to achieve the lowest deep sleep current consumption
possible while still providing flexible wakeup sources, timer activity, and debugger operation. The EM341 has four
main sleep modes:
Idle
Sleep: Puts the CPU into an idle state where execution is suspended until any interrupt occurs. All
power domains remain fully powered and nothing is reset.
Deep Sleep 1: The primary deep sleep state. In this state, the core power domain is fully powered down
and the sleep timer is active.
Deep Sleep 2: The same as Deep Sleep 1 except that the sleep timer is inactive to save power. In this
mode the sleep timer cannot wake up the EM341.
Deep Sleep 0 (also known as Emulated Deep Sleep): The chip emulates a true deep sleep without
powering down the core domain. Instead, the core domain remains powered and all peripherals except the
system debug components (ITM, DWT, FPB, NVIC) are held in reset. The purpose of this sleep state is to
allow EM341 software to perform a deep sleep cycle while maintaining debug configuration such as
breakpoints.
CSYSPWRUPREQ, CDBGPWRUPREQ, and the corresponding CSYSPWRUPACK and
CDBGPWRUPACK are bits in the debug port’s CTRL/STAT register in the SWJ. For further information on
these bits and the operation of the SWJ-DP please refer to the ARM Debug Interface v5 Architecture
Specification (ARM IHI 0031A).
For further power savings when not in deep sleep, the ADC, Timer 1, Timer 2, Serial Controller1 and Serial
Controller 2 peripherals can be individually disabled through the PERIPHERAL_DISABLE register. Disabling a
peripheral saves power by stopping the clock feeding that peripheral. A peripheral should only be disabled through
the PERIPHERAL_DISABLE register when the peripheral is idle and disabled through the peripheral's own
configuration registers, otherwise undefined behavior may occur. When a peripheral is disabled through the
PERIPHERAL_DISABLE register, all registers associated with that peripheral ignore all subsequent writes, and
subsequent reads return the value seen in the register at the moment the peripheral is disabled.
6.5.1. Wake Sources
When in deep sleep the EM341 can be returned to the running state in a number of ways, and the wake sources
are split depending on deep sleep 1 or deep sleep 2.
The following wake sources are available in both deep sleep 1 and 2.
Wake
on GPIO activity: Wake due to change of state on any GPIO.
Wake on serial controller 1: Wake due to a change of state on GPIO Pin PB2.
Wake on serial controller 2: Wake due to a change of state on GPIO Pin PA2.
Wake on IRQD: Wake due to a change of state on IRQD. Since IRQD can be configured to point to any
GPIO, this wake source is another means of waking on any GPIO activity.
Wake on setting of CDBGPWRUPREQ: Wake due to setting the CDBGPWRUPREQ bit in the debug port
in the SWJ.
Wake on setting of CSYSPWRUPREQ: Wake due to setting the CSYSPWRUPREQ bit in the debug port in
the SWJ.
The following sources are only available in deep sleep 1 since the sleep timer is not active in deep sleep 2.
Wake
on sleep timer compare A.
Wake on sleep timer compare B.
Wake on sleep timer wrap.
The following source is only available in deep sleep 0 since the SWJ is required to write a memory mapped register
to set this wake source and the SWJ only has access to some registers in deep sleep 0.
Wake
on write to the WAKE_CORE register bit.
The Wakeup Recording module monitors all possible wakeup sources. More than one wakeup source may be
recorded because events are continually being recorded (not just in deep-sleep) and another event may happen
between the first wake event and when the EM341 wakes up.
Rev 1.0
43
EM341
6.5.2. Basic Sleep Modes
The power management state diagram in Figure 6.3 shows the basic operation of the power management
controller.
CDBGPWRUPREQ set
EMULATED
DEEP SLEEP
DEEP SLEEP
1
Q= 0
RE EQ=
P
U R
WR UP
GP PWR
B
CD SYS
&C
ent set
p ev EQ
ke u UPR or)
Wa PWR rocess
S
p
CSY the
OR resets
(
CDB
& CS GPWRUP
YSPW
R
RUPREQ=0
EQ=0
CDBGPWRUPREQ cleared
(re Wak
set e
s t up
he ev
pro ent
ce
sso
r)
Deep sleep requested
(WFI instruction with SLEEP_DEEP=1)
PRE-DEEP
SLEEP
CS
YS
PW
RU
PR
EQ
RUNNING
uested
Sleep req EEP_DEEP=0)
SL
ith
uction w
(WFI instr
IDLE SLEEP
&I
NH
IBI
T
rupt
Inter
Figure 6.3. Power Management State Diagram
In normal operation an application may request one of two low power modes through program execution:
Idle
Sleep is achieved by executing a WFI instruction while the SLEEPDEEP bit in the Cortex System
Control register (SCS_SCR) is clear. This puts the CPU into an idle state where execution is suspended
until an interrupt occurs. This is indicated by the state at the bottom of the diagram. Power is maintained to
the core logic of the EM341 during the Idle Sleeping state.
Deep sleep is achieved by executing a WFI instruction with the SLEEPDEEP bit in SCS_SCR set. This
triggers the state transitions around the main loop of the diagram, resulting in powering down the EM341's
core logic, and leaving only the always-on domain powered. Wake up is triggered when one of the predetermined events occurs.
If a deep sleep is requested the EM341 first enters a pre-deep sleep state. This state prevents any section of the
chip from being powered off or reset until the SWJ goes idle (by clearing CSYSPWRUPREQ). This pre-deep sleep
state ensures debug operations are not interrupted.
In the deep sleep state the EM341 waits for a wake up event which will return it to the running state. In powering up
the core logic the ARM® CortexTM-M3 is put through a reset cycle and Ember software restores the stack and
application state to the point where deep sleep was invoked.
44
Rev 1.0
EM341
6.5.3. Further Options for Deep Sleep
By default the low-frequency internal RC oscillator (OSCRC) is running during deep sleep (known as deep
sleep 1).
To conserver power, OSCRC can be turned of during deep sleep. This mode is known as deep sleep 2. Since the
OSCRC is disabled, the sleep timer and watchdog timer do not function and cannot wake the chip unless the lowfrequency 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator is used. Non-timer based wake sources continue to function. Once a wake
event does occur, OSCRC is restarted and comes back up.
6.5.4. Use of Debugger with Sleep Modes
The debugger communicates with the EM341 using the SWJ.
When the debugger is logically connected, the CDBGPWRUPREQ bit in the debug port in the SWJ is set, and the
EM341 will only enter deep sleep 0 (the Emulated Deep Sleep state). The CDBGPWRUPREQ bit indicates that a
debug tool is logically connected to the chip and therefore debug state may be in the system debug components.
To maintain the debug state in the system debug components only deep sleep 0 may be used, since deep sleep 0
will not cause a power cycle or reset of the core domain. The CSYSPWRUPREQ bit in the debug port in the SWJ
indicates that a debugger wants to access memory actively in the EM341. Therefore, whenever the
CSYSPWRUPREQ bit is set while the EM341 is awake, the EM341 cannot enter deep sleep until this bit is cleared.
This ensures the EM341 does not disrupt debug communication into memory.
Clearing both CSYSPWRUPREQ and CDBGPWRUPREQ allows the EM341 to achieve a true deep sleep state
(deep sleep 1 or 2). Both of these signals also operate as wake sources, so that when a debugger logically
connects to the EM341 and begins accessing the chip, the EM341 automatically comes out of deep sleep. When
the debugger initiates access while the EM341 is in deep sleep, the SWJ intelligently holds off the debugger for a
brief period of time until the EM341 is properly powered and ready.
Note: The SWJ-DP signals CSYSPWRUPREQ and CDBGPWRUPREQ are only reset by a power-on-reset or a debugger.
Physically connecting or disconnecting a debugger from the chip will not alter the state of these signals. A debugger
must logically communicate with the SWJ-DP to set or clear these two signals.
For more information regarding the SWJ and the interaction of debuggers with deep sleep, contact customer
support for Application Notes and ARM® CoreSightTM documentation.
Rev 1.0
45
EM341
6.5.5. Registers
Register 6.1. PERIPHERAL_DISABLE
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
0
PERIDIS_RSVD PERIDIS_ADC PERIDIS_TIM2 PERIDIS_TIM1 PERIDIS_SC1
PERIDIS_SC2
Address: 0x40004038 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
PERIDIS_RSVD
[5]
RW
Reserved: This bit can change during normal operation. When writing to
PERIPHERAL_DISABLE, the value of this bit must be preserved.
PERIDIS_ADC
[4]
RW
Disable the clock to the ADC peripheral.
PERIDIS_TIM2
[3]
RW
Disable the clock to the TIM2 peripheral.
PERIDIS_TIM1
[2]
RW
Disable the clock to the TIM1 peripheral.
PERIDIS_SC1
[1]
RW
Disable the clock to the SC1 peripheral.
PERIDIS_SC2
[0]
RW
Disable the clock to the SC2 peripheral.
6.6. Security Accelerator
The EM341 contains a hardware AES encryption engine accessible from the ARM® CortexTM-M3. NIST-based
CCM, CCM*, CBC-MAC, and CTR modes are implemented in hardware. These modes are described in the IEEE
802.15.4-2003 specification, with the exception of CCM*, which is described in the ZigBee Security Services
Specification 1.0.
46
Rev 1.0
EM341
7. GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output)
The EM341 has 24 multipurpose GPIO pins, which may be individually configured as follows:
General
purpose output
purpose open-drain output
Alternate output controlled by a peripheral device
Alternate open-drain output controlled by a peripheral device
Analog
General purpose input
General purpose input with pull-up or pull-down resistor
The basic structure of a single GPIO is illustrated in GPIO Block DiagramFigure 7.1.
General
GPIO_PxCFGH/L
VDD_PADS
GPIO_PxSET
Output control
(push pull ,
open drain , or
disabled )
GPIO_PxOUT
GPIO_PxCLR
P-MOS
VDD_PADS
VDD_PADS
Protection
diode
N-MOS
GND
Alternate output
PIN
Alternate input
GPIO_PxIN
Schmitt trigger
GND
Analog
functions
Protection
diode
GND
Wake detection
GPIO_PxWAKE
Figure 7.1. GPIO Block Diagram
A Schmitt trigger converts the GPIO pin voltage to a digital input value. The digital input signal is then always
routed to the GPIO_PxIN register; to the alternate inputs of associated peripheral devices; to wake detection logic
if wake detection is enabled; and, for certain pins, to interrupt generation logic. Configuring a pin in analog mode
disconnects the digital input from the pin and applies a high logic level to the input of the Schmitt trigger.
Only one device at a time can control a GPIO output. The output is controlled in normal output mode by the
GPIO_PxOUT register and in alternate output mode by a peripheral device. When in input mode or analog mode,
digital output is disabled.
48
Rev 1.0
EM341
7.1. GPIO Ports
The 24 GPIO pins are grouped into three ports: PA, PB, and PC. Individual GPIOs within a port are numbered 0 to
7 according to their bit positions within the GPIO registers.
Note: Because GPIO port registers’ functions are identical, the notation Px is used here to refer to PA, PB, or PC. For example,
GPIO_PxIN refers to the registers GPIO_PAIN, GPIO_PBIN, and GPIO_PCIN.
Each of the three GPIO ports has the following registers whose low-order eight bits correspond to the port’s eight
GPIO pins:
GPIO_PxIN
(input data register) returns the pin level (unless in analog mode).
GPIO_PxOUT (output data register) controls the output level in normal output mode.
GPIO_PxCLR (clear output data register) clears bits in GPIO_PxOUT.
GPIO_PxSET (set output data register) sets bits in GPIO_PxOUT.
GPIO_PxWAKE (wake monitor register) specifies the pins that can wake the EM341.
In addition to these registers, each port has a pair of configuration registers, GPIO_PxCFGH and GPIO_PxCFGL.
These registers specify the basic operating mode for the port’s pins. GPIO_PxCFGL configures the pins Px[3:0]
and GPIO_PxCFGH configures the pins Px[7:4]. For brevity, the notation GPIO_PxCFGH/L refers to the pair of
configuration registers.
Five GPIO pins (PA6, PA7, PB6, PB7 and PC0) can sink and source higher current than standard GPIO outputs.
Refer to Table 2.5 Digital I/O Specifications in "2. Electrical Specifications" on page 7 for more information.
7.2. Configuration
Each pin has a 4-bit configuration value in the GPIO_PxCFGH/L register. The various GPIO modes and their 4-bit
configuration values are shown in Table 7.1.
Table 7.1. GPIO Configuration Modes
GPIO Mode
GPIO_PxCFGH/L
Description
Analog
0x0
Analog input or output. When in analog mode, the digital input (GPIO_PxIN) always reads 1.
Input (floating)
0x4
Digital input without an internal pull up or pull down. Output is disabled.
Input (pull-up or
pull-down)
0x8
Digital input with an internal pull up or pull down. A set bit in GPIO_PxOUT selects pull up and a cleared bit selects pull down. Output is disabled.
Output (push-pull)
0x1
Push-pull output. GPIO_PxOUT controls the output.
Output (opendrain)
0x5
Open-drain output. GPIO_PxOUT controls the output. If a pull up is
required, it must be external.
Alternate Output
(push-pull)
0x9
Push-pull output. An onboard peripheral controls the output.
Alternate Output
(open-drain)
0xD
Open-drain output. An onboard peripheral controls the output. If a pull
up is required, it must be external.
If a GPIO has two peripherals that can be the source of alternate output mode data, then other registers in addition
to GPIO_PxCFGH/L determine which peripheral controls the output.
Several GPIOs share an alternate output with Timer 2 and the Serial Controllers. Bits in Timer 2’s TIM2_OR
register control routing Timer 2 outputs to different GPIOs. Bits in Timer 2’s TIM2_CCER register enable Timer 2
outputs. When Timer 2 outputs are enabled they override Serial Controller outputs. Table 7.2 indicates the GPIO
mapping for Timer 2 outputs depending on the bits in the register TIM2_OR. Refer to "9. General Purpose Timers
(TIM1 and TIM2)" on page 113 for complete information on timer configuration.
Rev 1.0
49
EM341
Table 7.2. Timer 2 Output Configuration Controls
Timer 2 Output
Option Register Bit
GPIO Mapping Selected by TIM2_OR Bit
0
1
TIM2C1
TIM2_OR[4]
PA0
PB1
TIM2C2
TIM2_OR[5]
PA3
PB2
TIM2C3
TIM2_OR[6]
PA1
PB3
TIM2C4
TIM2_OR[7]
PA2
PB4
For outputs assigned to the serial controllers, the serial interface mode registers (SCx_MODE) determine how the
GPIO pins are used.
The alternate outputs of PA4 and PA5 can either provide packet trace data (PTI_EN and PTI_DATA) or
synchronous CPU trace data (TRACEDATA2 and TRACEDATA3). The selection of packet trace or CPU trace is
made through the Ember software.
If a GPIO does not have an associated peripheral in alternate output mode, its output is set to 0.
7.3. Forced Functions
For some GPIOs, the GPIO_PxCFGH/L configuration will be overridden. These functions are forced when the
EM341 is reset and remain forced until software overrides the forced functions. Table 7.3 shows the GPIOs that
have different functions forced on them regardless of the GPIO_PxCFGH/L registers.
Table 7.3. GPIO Forced Functions
GPIO
Forced Mode
Forced Signal
PA7
Open-drain output
REG_EN
PC0
Input with pull up
JRST
PC2
Push-pull output
JTDO
PC3
Input with pull up
JDTI
PC4*
Input with pull up
JTMS
PC4*
Bidirectional (push-pull output or floating input) controlled by debugger interface
SWDIO
*Note: The choice of PC4’s forced signal is controlled by an external debug tool. JTMS is forced when the SWJ is in JTAG
mode, and SWDIO is forced when the SWJ is in Serial Wire mode.
PA7 is forced to be the regulator enable signal, REG_EN. If an external regulator is used and controlled through
REG_EN, PA7’s forced functionality must not be overridden. If an external regulator is not used, REG_EN may be
disabled and PA7 may be reclaimed as a normal GPIO. Disabling REG_EN is done by clearing the bit
GPIO_EXTREGEN in the GPIO_DBGCFG register.
PC0, PC2, PC3, and PC4 are forced to be the Serial Wire and JTAG (SWJ) Interface. When the EM341 resets,
these four GPIOs are forced to operate in JTAG mode. Switching the debug interface between JTAG mode and
Serial Wire mode can only be accomplished by the external debug tool and cannot be affected by software
executing on the EM341. Due to the fact that Serial Wire mode can only be invoked by an external debug tool and
JTAG mode is forced when the EM341 resets, a designer must treat all four debug GPIOs as working in unison
even though the Serial Wire interface only uses one of the GPIO, PC4.
50
Rev 1.0
EM341
Note: An application must disable all debug SWJ debug functionality to reclaim any of the four GPIOs: PC0, PC2, PC3, and
PC4. Disabling SWJ debug functionality prevents external debug tools from operating, including flash programming and
high-level debug tools.
Disabling the SWJ debugger interface is accomplished by setting the GPIO_DEBUGDIS bit in the GPIO_DBGCFG
register. When this bit is set, all debugger-related pins (PC0, PC2, PC3, PC4) behave as standard GPIOs. If the
SWJ debugger interface is already active, the bit GPIO_DEBUGDIS cannot be set. When GPIO_DEBUGDIS is
set, the SWJ debugger interface can be reclaimed by activating the SWJ while the EM341 is held in reset. If the
SWJ debugger interface is forced active in this manner, the bit GPIO_FORCEDBG is set in the GPIO_DBGSTAT
register. The SWJ debugger interface is defined as active when the CDBGPWRUPREQ signal, a bit in the debug
port’s CRTL/STAT register in the SWJ, is set high by an external debug tool.
7.4. Reset
A full chip reset is one due to power on (low or high voltage), the nRESET pin, the watchdog, or the
SYSRESETREQ bit. A full chip reset affects the GPIO configuration as follows:
The
GPIO_PxCFGH/L configurations of all pins are configured as floating inputs.
GPIO_EXTREGEN bit is set in the GPIO_DBGCFG register, which overrides the normal configuration
for PA7.
The GPIO_DEBUGDIS bit in the GPIO_DBGCFG register is cleared, allowing Serial Wire/JTAG access to
override the normal configuration of PC0, PC2, PC3, and PC4.
The
7.5. Boot Configuration
nBOOTMODE is a special alternate function of PA5 that is active only during a pin reset (nRESET) or a power-onreset of the always-powered domain (POR HV). If nBOOTMODE is asserted (pulled or driven low) when coming
out of reset, the processor starts executing an embedded serial-link-only monitor instead of its normal program.
While in reset and during the subsequent power-on-reset startup delay (512 OSCHF clocks), PA5 is automatically
configured as an input with a pull-up resistor. At the end of this time, the EM341 samples nBOOTMODE: a high
level selects normal boot mode, and a low level selects the embedded monitor. Figure 7.2 shows the timing
parameters for invoking monitor mode from a pin (nRESET) reset. Because OSCHF is running uncalibrated during
the reset sequence, the time for 512 OSCHF clocks may vary as indicated.
26 µsec min
. . .
. . .
nRESET
512 clocks;
26 µsec min – 85 µsec max
OSCHF
. . .
. . .
nBOOTMODE Sampled;
FIB Monitor mode entered
nBOOTMODE
. . .
. . .
nBOOTMODE Sampled by
FIB Monitor code
Figure 7.2. nBOOTMODE and nRESET Timing
Timing for a power-on-reset is similar except that OSCHF does not begin oscillating until up to 70 µsec after both
core and HV supplies are valid. Combined with the maximum 250 µsec allowed for HV to ramp from 0.5 V to 1.7 V,
an additional 320 µsec may be added to the 512 OSCHF clocks until nBOOTMODE is sampled.
If the monitor mode is selected (nBOOTMODE is low after 512 clocks), the FIB monitor software begins execution.
In order to filter out inadvertent jumps into the monitor, the FIB monitor re-samples the nBOOTMODE signal after a
3 ms delay. If the signal is still low, then the device stays in monitor mode. If the signal is high, then monitor mode
Rev 1.0
51
EM341
is exited and the normal program begins execution. In summary, the nBOOTMODE signal must be held low for
4 ms in order to properly invoke the FIB monitor.
After nBOOTMODE has been sampled, PA5 is configured as a floating input like the other GPIO configurations.
The GPIO_BOOTMODE bit in the GPIO_DBGSTAT register captures the state of nBOOTMODE so that software
may act on this signal if required.
Note: To avoid inadvertently asserting nBOOTMODE, PA5’s capacitive load may not exceed 250 pF.
7.6. GPIO Modes
7.6.1. Analog Mode
Analog mode enables analog functions, and disconnects a pin from the digital input and output logic. Only the
following GPIO pins have analog functions:
PA4,
PA5, PB5, PB6, PB7, and PC1 can be analog inputs to the ADC.
can output the internal analog voltage reference from the ADC.
PC6 and PC7 can connect to an optional 32.768 kHz crystal.
PB0
Note: When an external timing source is required, a 32.768 kHz crystal is commonly connected to PC6 and PC7. Alternatively,
when PC7 is configured as a digital input, PC7 can accept a digital external clock input.
When configured in analog mode:
The
output drivers are disabled.
The internal pull-up and pull-down resistors are disabled.
The Schmitt trigger input is connected to a high logic level.
Reading GPIO_PxIN returns a constant 1.
7.6.2. Input Mode
Input mode is used both for general purpose input and for on-chip peripheral inputs. Input floating mode disables
the internal pull-up and pull-down resistors, leaving the pin in a high-impedance state. Input pull-up or pull-down
mode enables either an internal pull-up or pull-down resistor based on the GPIO_PxOUT register. Setting a bit to 0
in GPIO_PxOUT enables the pull-down and setting a bit to 1 enables the pull up.
When configured in input mode:
The
output drivers are disabled.
internal pull-up or pull-down resistor may be activated depending on GPIO_PxCFGH/L and
GPIO_PxOUT.
The Schmitt trigger input is connected to the pin.
Reading GPIO_PxIN returns the input at the pin.
The input is also available to on-chip peripherals.
An
7.6.3. Output Mode
Output mode provides a general purpose output under direct software control. Regardless of whether an output is
configured as push-pull or open-drain, the GPIO’s bit in the GPIO_PxOUT register controls the output. The
GPIO_PxSET and GPIO_PxCLR registers can atomically set and clear bits within GPIO_PxOUT register. These
set and clear registers simplify software using the output port because they eliminate the need to disable interrupts
to perform an atomic read-modify-write operation of GPIO_PxOUT.
When configured in output mode:
The
output drivers are enabled and are controlled by the value written to GPIO_PxOUT:
In
In
open-drain mode: 0 activates the N-MOS current sink; 1 tri-states the pin.
push-pull mode: 0 activates the N-MOS current sink; 1 activates the P-MOS current source.
The
internal pull-up and pull-down resistors are disabled.
The Schmitt trigger input is connected to the pin.
Reading GPIO_PxIN returns the input at the pin.
Note: Reading GPIO_PxOUT returns the last value written to the register.
Depending on configuration and usage, GPIO_PxOUT and GPIO_PxIN may not have the same value.
52
Rev 1.0
EM341
7.6.4. Alternate Output Mode
In this mode, the output is controlled by an on-chip peripheral instead of GPIO_PxOUT and may be configured as
either push-pull or open-drain. Most peripherals require a particular output type – TWI requires an open-drain
driver, for example – but since using a peripheral does not by itself configure a pin, the GPIO_PxCFGH/L registers
must be configured properly for a peripheral’s particular needs. As described in "7.2. Configuration" on page 49,
when more than one peripheral can be the source of output data, registers in addition to GPIO_PxCFGH/L
determine which to use.
When configured in alternate output mode:
The
output drivers are enabled and are controlled by the output of an on-chip peripheral:
In
In
The
The
open-drain mode: 0 activates the N-MOS current sink; 1 tri-states the pin.
push-pull mode: 0 activates the N-MOS current sink; 1 activates the P-MOS current source.
internal pull-up and pull-down resistors are disabled.
Schmitt trigger input is connected to the pin.
Note: Reading GPIO_PxIN returns the input to the pin.
Depending on configuration and usage, GPIO_PxOUT and GPIO_PxIN may not have the same value.
7.7. Wake Monitoring
The GPIO_PxWAKE registers specify which GPIOs are monitored to wake the processor. If a GPIO’s wake enable
bit is set in GPIO_PxWAKE, then a change in the logic value of that GPIO causes the EM341 to wake from deep
sleep. The logic values of all GPIOs are captured by hardware upon entering sleep. If any GPIO’s logic value
changes while in sleep and that GPIO’s GPIO_PxWAKE bit is set, then the EM341 wakes from deep sleep. (There
is no mechanism for selecting a specific rising-edge, falling-edge, or level on a GPIO: any change in logic value
triggers a wake event.) Hardware records the fact that GPIO activity caused a wake event, but not which specific
GPIO was responsible. Instead, the Ember software reads the state of the GPIOs on waking to determine this.
The register GPIO_WAKEFILT contains bits to enable digital filtering of the external wakeup event sources: the
GPIO pins, SC1 activity, SC2 activity, and IRQD. The digital filter operates by taking samples based on the
(nominal) 10 kHz RC oscillator. If three samples in a row all have the same logic value, and this sampled logic
value is different from the logic value seen upon entering sleep, the filter outputs a wakeup event.
In order to use GPIO pins to wake the EM341 from deep sleep, the GPIO_WAKE bit in the WAKE_SEL register
must be set. Waking up from GPIO activity does not work with pins configured for analog mode since the digital
logic input is always set to 1 when in analog mode. Refer to "6. System Modules" on page 33 for information on the
EM341’s power management and sleep modes.
7.8. External Interrupts
The EM341 can use up to four external interrupt sources (IRQA, IRQB, IRQC, and IRQD), each with its own toplevel NVIC interrupt vector. Since these external interrupt sources connect to the standard GPIO input path, an
external interrupt pin may simultaneously be used by a peripheral device or even configured as an output. Analog
mode is the only GPIO configuration that is not compatible with using a pin as an external interrupt.
External interrupts have individual triggering and filtering options selected using the registers GPIO_INTCFGA,
GPIO_INTCFGB, GPIO_INTCFGC, and GPIO_INTCFGD. The bit field GPIO_INTMOD of the GPIO_INTCFGx
register enables IRQx’s second-level interrupt and selects the triggering mode: 0 is disabled; 1 for rising edge; 2 for
falling edge; 3 for both edges; 4 for active high level; 5 for active low level. The minimum width needed to latch an
unfiltered external interrupt in both level- and edge-triggered mode is 80 ns. With the digital filter enabled (the
GPIO_INTFILT bit in the GPIO_INTCFGx register is set), the minimum width needed is 450 ns.
The register INT_GPIOFLAG is the second-level interrupt flag register that indicates pending external interrupts.
Writing 1 to a bit in the INT_GPIOFLAG register clears the flag while writing 0 has no effect. If the interrupt is leveltriggered, the flag bit is set again immediately after being cleared if its input is still in the active state.
Two of the four external interrupts, IRQA and IRQB, have fixed pin assignments. The other two external interrupts,
IRQC and IRQD, can use any GPIO pin. The GPIO_IRQCSEL and GPIO_IRQDSEL registers specify the GPIO
pins assigned to IRQC and IRQD, respectively. Table 7.4 shows how the GPIO_IRQCSEL and GPIO_IRQDSEL
register values select the GPIO pin used for the external interrupt.
Rev 1.0
53
EM341
Table 7.4. IRQC/D GPIO Selection
GPIO_IRQxSEL
GPIO
GPIO_IRQxSEL
GPIO
GPIO_IRQxSEL
GPIO
0
PA0
8
PB0
16
PC0
1
PA1
9
PB1
17
PC1
2
PA2
10
PB2
18
PC2
3
PA3
11
PB3
19
PC3
4
PA4
12
PB4
20
PC4
5
PA5
13
PB5
21
PC5
6
PA6
14
PB6
22
PC6
7
PA7
15
PB7
23
PC7
In some cases, it may be useful to assign IRQC or IRQD to an input also in use by a peripheral, for example to
generate an interrupt from the slave select signal (nSSEL) in an SPI slave mode interface.
Refer to "9. Interrupt System" on page 100 for further information regarding the EM341 interrupt system.
7.9. Debug Control and Status
Two GPIO registers are largely concerned with debugger functions. GPIO_DBGCFG can disable debugger
operation, but has other miscellaneous control bits as well. GPIO_DBGSTAT, a read-only register, returns status
related to debugger activity (GPIO_FORCEDBG and GPIO_SWEN), as well a flag (GPIO_BOOTMODE) indicating
whether nBOOTMODE was asserted at the last power-on or nRESET-based reset.
54
Rev 1.0
EM341
7.10. GPIO Signal Assignment Summary
The GPIO signal assignments are shown in Table 7.5.
Table 7.5. GPIO Signal Assignments
GPIO
Analog
Alternate Output
Input
Output Current
Drive
PA0
TIM2C11, SC2MOSI
TIM2C11, SC2MOSI
Standard
PA1
TIM2C31, SC2MISO, SC2SDA
TIM2C31, SC2MISO, SC2SDA
Standard
PA2
TIM2C41, SC2SCLK, SC2SCL
TIM2C41, SC2SCLK
Standard
PA3
TIM2C21, TRACECLK
TIM2C21, SC2nSSEL
Standard
PA4
ADC4
PTI_EN, TRACEDATA2
PA5
ADC5
PTI_DATA, TRACEDATA3
nBOOTMODE2
Standard
PA6
TIM1C3
TIM1C3
High
PA7
TIM1C4, REG_EN3
TIM1C4
High
TRACECLK
TIM1CLK, TIM2MSK, IRQA
Standard
PB1
TIM2C14, SC1TXD, SC1MOSI,
SC1MISO, SC1SDA
TIM2C14, SC1SDA
Standard
PB2
TIM2C24, SC1SCLK
TIM2C24, SC1MISO, SC1MOSI,
SC1SCL, SC1RXD
Standard
PB3
TIM2C34, SC1SCLK
TIM2C34, SC1SCLK, SC1nCTS
Standard
PB4
TIM2C44, SC1nRTS
TIM2C44, SC1nSSEL
Standard
TIM2CLK, TIM1MSK
Standard
PB0
VREF
Standard
PB5
ADC0
PB6
ADC1
TIM1C1
TIM1C1, IRQB
High
PB7
ADC2
TIM1C2
TIM1C2
High
TRACEDATA1
JRST5
High
PC0
PC1
ADC3
PC2
TRACEDATA0, SWO
Standard
JTDO6, SWO
Standard
PC3
JTDI5
Standard
SWDIO7, JTMS7
Standard
PC4
SWDIO7
PC5
TX_ACTIVE
Standard
nTX_ACTIVE
Standard
PC6
OSC32B
PC7
OSC32A
OSC32_EXT
Standard
Notes:
1. Default signal assignment (not remapped).
2. Overrides during reset as an input with pull up.
3. Overrides after reset as an open-drain output.
4. Alternate signal assignment (remapped).
5. Overrides in JTAG mode as a input with pull up.
6. Overrides in JTAG mode as a push-pull output.
7. Overrides in Serial Wire mode as either a push-pull output, or a floating input, controlled by the debugger.
Rev 1.0
55
EM341
7.11. Registers
Note: Substitute “A”, “B”, or “C” for “x” in the following detailed descriptions.
Register 7.1. GPIO_PxCFGL
GPIO_PACFGL: Port A Configuration Register (Low)
GPIO_PBCFGL: Port B Configuration Register (Low)
GPIO_PCCFGL: Port C Configuration Register (Low)
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
1
0
Name
Bit
Px3_CFG
7
6
Name
Px2_CFG
5
4
3
2
Px1_CFG
Px0_CFG
GPIO_PACFGL: Address: 0x4000B000 Reset: 0x4444
GPIO_PBCFGL: Address: 0x4000B400 Reset: 0x4444
GPIO_PCCFGL: Address: 0x4000B800 Reset: 0x4444
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Px3_CFG
[15:12]
RW
GPIO configuration control.
0x0: Analog, input or output (GPIO_PxIN always reads 1).
0x1: Output, push-pull (GPIO_PxOUT controls the output).
0x4: Input, floating.
0x5: Output, open-drain (GPIO_PxOUT controls the output).
0x8: Input, pulled up or down (selected by GPIO_PxOUT: 0 = pull-down,
1 = pull-up).
0x9: Alternate output, push-pull (peripheral controls the output).
0xD: Alternate output, open-drain (peripheral controls the output).
Px2_CFG
[11:8]
RW
GPIO configuration control: see Px3_CFG above.
Px1_CFG
[7:4]
RW
GPIO configuration control: see Px3_CFG above.
Px0_CFG
[3:0]
RW
GPIO configuration control: see Px3_CFG above.
56
Description
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 7.2. GPIO_PxCFGH
GPIO_PACFGH: Port A Configuration Register (High)
GPIO_PBCFGH: Port B Configuration Register (High)
GPIO_PCCFGH: Port C Configuration Register (High)
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
1
0
Name
Bit
Px7_CFG
7
6
Name
Px6_CFG
5
4
3
2
Px5_CFG
Px4_CFG
GPIO_PACFGH: Address: 0x4000B004 Reset: 0x4444
GPIO_PBCFGH: Address: 0x4000B404 Reset: 0x4444
GPIO_PCCFGH: Address: 0x4000B804 Reset: 0x4444
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
Px7_CFG
[15:12]
RW
GPIO configuration control.
0x0: Analog, input or output (GPIO_PxIN always reads 1).
0x1: Output, push-pull (GPIO_PxOUT controls the output).
0x4: Input, floating.
0x5: Output, open-drain (GPIO_PxOUT controls the output).
0x8: Input, pulled up or down (selected by GPIO_PxOUT: 0 = pull-down,
1 = pull-up).
0x9: Alternate output, push-pull (peripheral controls the output).
0xD: Alternate output, open-drain (peripheral controls the output).
Px6_CFG
[11:8]
RW
GPIO configuration control: see Px7_CFG above.
Px5_CFG
[7:4]
RW
GPIO configuration control: see Px7_CFG above.
Px4_CFG
[3:0]
RW
GPIO configuration control: see Px7_CFG above.
Rev 1.0
57
EM341
Register 7.3. GPIO_PxIN
GPIO_PAIN: Port A Input Data Register
GPIO_PBIN: Port B Input Data Register
GPIO_PCIN: Port C Input Data Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Px7
Px6
Px5
Px4
Px3
Px2
Px1
Px0
GPIO_PAIN: Address: 0x4000B008 Reset: 0x0
GPIO_PBIN: Address: 0x4000B408 Reset: 0x0
GPIO_PCIN: Address: 0x4000B808 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Px7
[7]
RW
Input level at pin Px7.
Px6
[6]
RW
Input level at pin Px6.
Px5
[5]
RW
Input level at pin Px5.
Px4
[4]
RW
Input level at pin Px4.
Px3
[3]
RW
Input level at pin Px3.
Px2
[2]
RW
Input level at pin Px2.
Px1
[1]
RW
Input level at pin Px1.
Px0
[0]
RW
Input level at pin Px0.
58
Description
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 7.4. GPIO_PxOUT
GPIO_PAOUT: Port A Output Data Register
GPIO_PBOUT: Port B Output Data Register
GPIO_PCOUT: Port C Output Data Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Px7
Px6
Px5
Px4
Px3
Px2
Px1
Px0
GPIO_PAOUT: Address: 0x4000B00C Reset: 0x0
GPIO_PBOUT: Address: 0x4000B40C Reset: 0x0
GPIO_PCOUT: Address: 0x4000B80C Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
Px7
[7]
RW
Output data for Px7.
Px6
[6]
RW
Output data for Px6.
Px5
[5]
RW
Output data for Px5.
Px4
[4]
RW
Output data for Px4.
Px3
[3]
RW
Output data for Px3.
Px2
[2]
RW
Output data for Px2.
Px1
[1]
RW
Output data for Px1.
Px0
[0]
RW
Output data for Px0.
Rev 1.0
59
EM341
Register 7.5. GPIO_PxCLR
GPIO_PACLR: Port A Output Clear Register
GPIO_PBCLR: Port B Output Clear Register
GPIO_PCCLR: Port C Output Clear Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Px7
Px6
Px5
Px4
Px3
Px2
Px1
Px0
GPIO_PACLR: Address: 0x4000B014 Reset: 0x0
GPIO_PBCLR: Address: 0x4000B414 Reset: 0x0
GPIO_PCCLR: Address: 0x4000B814 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Px7
[7]
W
Write 1 to clear the output data bit for Px7 (writing 0 has no effect).
Px6
[6]
W
Write 1 to clear the output data bit for Px6 (writing 0 has no effect).
Px5
[5]
W
Write 1 to clear the output data bit for Px5 (writing 0 has no effect).
Px4
[4]
W
Write 1 to clear the output data bit for Px4 (writing 0 has no effect).
Px3
[3]
W
Write 1 to clear the output data bit for Px3 (writing 0 has no effect).
Px2
[2]
W
Write 1 to clear the output data bit for Px2 (writing 0 has no effect).
Px1
[1]
W
Write 1 to clear the output data bit for Px1 (writing 0 has no effect).
Px0
[0]
W
Write 1 to clear the output data bit for Px0 (writing 0 has no effect).
60
Description
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 7.6. GPIO_PxSET
GPIO_PASET: Port A Output Set Register
GPIO_PBSET: Port B Output Set Register
GPIO_PCSET: Port C Output Set Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
GPIO_PXSETRSVD
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Px7
Px6
Px5
Px4
Px3
Px2
Px1
Px0
GPIO_PASET: Address: 0x4000B010 Reset: 0x0
GPIO_PBSET: Address: 0x4000B410 Reset: 0x0
GPIO_PCSET: Address: 0x4000B810 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
GPIO_PXSETRSVD
[15:8]
W
Reserved: these bits must be set to 0.
Px7
[7]
W
Write 1 to set the output data bit for Px7 (writing 0 has no effect).
Px6
[6]
W
Write 1 to set the output data bit for Px6 (writing 0 has no effect).
Px5
[5]
W
Write 1 to set the output data bit for Px5 (writing 0 has no effect).
Px4
[4]
W
Write 1 to set the output data bit for Px4 (writing 0 has no effect).
Px3
[3]
W
Write 1 to set the output data bit for Px3 (writing 0 has no effect).
Px2
[2]
W
Write 1 to set the output data bit for Px2 (writing 0 has no effect).
Px1
[1]
W
Write 1 to set the output data bit for Px1 (writing 0 has no effect).
Px0
[0]
W
Write 1 to set the output data bit for Px0 (writing 0 has no effect).
Rev 1.0
61
EM341
Register 7.7. GPIO_PxWAKE
GPIO_PAWAKE: Port A Wakeup Monitor Register
GPIO_PBWAKE: Port B Wakeup Monitor Register
GPIO_PCWAKE: Port C Wakeup Monitor Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Px7
Px6
Px5
Px4
Px3
Px2
Px1
Px0
GPIO_PAWAKE: Address: 0x4000BC08 Reset: 0x0
GPIO_PBWAKE: Address: 0x4000BC0C Reset: 0x0
GPIO_PCWAKE: Address: 0x4000BC10 Reset: 0x0
62
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
Px7
[7]
RW
Write 1 to enable wakeup monitoring of Px7.
Px6
[6]
RW
Write 1 to enable wakeup monitoring of Px6.
Px5
[5]
RW
Write 1 to enable wakeup monitoring of Px5.
Px4
[4]
RW
Write 1 to enable wakeup monitoring of Px4.
Px3
[3]
RW
Write 1 to enable wakeup monitoring of Px3.
Px2
[2]
RW
Write 1 to enable wakeup monitoring of Px2.
Px1
[1]
RW
Write 1 to enable wakeup monitoring of Px1.
Px0
[0]
RW
Write 1 to enable wakeup monitoring of Px0.
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 7.8. GPIO_WAKEFILT: GPIO Wakeup Filtering Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
0
0
0
IRQD_WAKE_
FILTER
SC2_WAKE_
FILTER
SC1_WAKE_
FILTER
GPIO_WAKE_
FILTER
Address: 0x4000BC1C Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
IRQD_WAKE_FILTER
[3]
RW
Enable filter on GPIO wakeup source IRQD.
SC2_WAKE_FILTER
[2]
RW
Enable filter on GPIO wakeup source SC2 (PA2).
SC1_WAKE_FILTER
[1]
RW
Enable filter on GPIO wakeup source SC1 (PB2).
GPIO_WAKE_FILTER
[0]
RW
Enable filter on GPIO wakeup sources enabled by the GPIO_PnWAKE registers.
Rev 1.0
63
EM341
Note: Substitute “C” or “D” for “x” in the following detailed description.
Register 7.9. GPIO_IRQxSEL
GPIO_IRQCSEL: Interrupt C Select Register
GPIO_IRQDSEL: Interrupt D Select Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
0
0
SEL_GPIO
GPIO_IRQCSEL: Address: 0x4000BC14 Reset: 0xF
GPIO_IRQDSEL: Address: 0x4000BC18 Reset: 0x10
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
SEL_GPIO
[4:0]
RW
64
Description
Pin assigned to IRQx.
0x00: PA0
0x01: PA1
0x02: PA2
0x03: PA3
0x04: PA4
0x05: PA5
0x06: PA6
0x07: PA7
0x08: PB0
0x09: PB1
0x0A: PB2
0x0B: PB3
0x0C: PB4
0x0D: PB5
0x0E: PB6
0x0F: PB7
0x10: PC0
0x11: PC1
0x12: PC2
0x13: PC3
0x14: PC4
0x15: PC5
0x16: PC6
0x17: PC7
0x18–0x1F: Reserved
Rev 1.0
EM341
Note: Substitute “A”, “B”, “C”, or “D” for “x” in the following detailed description.
Register 7.10. GPIO_INTCFGx
GPIO_INTCFGA: GPIO Interrupt A Configuration Register
GPIO_INTCFGB: GPIO Interrupt B Configuration Register
GPIO_INTCFGC: GPIO Interrupt C Configuration Register
GPIO_INTCFGD: GPIO Interrupt D Configuration Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
GPIO_INTFILT
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Name
GPIO_INTMOD
GPIO_INTCFGA: Address: 0x4000A860
GPIO_INTCFGB: Address: 0x4000A864
GPIO_INTCFGC: Address: 0x4000A868
GPIO_INTCFGD: Address: 0x4000A86C
Reset: 0x0
Reset: 0x0
Reset: 0x0
Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
GPIO_INTFILT
[8]
RW
Set this bit to enable digital filtering on IRQx.
GPIO_INTMOD
[7:5]
RW
IRQx triggering mode.
0x0: Disabled.
0x1: Rising edge triggered.
0x2: Falling edge triggered.
0x3: Rising and falling edge triggered.
0x4: Active high level triggered.
0x5: Active low level triggered.
0x6, 0x7: Reserved.
Rev 1.0
65
EM341
Register 7.11. INT_GPIOFLAG: GPIO Interrupt Flag Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
0
0
0
INT_IRQDFLAG INT_IRQCFLAG INT_IRQBFLAG INT_IRQAFLAG
Address: 0x4000A814 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
INT_IRQDFLAG
[3]
RW
IRQD interrupt pending. Write 1 to clear IRQD interrupt (writing 0 has no effect).
INT_IRQCFLAG
[2]
RW
IRQC interrupt pending. Write 1 to clear IRQC interrupt (writing 0 has no effect).
INT_IRQBFLAG
[1]
RW
IRQB interrupt pending. Write 1 to clear IRQB interrupt (writing 0 has no effect).
INT_IRQAFLAG
[0]
RW
IRQA interrupt pending. Write 1 to clear IRQA interrupt (writing 0 has no effect).
Register 7.12. GPIO_DBGCFG: GPIO Debug Configuration Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
0
GPIO_DEBUGDIS
GPIO_EXTREGEN
GPIO_DBGCFGRSVD
0
0
0
Address: 0x4000BC00 Reset: 0x10
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
GPIO_DEBUGDIS
[5]
RW
Disable debug interface override of normal GPIO configuration.
0: Permit debug interface to be active.
1: Disable debug interface (if it is not already active).
GPIO_EXTREGEN
[4]
RW
Enable REG_EN override of PA7's normal GPIO configuration.
0: Disable override.
1: Enable override.
GPIO_DBGCFGRSVD
[3]
RW
Reserved: this bit can change during normal operation. When writing to GPIO_DBGCFG, the value of this bit must be preserved.
66
Description
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 7.13. GPIO_DBGSTAT: GPIO Debug Status Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
0
0
0
GPIO_BOOTMODE
0
GPIO_FORCEDBG GPIO_SWEN
Address: 0x4000BC04 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
GPIO_BOOTMODE
[3]
R
The state of the nBOOTMODE signal sampled at the end of reset.
0: nBOOTMODE was not asserted (it read high).
1: nBOOTMODE was asserted (it read low).
GPIO_FORCEDBG
[1]
R
Status of debugger interface.
0: Debugger interface not forced active.
1: Debugger interface forced active by debugger cable.
GPIO_SWEN
[0]
R
Status of Serial Wire interface.
0: Not enabled by SWJ-DP.
1: Enabled by SWJ-DP.
Rev 1.0
67
EM341
8. Serial Controllers
8.1. Overview
The EM341 has two serial controllers, SC1 and SC2, which provide several options for full-duplex synchronous
and asynchronous serial communications.
SPI
(Serial Peripheral Interface), master or slave
TWI (Two Wire serial Interface), master only
UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter), SC1 only
Receive and transmit FIFOs and DMA channels, SPI and UART modes
Receive and transmit FIFOs allow faster data speeds using byte-at-a-time interrupts. For the highest SPI and
UART speeds, dedicated receive and transmit DMA channels reduce CPU loading and extend the allowable time
to service a serial controller interrupt. Polled operation is also possible using direct access to the serial data
registers. Figure 8.1 shows the components of the serial controllers.
Note: The notation SCx means that either SC1 or SC2 may be substituted to form the name of a specific register or field within
a register.
SC x Interrupt
OFF
0
SC 1
only
U AR T
1
IN T _SC xC FG
IN T_SC xFLAG
SC 1 _U AR T PER / F R AC
Baud Generator
SC 1 _U AR TST AT
SC 1 _U AR T C FG
U AR T
C ontroller
TXD
R XD
nR TS
nC TS
SC x_ M OD E
SPI
2
SC x_SPISTAT
SC x_SPIC FG
SPI Slave
C ontroller
SPI M aster
C ontroller
3
SC x _R ATELIN /EXP
C lock Generator
SC x_ TW ISTAT
SC x_TW IC TR L1
SC x_TW IC TR L2
TW I M aster
C ontroller
TW I
SC x_D ATA
TX-FIFO
SC x T X D M A
channel
SC x_D M AC T R L
SC x R X D M A
channel
SC x_ D M AST AT
DM A
C ontroller
SC x_ R XC N TA/B
SC x_R XC N TSAVED
SC x_TXC N T
SC x _TX/R XBEGA /B
SC x _TX/R XEN D A /B
SC x_R XER R A /B
R X-FIFO
Figure 8.1. Serial Controller Block Diagram
68
M ISO
M OSI
S C LK
nSSEL
Rev 1.0
SC L
SD A
EM341
8.2. Configuration
Before using a serial controller, configure and initialize it as follows:
1. Set up the parameters specific to the operating mode (master/slave for SPI, baud rate for UART, etc.).
2. Configure the GPIO pins used by the serial controller as shown in Tables 8.1 and 8.2.
"7.2. Configuration" on page 49 shows how to configure GPIO pins.
3. If using DMA, set up the DMA and buffers. This is described fully in "8.7. DMA Channels" on page 99.
4. If using interrupts, select edge- or level-triggered interrupts with the SCx_INTMODE register, enable the
desired second-level interrupt sources in the INT_SCxCFG register, and finally enable the top-level SCx
interrupt in the NVIC.
5. Write the serial interface operating mode (SPI, TWI, or UART) to the SCx_MODE register.
Table 8.1. SC1 GPIO Usage and Configuration
PB1
PB2
PB3
PB4
SPI - Master
SC1MOSI
Alternate Output
(push-pull)
SC1MISO
Input
SC1SCLK
Alternate Output
(push-pull)
(not used)
SPI - Slave
SC1MISO
Alternate Output
(push-pull)
SC1MOSI
Input
SC1SCLK
Input
SC1nSSEL
Input
TWI - Master
SC1SDA
Alternate Output
(open-drain)
SC1SCL
Alternate Output
(open-drain)
(not used)
(not used)
UART
TXD
Alternate Output
(push-pull)
RXD
Input
nCTS
Input1
nRTS
Alternate Output
(push-pull)*
*Note: used if RTS/CTS hardware flow control is enabled.
Table 8.2. SC2 GPIO Usage and Configuration
PA0
PA1
PA2
PA3
SPI - Master
SC2MOSI
Alternate Output
(push-pull)
SC2MISO
Input
SC2SCLK
Alternate Output
(push-pull)
(not used)
SPI - Slave
SC2MOSI
Input
SC2MISO
Alternate Output
(push-pull)
SC2SCLK
Input
SC2nSSEL
Input
TWI - Master
(not used)
SC2SDA
Alternate Output
(open-drain)
SC2SCL
Alternate Output
(open-drain)
(not used)
Rev 1.0
69
EM341
8.2.1. Registers
Note: Substitute “1” or “2” for “x” in the following detailed descriptions.
Register 8.1. SCx_MODE
SC1_MODE: Serial Mode Register
SC2_MODE: Serial Mode Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
SC1_MODE: Address: 0x4000C854 Reset: 0x0
SC2_MODE: Address: 0x4000C054 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
SC_MODE
[1:0]
RW
70
Description
Serial controller mode.
0: Disabled.
1: UART mode (valid only for SC1).
2: SPI mode.
3: TWI mode.
Rev 1.0
SC_MODE
EM341
Register 8.2. INT_SCxFLAG
INT_SC1FLAG: Serial Controller 1 Interrupt Flag Register
INT_SC2FLAG: Serial Controller 2 Interrupt Flag Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
Name
INT_
SCCMDFIN
INT_
SCTXFIN
INT_
SCRXFIN
INT_
SCTXUND
INT_
SCRXOVF
INT_
SCTXIDLE
INT_
INT_
INT_
INT_
INT_
INT_
SC1PARERR SC1FRMERR SCTXULDB SCTXULDA SCRXULDB SCRXULDA
INT_SCNAK
1
0
INT_
INT_SCRXVAL
SCTXFREE
INT_SC1FLAG: Address: 0x4000A808 Reset: 0x0
INT_SC2FLAG: Address: 0x4000A80C Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
INT_SC1PARERR
[14]
RW
Parity error received (UART) interrupt pending.
INT_SC1FRMERR
[13]
RW
Frame error received (UART) interrupt pending.
INT_SCTXULDB
[12]
RW
DMA transmit buffer B unloaded interrupt pending.
INT_SCTXULDA
[11]
RW
DMA transmit buffer A unloaded interrupt pending.
INT_SCRXULDB
[10]
RW
DMA receive buffer B unloaded interrupt pending.
INT_SCRXULDA
[9]
RW
DMA receive buffer A unloaded interrupt pending.
INT_SCNAK
[8]
RW
NACK received (TWI) interrupt pending.
INT_SCCMDFIN
[7]
RW
START/STOP command complete (TWI) interrupt pending.
INT_SCTXFIN
[6]
RW
Transmit operation complete (TWI) interrupt pending.
INT_SCRXFIN
[5]
RW
Receive operation complete (TWI) interrupt pending.
INT_SCTXUND
[4]
RW
Transmit buffer underrun interrupt pending.
INT_SCRXOVF
[3]
RW
Receive buffer overrun interrupt pending.
INT_SCTXIDLE
[2]
RW
Transmitter idle interrupt pending.
INT_SCTXFREE
[1]
RW
Transmit buffer free interrupt pending.
INT_SCRXVAL
[0]
RW
Receive buffer has data interrupt pending.
Rev 1.0
71
EM341
Register 8.3. INT_SCxCFG
INT_SC1CFG: Serial Controller 1 Interrupt Configuration Register
INT_SC2CFG: Serial Controller 2 Interrupt Configuration Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
INT_
SCTXULDA
INT_
SCRXULDB
INT_
SCRXULDA
INT_
SCNAK
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
INT_
SCCMDFIN
INT_|
SCTXFIN
INT_
SCRXFIN
INT_
SCTXUND
INT_
SCRXOVF
INT_
SCTXIDLE
INT_
SCTXFREE
INT_
SCRXVAL
INT_
INT_
INT_
SC1PARERR SC1FRMERR SCTXULDB
INT_SC1CFG: Address: 0x4000A848 Reset: 0x0
INT_SC2CFG: Address: 0x4000A84C Reset: 0x0
72
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
INT_SC1PARERR
[14]
RW
Parity error received (UART) interrupt enable.
INT_SC1FRMERR
[13]
RW
Frame error received (UART) interrupt enable.
INT_SCTXULDB
[12]
RW
DMA transmit buffer B unloaded interrupt enable.
INT_SCTXULDA
[11]
RW
DMA transmit buffer A unloaded interrupt enable.
INT_SCRXULDB
[10]
RW
DMA receive buffer B unloaded interrupt enable.
INT_SCRXULDA
[9]
RW
DMA receive buffer A unloaded interrupt enable.
INT_SCNAK
[8]
RW
NACK received (TWI) interrupt enable.
INT_SCCMDFIN
[7]
RW
START/STOP command complete (TWI) interrupt enable.
INT_SCTXFIN
[6]
RW
Transmit operation complete (TWI) interrupt enable.
INT_SCRXFIN
[5]
RW
Receive operation complete (TWI) interrupt enable.
INT_SCTXUND
[4]
RW
Transmit buffer underrun interrupt enable.
INT_SCRXOVF
[3]
RW
Receive buffer overrun interrupt enable.
INT_SCTXIDLE
[2]
RW
Transmitter idle interrupt enable.
INT_SCTXFREE
[1]
RW
Transmit buffer free interrupt enable.
INT_SCRXVAL
[0]
RW
Receive buffer has data interrupt enable.
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 8.4. SCx_INTMODE
SC1_INTMODE: Serial Controller 1 Interrupt Mode Register
SC2_INTMODE: Serial Controller 2 Interrupt Mode Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
0
0
0
0
SC_TXIDLELEVEL SC_TXFREELEVEL SC_RXVALLEVEL
SC1_INTMODE: Address: 0x4000A854 Reset: 0x0
SC2_INTMODE: Address: 0x4000A858 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
SC_TXIDLELEVEL
[2]
RW
Transmitter idle interrupt mode - 0: edge triggered, 1: level triggered.
SC_TXFREELEVEL
[1]
RW
Transmit buffer free interrupt mode - 0: edge triggered, 1: level triggered.
SC_RXVALLEVEL
[0]
RW
Receive buffer has data interrupt mode - 0: edge triggered, 1: level triggered.
Rev 1.0
73
EM341
8.3. SPI—Master Mode
The SPI master controller has the following features:
Full
duplex operation
Programmable clock frequency (12 MHz max.)
Programmable clock polarity and phase
Selectable data shift direction (either LSB or MSB first)
Receive and transmit FIFOs
Receive and transmit DMA channels
8.3.1. GPIO Usage
The SPI master controller uses the three signals:
MOSI
(Master Out, Slave In) - outputs serial data from the master
MISO (Master In, Slave Out) - inputs serial data from a slave
SCLK (Serial Clock) - outputs the serial clock used by MOSI and MISO
The GPIO pins used for these signals are shown in Table 8.3. Additional outputs may be needed to drive the
nSSEL signals on slave devices.
Table 8.3. SPI Master GPIO Usage
MOSI
MISO
SCLK
Direction
Output
Input
Output
GPIO Configuration
Alternate Output
(push-pull)
Input
Alternate Output
(push-pull)
SC1 pin
PB1
PB2
PB3
SC2 pin
PA0
PA1
PA2
8.3.2. Set Up and Configuration
Both serial controllers, SC1 and SC2, support SPI master mode. SPI master mode is enabled by the following
register settings:
The
serial controller mode register (SCx_MODE) is 2.
The SC_SPIMST bit in the SPI configuration register (SCx_SPICFG) is 1.
The SPI serial clock (SCLK) is produced by a programmable clock generator. The serial clock is produced by
dividing down 12 MHz according to this equation:
12 MHz
rate = ------------------------------------------EXP
LIN + 1 2
EXP is the value written to the SCx_RATEEXP register, and LIN is the value written to the SCx_RATELIN register.
EXP and LIN can both be zero, so the SPI master mode clock may be 12 Mbps.
The SPI master controller supports various frame formats depending upon the clock polarity (SC_SPIPOL), clock
phase (SC_SPIPHA), and direction of data (SC_SPIORD) (see Table 8.4). The bits SC_SPIPOL, SC_SPIPHA,
and SC_SPIORD are defined within the SCx_SPICFG register.
74
Rev 1.0
EM341
Table 8.4. SPI Master Mode Formats
SCx_SPICFG
Frame Formats
SC_SPIxxx*
MST
ORD
PHA
POL
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
—
1
0
1
—
SCLKout
MOSIout
TX[7]
TX[6]
TX[5]
TX[4]
TX[3]
TX[2]
TX[1]
TX[0]
MISOin
RX[7]
RX[6]
RX[5]
RX[4]
RX[3]
RX[2]
RX[1]
RX[0]
MOSI out
TX[7]
TX[6]
TX[5]
TX[4]
TX[3]
TX[2]
TX[1]
TX[0]
MISOin
RX[7]
RX[6]
RX[5]
RX[4]
RX[3]
RX[2]
RX[1]
RX[0]
SCLKout
SCLKout
MOSIout
TX[7]
TX[6]
TX[5]
TX[4]
TX[3]
TX[2]
TX[1]
TX[0]
MISOin
RX[7]
RX[6]
RX[5]
RX[4]
RX[3]
RX[2]
RX[1]
RX[0]
MOSI out
TX[7]
TX[6]
TX[5]
TX[4]
TX[3]
TX[2]
TX[1]
TX[0]
MISOin
RX[7]
RX[6]
RX[5]
RX[4]
RX[3]
RX[2]
RX[1]
RX[0]
SCLKout
Same as above except data is sent LSB first instead of MSB first
*Note: The notation xxx means that the corresponding column header below is inserted to form the field name.
8.3.3. Operation
Characters transmitted and received by the SPI master controller are buffered in transmit and receive FIFOs that
are both 4 entries deep. When software writes a character to the SCx_DATA register, the character is pushed onto
the transmit FIFO. Similarly, when software reads from the SCx_DATA register, the character returned is pulled
from the receive FIFO. If the transmit and receive DMA channels are used, they also write to and read from the
transmit and receive FIFOs.
When the transmit FIFO and the serializer are both empty, writing a character to the transmit FIFO clears the
SC_SPITXIDLE bit in the SCx_SPISTAT register. This indicates that some characters have not yet been
transmitted. If characters are written to the transmit FIFO until it is full, the SC_SPITXFREE bit in the
SCx_SPISTAT register is cleared. Shifting out a character to the MOSI pin sets the SC_SPITXFREE bit in the
SCx_SPISTAT register. When the transmit FIFO empties and the last character has been shifted out, the
SC_SPITXIDLE bit in the SCx_SPISTAT register is set.
Characters received are stored in the receive FIFO. Receiving characters sets the SC_SPIRXVAL bit in the
SCx_SPISTAT register, indicating that characters can be read from the receive FIFO. Characters received while
the receive FIFO is full are dropped, and the SC_SPIRXOVF bit in the SCx_SPISTAT register is set. The receive
FIFO hardware generates the INT_SCRXOVF interrupt, but the DMA register will not indicate the error condition
until the receive FIFO is drained. Once the DMA marks a receive error, two conditions will clear the error indication:
setting the appropriate SC_TX/RXDMARST bit in the SCx_DMACTRL register, or loading the appropriate DMA
buffer after it has unloaded.
To receive a character, you must transmit a character. If a long stream of receive characters is expected, a long
sequence of dummy transmit characters must be generated. To avoid software or transmit DMA initiating these
transfers and consuming unnecessary bandwidth, the SPI serializer can be instructed to retransmit the last
Rev 1.0
75
EM341
transmitted character or to transmit a busy token (0xFF), which is determined by the SC_SPIRPT bit in the
SCx_SPICFG register. This functionality can only be enabled or disabled when the transmit FIFO is empty and the
transmit serializer is idle, indicated by a cleared SC_SPITXIDLE bit in the SCx_SPISTAT register. Refer to the
register description of SCx_SPICFG for more detailed information about SC_SPIRPT.
Every time an automatic character transmission starts, a transmit underrun is detected as there is no data in
transmit FIFO, and the INT_SCTXUND bit in the INT_SC2FLAG register is set. After automatic character
transmission is disabled, no more new characters are received. The receive FIFO holds characters just received.
Note: The Receive DMA complete event does not always mean the receive FIFO is empty.
"8.7. DMA Channels" on page 99 describes how to configure and use the serial receive and transmit DMA
channels.
8.3.4. Interrupts
SPI master controller second-level interrupts are generated by the following events:
Transmit
FIFO empty and last character shifted out (depending on SCx_INTMODE, either the 0 to 1
transition or the high level of SC_SPITXIDLE)
Transmit FIFO changed from full to not full (depending on SCx_INTMODE, either the 0 to 1 transition or the
high level of SC_SPITXFREE)
Receive FIFO changed from empty to not empty (depending on SCx_INTMODE, either the 0 to 1 transition
or the high level of SC_SPIRXVAL)
Transmit DMA buffer A/B complete (1 to 0 transition of SC_TXACTA/B)
Receive DMA buffer A/B complete (1 to 0 transition of SC_RXACTA/B)
Received and lost character while receive FIFO was full (receive overrun error)
Transmitted character while transmit FIFO was empty (transmit underrun error)
To enable CPU interrupts, set the desired interrupt bits in the second-level INT_SCxCFG register, and enable the
top-level SCx interrupt in the NVIC by writing the INT_SCx bit in the INT_CFGSET register.
76
Rev 1.0
EM341
8.3.5. Registers
Note: Substitute “1” or “2” for “x” in the following detailed descriptions.
Register 8.5. SCx_DATA
SC1_DATA: Serial Data Register
SC2_DATA: Serial Data Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
SC_DATA
SC1_DATA: Address: 0x4000C83C Reset: 0x0
SC2_DATA: Address: 0x4000C03C Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
SC_DATA
[7:0]
RW
Transmit and receive data register. Writing to this register adds a byte to the
transmit FIFO. Reading from this register takes the next byte from the
receive FIFO and clears the overrun error bit if it was set.
In UART mode (SC1 only), reading from this register loads the UART status
register with the parity and frame error status of the next byte in the FIFO,
and clears these bits if the FIFO is now empty.
Rev 1.0
77
EM341
Register 8.6. SCx_SPICFG
SC1SPICFG: SPI Configuration Register
SC2SPICFG: SPI Configuration Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
0
SC_SPIRXDRV
SC_SPIMST
SC_SPIRPT
SC_SPIORD
SC_SPIPHA
SC_SPIPOL
SC1SPICFG: Address: 0x4000C858 Reset: 0x0
SC2SPICFG: Address: 0x4000C058 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
SC_SPIRXDRV
[5]
RW
Receiver-driven mode selection bit (SPI master mode only). Clear this bit to initiate
transactions when transmit data is available. Set this bit to initiate transactions when
the receive buffer (FIFO or DMA) has space.
SC_SPIMST
[4]
RW
Set this bit to put the SPI in master mode, clear this bit to put the SPI in slave mode.
SC_SPIRPT
[3]
RW
This bit controls behavior when the transmit serializer must send a byte and there is no
data already available in/to the serializer. The conditions for sending this “busy” token
are transmit buffer underrun condition when using DMA in master or slave mode,
empty FIFO in slave mode, and the busy token will always be sent as the first byte
every time nSSEL is asserted while operating in slave mode. Clear this bit to send the
BUSY token (0xFF) and set this bit to repeat the last byte. Changes to this bit take
effect when the transmit FIFO is empty and the transmit serializer is idle. Note that
when the chip comes out of reset, if SC_SPIRPT is set before any data has been transmitted and no data is available (in the FIFO), the “last byte” that will be transmitted after
the padding byte is 0x00 due to the FIFO having been reset to 0x00.
SC_SPIORD
[2]
RW
This bit specifies the bit order in which SPI data is transmitted and received.
0: Most significant bit first.
1: Least significant bit first.
SC_SPIPHA
[1]
RW
Clock phase configuration: clear this bit to sample on the leading (first edge) and set
this bit to sample on the second edge.
SC_SPIPOL
[0]
RW
Clock polarity configuration: clear this bit for a rising leading edge and set this bit for a
falling leading edge.
78
Description
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 8.7. SCx_SPISTAT
SC1_SPISTAT: SPI Status Register
SC2_SPISTAT: SPI Status Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
0
0
0
SC_SPITXIDLE SC_SPITXFREE SC_SPIRXVAL SC_SPIRXOVF
SC1_SPISTAT: Address: 0x4000C840 Reset: 0x0
SC2_SPISTAT: Address: 0x4000C040 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
SC_SPITXIDLE
[3]
R
This bit is set when both the transmit FIFO and the transmit serializer are
empty.
SC_SPITXFREE
[2]
R
This bit is set when the transmit FIFO has space to accept at least one
byte.
SC_SPIRXVAL
[1]
R
This bit is set when the receive FIFO contains at least one byte.
SC_SPIRXOVF
[0]
R
This bit is set if a byte is received when the receive FIFO is full. This bit is
cleared by reading the data register.
Rev 1.0
79
EM341
Register 8.8. SCx_RATELIN
SC1_RATELIN: Serial Clock Linear Prescaler Register
SC2_RATELIN: Serial Clock Linear Prescaler Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
0
0
0
SC_RATELIN
SC1_RATELIN: Address: 0x4000C860 Reset: 0x0
SC2_RATELIN: Address: 0x4000C060 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
SC_RATELIN
[3:0]
RW
Description
The linear component (LIN) of the clock rate in the equation:
12 MHz
rate = ------------------------------------------EXP
LIN + 1 2
80
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 8.9. SCx_RATEEXP
SC1_RATEEXP: Serial Clock Exponential Prescaler Register
SC2_RATEEXP: Serial Clock Exponential Prescaler Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
0
0
0
SC_RATEEXP
SC1_RATEEXP: Address: 0x4000C864 Reset: 0x0
SC2_RATEEXP: Address: 0x4000C064 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
SC_RATEEXP
Bitfield Access
[3:0]
RW
Description
The exponential component (EXP) of the clock rate in the equation:
12 MHz
rate = ------------------------------------------EXP
LIN + 1 2
Rev 1.0
81
EM341
8.4. SPI—Slave Mode
Both SC1 and SC2 SPI controllers include an SPI slave controller with these features:
Full
duplex operation
Up to 5 Mbps data transfer rate
Programmable clock polarity and clock phase
Selectable data shift direction (either LSB or MSB first)
Slave select input
8.4.1. GPIO Usage
The SPI slave controller uses four signals:
MOSI
(Master Out, Slave In) - inputs serial data from the master
(Master In, Slave Out) - outputs serial data to the master
SCLK (Serial Clock) - clocks data transfers on MOSI and MISO
nSSEL (Slave Select) - enables serial communication with the slave
MISO
Note: The SPI slave controller does not tri-state the MISO signal when slave select is deasserted.
The GPIO pins that can be assigned to these signals are shown in Table 8.5.
Table 8.5. SPI Slave GPIO Usage
82
MOSI
MISO
SCLK
nSSEL
Direction
Input
Output
Input
Input
GPIO Configuration
Input
Alternate Output
(push-pull)
Input
Input
SC1 pin
PB2
PB1
PB3
PB4
SC2 pin
PA0
PA1
PA2
PA3
Rev 1.0
EM341
8.4.2. Set Up and Configuration
Both serial controllers, SC1 and SC2, support SPI slave mode. SPI slave mode is enabled by the following register
settings:
The
serial controller mode register, SCx_MODE, is 2
SC_SPIMST bit in the SPI configuration register, SCx_SPICFG, is 0
The SPI slave controller receives its clock from an external SPI master device and supports rates up to 5 Mbps.
The
The SPI slave controller supports various frame formats depending upon the clock polarity (SC_SPIPOL), clock
phase (SC_SPIPHA), and direction of data (SC_SPIORD) (see Table 8.6). The SC_SPIPOL, SC_SPIPHA, and
SC_SPIORD bits are defined within the SCx_SPICFG registers.
Table 8.6. SPI Slave Formats
SCx_SPICFG
Frame Format
SC_SPIxxx*
MST
ORD
PHA
POL
0
0
0
0
nSSEL
SCLKin
0
0
0
MOSI in
RX[7]
RX[6]
RX[5]
RX[4]
RX[3]
RX[2]
RX[1]
RX[0]
MISOout
TX[7]
TX[6]
TX[5]
TX[4]
TX[3]
TX[2]
TX[1]
TX[0]
MOSIin
RX[7]
RX[6]
RX[5]
RX[4]
RX[3]
RX[2]
RX[1]
RX[0]
MISOout
TX[7]
TX[6]
TX[5]
TX[4]
TX[3]
TX[2]
TX[1]
TX[0]
MOSIin
RX[7]
RX[6]
RX[5]
RX[4]
RX[3]
RX[2]
RX[1]
RX[0]
MISOout
TX[7]
TX[6]
TX[5]
TX[4]
TX[3]
TX[2]
TX[1]
TX[0]
MOSIin
RX[7]
RX[6]
RX[5]
RX[4]
RX[3]
RX[2]
RX[1]
RX[0]
MISOout
TX[7]
TX[6]
TX[5]
TX[4]
TX[3]
TX[2]
TX[1]
TX[0]
1
SCLKin
0
0
1
0
nSSEL
SCLKin
0
0
1
1
nSSEL
SCLKin
0
1
—
—
Same as above except LSB first instead of MSB first
*Note: The notation “xxx” means that the corresponding column header below is inserted to form the field name.
Rev 1.0
83
EM341
8.4.3. Operation
When the slave select (nSSEL) signal is asserted by the master, SPI transmit data is driven to the output pin MISO,
and SPI data is received from the input pin MOSI. The nSSEL pin has to be asserted to enable the transmit
serializer to drive data to the output signal MISO. A falling edge on nSSEL resets the SPI slave shift registers.
Note: The SPI slave controller does not tri-state the MISO signal when slave select is deasserted.
Characters transmitted and received by the SPI slave controller are buffered in the transmit and receive FIFOs that
are both four entries deep. When software writes a character to the SCx_DATA register, it is pushed onto the
transmit FIFO. Similarly, when software reads from the SCx_DATA register, the character returned is pulled from
the receive FIFO. If the transmit and receive DMA channels are used, the DMA channels also write to and read
from the transmit and receive FIFOs.
Characters received are stored in the receive FIFO. Receiving characters sets the SC_SPIRXVAL bit in the
SCx_SPISTAT register, to indicate that characters can be read from the receive FIFO. Characters received while
the receive FIFO is full are dropped, and the SC_SPIRXOVF bit in the SCx_SPISTAT register is set. The receive
FIFO hardware generates the INT_SCRXOVF interrupt, but the DMA register will not indicate the error condition
until the receive FIFO is drained. Once the DMA marks a receive error, two conditions will clear the error indication:
setting the appropriate SC_TX/RXDMARST bit in the SCx_DMACTRL register, or loading the appropriate DMA
buffer after it has unloaded.
Receiving a character causes the serial transmission of a character pulled from the transmit FIFO. When the
transmit FIFO is empty, a transmit underrun is detected (no data in transmit FIFO) and the INT_SCTXUND bit in
the INT_SCxFLAG register is set. Because no character is available for serialization, the SPI serializer retransmits
the last transmitted character or a busy token (0xFF), determined by the SC_SPIRPT bit in the SCx_SPICFG
register. Refer to the register description of SCx_SPICFG for more detailed information about SC_SPIRPT.
When the transmit FIFO and the serializer are both empty, writing a character to the transmit FIFO clears the
SC_SPITXIDLE bit in the SCx_SPISTAT register. This indicates that not all characters have been transmitted. If
characters are written to the transmit FIFO until it is full, the SC_SPITXFREE bit in the SCx_SPISTAT register is
cleared. Shifting out a transmit character to the MISO pin causes the SC_SPITXFREE bit in the SCx_SPISTAT
register to get set. When the transmit FIFO empties and the last character has been shifted out, the
SC_SPITXIDLE bit in the SCx_SPISTAT register is set.
The SPI slave controller must guarantee that there is time to move new transmit data from the transmit FIFO into
the hardware serializer. To provide sufficient time, the SPI slave controller inserts a byte of padding at the start of
every new string of transmit data defined by every time nSSEL is asserted. This byte is inserted as if this byte was
placed there by software. The value of the byte of padding is always 0xFF.
8.4.4. DMA
The DMA Channels "8.7. DMA Channels" on page 99 describes how to configure and use the serial receive and
transmit DMA channels.
When using the receive DMA channel and nSSEL transitions to the high (deasserted) state, the active buffer's
receive DMA count register (SCx_RXCNTA/B) is saved in the SCx_RXCNTSAVED register. SCx_RXCNTSAVED
is only written the first time nSSEL goes high after a buffer has been loaded. Subsequent rising edges set a status
bit but are otherwise ignored. The 3-bit field SC_RXSSEL in the SCx_DMASTAT register records what, if anything,
was saved to the SCx_RXCNTSAVED register, and whether or not another rising edge occurred on nSSEL.
84
Rev 1.0
EM341
8.4.5. Interrupts
SPI slave controller second-level interrupts are generated on the following events:
Transmit
FIFO empty and last character shifted out (depending on SCx_INTMODE, either the 0 to 1
transition or the high level of SC_SPITXIDLE)
Transmit FIFO changed from full to not full (depending on SCx_INTMODE, either the 0 to 1 transition or the
high level of SC_SPITXFREE)
Receive FIFO changed from empty to not empty (depending on SCx_INTMODE, either the 0 to 1 transition
or the high level of SC_SPIRXVAL)
Transmit DMA buffer A/B complete (1 to 0 transition of SC_TXACTA/B)
Receive DMA buffer A/B complete (1 to 0 transition of SC_RXACTA/B)
Received and lost character while receive FIFO was full (receive overrun error)
Transmitted character while transmit FIFO was empty (transmit underrun error)
To enable CPU interrupts, set desired interrupt bits in the second-level INT_SCxCFG register, and also enable the
top-level SCx interrupt in the NVIC by writing the INT_SCx bit in the INT_CFGSET register.
8.4.6. Registers
Refer to Registers (in the SPI Master Mode "8.3. SPI—Master Mode" on page 74) for a description of the
SCx_DATA, SCx_SPICFG, and SCx_SPISTAT registers.
8.5. TWI—Two Wire Serial Interfaces
Both serial controllers SC1 and SC2 include a Two Wire serial Interface (TWI) master with the following features:
Uses
only two bidirectional GPIO pins
Programmable clock frequency (up to 400 kHz)
Supports both 7-bit and 10-bit addressing
Compatible
with Philips' I2C-bus slave devices
8.5.1. GPIO Usage
The TWI master controller uses just two signals:
SDA
(Serial Data) - bidirectional serial data
(Serial Clock) - bidirectional serial clock
Table 8.7 lists the GPIO pins used by the SC1 and SC2 TWI master controllers. Because the pins are configured
as open-drain outputs, they require external pull-up resistors.
SCL
Table 8.7. TWI Master GPIO Usage
SDA
SCL
Direction
Input / Output
Input / Output
GPIO Configuration
Alternate Output
(Open Drain)
Alternate Output
(Open Drain)
SC1 Pin
PB1
PB2
SC2 Pin
PA1
PA2
Rev 1.0
85
EM341
8.5.2. Set Up and Configuration
The TWI controller is enabled by writing 3 to the SCx_MODE register. The TWI controller operates only in master
mode and supports both Standard (100 kbps) and Fast (400 kbps) TWI modes. Address arbitration is not
implemented, so multiple master applications are not supported.
The TWI master controller's serial clock (SCL) is produced by a programmable clock generator. SCL is produced
by dividing down 12 MHz according to the following equation:
12 MHz
rate = ------------------------------------------EXP
LIN + 1 2
EXP is the value written to the SCx_RATEEXP register and LIN is the value written to the SCx_RATELIN register.
Table 8.8 shows the rate settings for Standard-Mode TWI (100 kbps) and Fast-Mode TWI (400 kbps) operation.
Table 8.8. TWI Clock Rate Programming
Clock Rate
SCx_RATELIN
SCx_RATEEXP
100 kbps
14
3
375 kbps*
15
1
400 kbps*
14
1
*Note: At 400 kbps, the Philips I2C Bus specification requires the minimum low period of SCL to be 1.3 µs, but on
the EM341 it is 1.25 µs. If a slave device requires strict compliance with SCL timing, the clock rate must be
lowered to 375 kbps.
The EM341 supports clock stretching. The slave device can hold SCL low on any received or transmitted data bit.
This inhibits further data transfers until SCL is allowed to go high again.
86
Rev 1.0
EM341
8.5.3. Constructing Frames
The TWI master controller supports generating various frame segments by means of the SC_TWISTART,
SC_TWISTOP, SC_TWISEND, and SC_TWIRECV bits in the SCx_TWICTRL1 registers. Table 8.9 summarizes
these frames.
Table 8.9. TWI Master Frame Segments
SCx_TWICTRL1
Frame Segments
SC_TWIxxxx*
START
SEND
RECV
STOP
1
0
0
0
TWI start segment
SCLoutSLAVE
TWI re-start segment - after transmit or frame with NACK
SCLoutSLAVE
SCLout
0
1
0
0
SCLout
SDAout
SDAout
SDAoutSLAVE
SDAoutSLAVE
TWI transmit segment - after (re-)start frame
SCLoutSLAVE
SCLout
SDAout
TX[7]
TX[6]
TX[5]
TX[4]
TX[3]
TX[2 ]
TX[1]
TX[0]
SDAoutSLAVE
(N)ACK
TWI transmit segment – after transmit with ACK
SCLoutSLAVE
SCLout
SDAout
TX[7]
TX[6]
TX[5]
TX[4]
TX[3]
TX[2 ]
TX[1]
TX[0]
SDAoutSLAVE
0
0
1
0
(N)ACK
TWI receive segment – transmit with ACK
SCLoutSLAVE
SCLout
SDAout
SDAoutSLAVE
(N)ACK
RX[7]
RX[6]
RX[5]
RX[4 ]
RX[3]
RX[2]
RX[1]
RX[0]
TWI receive segment - after receive with ACK
SCLoutSLAVE
SCLout
SDAout
SDAoutSLAVE
0
0
0
1
(N)ACK
RX[7]
RX[6]
RX[5]
RX[4 ]
RX[3]
RX[2]
RX[1]
RX[0]
TWI stop segment - after frame with NACK or stop
SCLoutSLAVE
SCLout
SDAout
SDAoutSLAVE
0
0
0
0
No pending frame segment
1
—
—
1
1
1
—
—
—
1
1
—
—
—
1
1
Illegal
*Note: The notation “xxx” means that the corresponding column header below is inserted to form the field name.
Rev 1.0
87
EM341
Full TWI frames have to be constructed by software from individual TWI segments. All necessary segment
transitions are shown in Figure 8.2. ACK or NACK generation of a TWI receive frame segment is determined with
the SC_TWIACK bit in the SCx_TWICTRL2 register.
IDLE
START Segment
STOP Segment
TRANSMIT Segment
NO
received ACK ?
YES
RECEIVE Segment
with NACK
RECEIVE Segment
with ACK
Figure 8.2. TWI Segment Transitions
Generation of a 7-bit address is accomplished with one transmit segment. The upper 7 bits of the transmitted
character contain the 7-bit address. The remaining lower bit contains the command type (“read” or “write”).
Generation of a 10-bit address is accomplished with two transmit segments. The upper 5 bits of the first transmit
character must be set to 0x1E. The next 2 bits are for the two most significant bits of the 10-bit address. The
remaining lower bit contains the command type (“read” or “write”). The second transmit segment is for the
remaining 8 bits of the 10-bit address.
Transmitted and received characters are accessed through the SCx_DATA register.
To initiate (re)start and stop segments, set the SC_TWISTART or SC_TWISTOP bit in the SCx_TWICTRL1
register, then wait until the bit is clear. Alternatively, the SC_TWICMDFIN bit in the SCx_TWISTAT can be used for
waiting.
To initiate a transmit segment, write the data to the SCx_DATA data register, then set the SC_TWISEND bit in the
SCx_TWICTRL1 register, and finally wait until the bit is clear. Alternatively the SC_TWITXFIN bit in the
SCx_TWISTAT register can be used for waiting.
To initiate a receive segment, set the SC_TWIRECV bit in the SCx_TWICTRL1 register, wait until it is clear, and
then read from the SCx_DATA register. Alternatively, the SC_TWIRXFIN bit in the SCx_TWISTAT register can be
used for waiting. Now the SC_TWIRXNAK bit in the SCx_TWISTAT register indicates if a NACK or ACK was
received from a TWI slave device.
88
Rev 1.0
EM341
8.5.4. Interrupts
TWI master controller interrupts are generated on the following events:
Bus
command (SC_TWISTART/SC_TWISTOP) completed (0 to 1 transition of SC_TWICMDFIN)
transmitted and slave device responded with NACK
Character transmitted (0 to 1 transition of SC_TWITXFIN)
Character received (0 to 1 transition of SC_TWIRXFIN)
Received and lost character while receive FIFO was full (receive overrun error)
Transmitted character while transmit FIFO was empty (transmit underrun error)
To enable CPU interrupts, set the desired interrupt bits in the second-level INT_SCxCFG register, and enable the
top-level SCx interrupt in the NVIC by writing the INT_SCx bit in the INT_CFGSET register.
Character
8.5.5. Registers
Refer to "8.3.5. Registers" on page 77 (in “8.3. SPI—Master Mode” ) for a description of the SCx_DATA,
SCx_RATELIN, and SCx_RATEEXP registers.
Note: Substitute “1” or “2” for “x” in the following detailed descriptions.
Register 8.10. SCx_TWISTAT
SC1_TWISTAT: TWI Status Register
SC2_TWISTAT: TWI Status Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
0
0
0
SC_TWICMDFIN SC_TWIRXFIN SC_TWITXFIN SC_TWIRXNAK
SC1_TWISTAT: Address: 0x4000C844 Reset: 0x0
SC2_TWISTAT: Address: 0x4000C044 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
SC_TWICMDFIN
[3]
R
This bit is set when a START or STOP command completes. It clears on the next TWI
bus activity.
SC_TWIRXFIN
[2]
R
This bit is set when a byte is received. It clears on the next TWI bus activity.
SC_TWITXFIN
[1]
R
This bit is set when a byte is transmitted. It clears on the next TWI bus activity.
SC_TWIRXNAK
[0]
R
This bit is set when a NACK is received from the slave. It clears on the next TWI bus
activity.
Rev 1.0
89
EM341
Register 8.11. SCx_TWICTRL1
SC1_TWICTRL1: TWI Control Register 1
SC2_TWICTRL1: TWI Control Register 1
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
0
0
0
SC_TWISTOP
SC_TWISTART
SC_TWISEND
SC_TWIRECV
SC1_TWICTRL1: Address: 0x4000C84C Reset: 0x0
SC2_TWICTRL1: Address: 0x4000C04C Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
SC_TWISTOP
[3]
RW
Setting this bit sends the STOP command. It clears when the command completes.
Description
SC_TWISTART
[2]
RW
Setting this bit sends the START or repeated START command. It clears when the
command completes.
SC_TWISEND
[1]
RW
Setting this bit transmits a byte. It clears when the command completes.
SC_TWIRECV
[0]
RW
Setting this bit receives a byte. It clears when the command completes.
Register 8.12. SCx_TWICTRL2
SC1_TWICTRL2: TWI Control Register 2
SC2_TWICTRL2: TWI Control Register 2
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SC_TWIACK
SC1_TWICTRL2: Address: 0x4000C850 Reset: 0x0
SC2_TWICTRL2: Address: 0x4000C050 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
SC_TWIACK
[0]
RW
Setting this bit signals ACK after a received byte. Clearing this bit signals NACK after a
received byte.
90
Rev 1.0
EM341
8.6. UART—Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
The SC1 UART is enabled by writing 1 to SC1_MODE. The SC2 serial controller does not include UART functions.
The UART supports the following features:
Flexible
baud rate clock (300 bps to 921.6 kbps)
Data bits (7 or 8)
Parity bits (none, odd, or even)
Stop bits (1 or 2)
False start bit and noise filtering
Receive and transmit FIFOs
Optional RTS/CTS flow control
Receive and transmit DMA channels
8.6.1. GPIO Usage
The UART uses two signals to transmit and receive serial data:
TXD
(Transmitted Data) - serial data sent by the EM341
(Received Data) - serial data received by the EM341
If RTS/CTS flow control is enabled, these two signals are also used:
RXD
nRTS
(Request To Send) - indicates the EM341 is able to receive data
(Clear To Send) - inhibits sending data from the EM341 if not asserted
The GPIO pins assigned to these signals are shown in Table 8.10.
nCTS
Table 8.10. UART GPIO Usage
TXD
RXD
nCTS1
nRTS*
Direction
Output
Input
Input
Output
GPIO Configuration
Alternate
Output (push-pull)
Input
Input
Alternate
Output (push-pull)
SC1 pin
PB1
PB2
PB3
PB4
*Note: Only used if RTS/CTS hardware flow control is enabled.
Rev 1.0
91
EM341
8.6.2. Set Up and Configuration
The UART baud rate clock is produced by a programmable baud generator starting from the 24 Hz clock:
24 MHz
baud = -------------------2N + F
The integer portion of the divisor, N, is written to the SC1_UARTPER register and the fractional part, F, to the
SC1_UARTFRAC register. Table 8.11 shows the values used to generate some common baud rates and their
associated clock frequency error. The UART requires an internal clock that is at least eight times the baud rate
clock, so the minimum allowable setting for SC1_UARTPER is 8.
Table 8.11. UART Baud Rate Divisors for Common Baud Rates
Baud Rate
(bits/sec)
SC1_UARTPER
SC1_UARTFRAC
Baud Rate Error (%)
300
40000
0
0
2400
5000
0
0
4800
2500
0
0
9600
1250
0
0
19200
625
0
0
38400
312
1
0
57600
208
1
– 0.08
115200
104
0
+ 0.16
230400
52
0
+ 0.16
460800
26
0
+ 0.16
921600
13
0
+ 0.16
The UART can miss bytes when the inter-byte gap is long or there is a baud rate mismatch between receiver and
transmitter. The UART may detect a parity and/or framing error on the corrupted byte, but there will not necessarily
be any error detected.
The UART is best operated in systems where the other side of the communication link also uses a crystal as its
timing reference, and baud rates should be selected to minimize the baud rate mismatch to the crystal tolerance.
Additionally, UART protocols should contain some form of error checking (for example CRC) at the packet level to
detect, and retry in the event of errors. Since the probability of corruption is low, there would only be a small effect
on UART throughput due to retries.
Errors may occur when:
6
10
T gap -------------------------------------baud Ferror
Where:
T gap = inter-byte gap in seconds
baud = baud rate in bps
Ferror = relative frequency error in ppm
92
Rev 1.0
EM341
For example, if the baud rate tolerance between receive and transmit is 200 ppm (reasonable if both sides are
derived from a crystal), and the baud rate is 115200 bps, then errors will not occur until the inter-byte gap exceeds
43 ms. If the gap is exceeded then the chance of an error is essentially random, with a probability of approximately
P = baud / 24e6. At 115200 bps, the probability of corruption is 0.5%.
The UART character frame format is determined by four bits in the SC1_UARTCFG register:
SC_UART8BIT
specifies the number of data bits in received and transmitted characters. If this bit is clear,
characters have 7 data bits; if set, characters have 8 data bits.
SC_UART2STP selects the number of stop bits in transmitted characters. (Only one stop bit is required in
received characters.) If this bit is clear, characters are transmitted with one stop bit; if set, characters are
transmitted with two stop bits.
SC_UARTPAR controls whether or not received and transmitted characters include a parity bit. If
SC_UARTPAR is clear, characters do not contain a parity bit, otherwise, characters do contain a parity bit.
SC_UARTODD specifies whether transmitted and received parity bits contain odd or even parity. If this bit
is clear, the parity bit is even, and if set, the parity bit is odd. Even parity is the exclusive-or of all of the data
bits, and odd parity is the inverse of the even parity value. SC_UARTODD has no effect if SC_UARTPAR is
clear.
A UART character frame contains, in sequence:
The
start bit
The least significant data bit
The remaining data bits
If parity is enabled, the parity bit
The stop bit, or bits, if 2 stop bits are selected.
Figure 8.3 shows the UART character frame format, with optional bits indicated. Depending on the options chosen
for the character frame, the length of a character frame ranges from 9 to 12 bit times.
Note that asynchronous serial data may have arbitrarily long idle periods between characters. When idle, serial
data (TXD or RXD) is held in the high state. Serial data transitions to the low state in the start bit at the beginning of
a character frame.
UART Character Frame Format
(optional sections are in italics)
TXD
or
RXD
Idle time
Start
Bit
Data
Bit 0
Data
Bit 1
Data
Bit 2
Data
Bit 3
Data
Bit 4
Data
Bit 5
Data
Bit 6
Data
Bit 7
Parity
Bit
Stop
Bit
Stop
Bit
Next
Start Bit
or
IdleTime
Figure 8.3. UART Character Frame Format
Rev 1.0
93
EM341
8.6.3. FIFOs
Characters transmitted and received by the UART are buffered in the transmit and receive FIFOs that are both 4
entries deep (see Figure 8.4). When software writes a character to the SC1_DATA register, it is pushed onto the
transmit FIFO. Similarly, when software reads from the SC1_DATA register, the character returned is pulled from
the receive FIFO. If the transmit and receive DMA channels are used, the DMA channels also write to and read
from the transmit and receive FIFOs.
Receive Shift Register
Parity/Frame Errors
Transmit Shift Register
SC1_DATA (read)
SC1_UARTSTAT
SC1_DATA (write)
TXD
Transmit FIFO
Receive FIFO
RXD
CPU and DMA
Channel Access
Figure 8.4. UART FIFOs
8.6.4. RTS/CTS Flow control
RTS/CTS flow control, also called hardware flow control, uses two signals (nRTS and nCTS) in addition to received
and transmitted data (see Figure 8.5). Flow control is used by a data receiver to prevent buffer overflow, by
signaling an external device when it is and is not allowed to transmit.
EM341
UART Receiver
Other Device
RXD
TXD
nRTS
nCTS
TXD
UART Transmitter
UART Transmitter
RXD
nCTS
nRTS
UART Receiver
Figure 8.5. RTS/CTS Flow Control Connections
The UART RTS/CTS flow control options are selected by the SC_UARTFLOW and SC_UARTAUTO bits in the
SC1_UARTCFG register (see Table 8.12). Whenever the SC_UARTFLOW bit is set, the UART will not start
transmitting a character unless nCTS is low (asserted). If nCTS transitions to the high state (deasserts) while a
character is being transmitted, transmission of that character continues until it is complete.
If the SC_UARTAUTO bit is set, nRTS is controlled automatically by hardware: nRTS is put into the low state
(asserted) when the receive FIFO has room for at least two characters, otherwise is it in the high state
(unasserted). If SC_UARTAUTO is clear, software controls the nRTS output by setting or clearing the
SC_UARTRTS bit in the SC1_UARTCFG register. Software control of nRTS is useful if the external serial device
cannot stop transmitting characters promptly when nRTS is set to the high state (deasserted).
94
Rev 1.0
EM341
Table 8.12. UART RTS/CTS Flow Control Configurations
SC1_UARTCFG
Pins Used
Operating Mode
SC_UARTxxx*
FLOW
AUTO
RTS
0
—
—
1
0
0/1
TXD, RXD, Flow control using RTS/CTS with software control of nRTS:
nCTS, nRTS nRTS controlled by SC_UARTRTS bit in SC1_UARTCFG register
1
1
—
TXD, RXD, Flow control using RTS/CTS with hardware control of nRTS:
nCTS, nRTS nRTS is asserted if room for at least 2 characters in receive FIFO
TXD, RXD
No RTS/CTS flow control
*Note: The notation “xxx” means that the corresponding column header below is inserted to form the field name.
8.6.5. DMA
"8.7. DMA Channels" on page 99 describes how to configure and use the serial receive and transmit DMA
channels.
The receive DMA channel has special provisions to record UART receive errors. When the DMA channel transfers
a character from the receive FIFO to a buffer in memory, it checks the stored parity and frame error status flags.
When an error is flagged, the SC1_RXERRA/B register is updated, marking the offset to the first received
character with a parity or frame error. Similarly if a receive overrun error occurs, the SC1_RXERRA/B registers
mark the error offset. The receive FIFO hardware generates the INT_SCRXOVF interrupt and DMA status register
indicates the error immediately, but in this case the error offset is 4 characters ahead of the actual overflow at the
input to the receive FIFO. Two conditions will clear the error indication: setting the appropriate SC_RXDMARST bit
in the SC1_DMACTRL register, or loading the appropriate DMA buffer after it has unloaded.
8.6.6. Interrupts
UART interrupts are generated on the following events:
Transmit
FIFO empty and last character shifted out (depending on SCx_INTMODE, either the 0 to 1
transition or the high level of SC_UARTTXIDLE)
Transmit FIFO changed from full to not full (depending on SCx_INTMODE, either the 0 to 1 transition or the
high level of SC_UARTTXFREE)
Receive FIFO changed from empty to not empty (depending on SCx_INTMODE, either the 0 to 1 transition
or the high level of SC_UARTRXVAL)
Transmit DMA buffer A/B complete (1 to 0 transition of SC_TXACTA/B)
Receive DMA buffer A/B complete (1 to 0 transition of SC_RXACTA/B)
Character received with parity error
Character received with frame error
Character received and lost when receive FIFO was full (receive overrun error)
To enable CPU interrupts, set the desired interrupt bits in the second-level INT_SCxCFG register, and enable the
top-level SCx interrupt in the NVIC by writing the INT_SCx bit in the INT_CFGSET register.
Rev 1.0
95
EM341
8.6.7. Registers
Refer to "8.3.5. Registers" on page 77 (in “8.3. SPI—Master Mode” ) for a description of the SCx_DATA register.
Register 8.13. SC1_UARTSTAT: UART Status Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
SC_
UARTTXIDLE
SC_
SC_
SC_
SC_
SC_
SC_
UARTPARERR UARTFRMERR UARTRXOVF UARTTXFREE UARTRXVAL UARTCTS
SC1_UARTSTAT: Address: 0x4000C848 Reset: 0x40
Bitname
Bitfield Access
Description
SC_UARTTXIDLE
[6]
R
This bit is set when both the transmit FIFO and the transmit serializer are empty.
SC_UARTPARERR
[5]
R
This bit is set when the byte in the data register was received with a parity error. This
bit is updated when the data register is read, and is cleared if the receive FIFO is
empty.
SC_UARTFRMERR
[4]
R
This bit is set when the byte in the data register was received with a frame error. This
bit is updated when the data register is read, and is cleared if the receive FIFO is
empty.
SC_UARTRXOVF
[3]
R
This bit is set when the receive FIFO has been overrun. This occurs if a byte is
received when the receive FIFO is full. This bit is cleared by reading the data register.
SC_UARTTXFREE
[2]
R
This bit is set when the transmit FIFO has space for at least one byte.
SC_UARTRXVAL
[1]
R
This bit is set when the receive FIFO contains at least one byte.
SC_UARTCTS
[0]
R
This bit shows the logical state (not voltage level) of the nCTS input:
0: nCTS is deasserted (pin is high, 'XOFF', RS232 negative voltage); the UART is
inhibited from starting to transmit a byte.
1: nCTS is asserted (pin is low, 'XON', RS232 positive voltage); the UART may
transmit.
96
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 8.14. SC1_UARTCFG: UART Configuration Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
SC_
UARTAUTO
SC_
UARTFLOW
SC_
UARTODD
SC_
UARTPAR
SC_
UART2STP
SC_
UART8BIT
SC_
UARTRTS
SC1_UARTCFG: Address: 0x4000C85C Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
SC_UARTAUTO
[6]
RW
Set this bit to enable automatic nRTS control by hardware (SC_UARTFLOW must
also be set). When automatic control is enabled, nRTS will be deasserted when the
receive FIFO has space for only one more byte (inhibits transmission from the other
device) and will be asserted if it has space for more than one byte (enables transmission from the other device). The SC_UARTRTS bit in this register has no effect if
this bit is set.
SC_UARTFLOW
[5]
RW
Set this bit to enable using nRTS/nCTS flow control signals. Clear this bit to disable
the signals. When this bit is clear, the UART transmitter will not be inhibited by
nCTS.
SC_UARTODD
[4]
RW
If parity is enabled, specifies the kind of parity.
0: Even parity.
1: Odd parity.
SC_UARTPAR
[3]
RW
Specifies whether to use parity bits.
0: Don't use parity.
1: Use parity.
SC_UART2STP
[2]
RW
Number of stop bits transmitted.
0: 1 stop bit.
1: 2 stop bits.
SC_UART8BIT
[1]
RW
Number of data bits.
0: 7 data bits.
1: 8 data bits.
SC_UARTRTS
[0]
RW
nRTS is an output to control the flow of serial data sent to the EM341 from another
device. This bit directly controls the output at the nRTS pin (SC_UARTFLOW must
be set and SC_UARTAUTO must be cleared). When this bit is set, nRTS is asserted
(pin is low, 'XON', RS232 positive voltage); the other device's transmission is
enabled. When this bit is cleared, nRTS is deasserted (pin is high, 'XOFF', RS232
negative voltage), the other device's transmission is inhibited.
Rev 1.0
97
EM341
Register 8.15. SC1_UARTPER: UART Baud Rate Period Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
2
1
0
Name
SC_UARTPER
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
3
SC_UARTPER
SC1_UARTPER: Address: 0x4000C868 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
SC_UARTPER
[15:0]
RW
Description
The integer part of baud rate period (N) in the equation:
24 MHz
rate = --------------------------------2 N + F
Register 8.16. SC1_UARTFRAC: UART Baud Rate Fractional Period Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SC_UARTFRAC
SC1_UARTFRAC: Address: 0x4000C86C Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
SC_UARTFRAC
[0]
RW
Description
The fractional part of the baud rate period (F) in the equation:
24 MHz
rate = --------------------------------2 N + F
98
Rev 1.0
EM341
8.7. DMA Channels
The EM341 serial DMA channels enable efficient, high-speed operation of the SPI and UART controllers by
reducing the load on the CPU as well as decreasing the frequency of interrupts that it must service. The transmit
and receive DMA channels can transfer data between the transmit and receive FIFOs and the DMA buffers in main
memory as quickly as it can be transmitted or received. Once software defines, configures, and activates the DMA,
it only needs to handle an interrupt when a transmit buffer has been emptied or a receive buffer has been filled.
The DMA channels each support two memory buffers, labeled A and B, and can alternate ("ping-pong") between
them automatically to allow continuous communication without critical interrupt timing.
Note: DMA memory buffer terminology
load
- make a buffer available for the DMA channel to use
- a buffer loaded but not yet active
active - the buffer that will be used for the next DMA transfer
unload - DMA channel action when it has finished with a buffer
idle - a buffer that has not been loaded, or has been unloaded
To use a DMA channel, software should follow these steps:
pending
1. Reset the DMA channel by setting the SC_TXDMARST (or SC_RXDMARST) bit in the SCx_DMACTRL
register.
2. Set up the DMA buffers. The two DMA buffers, A and B, are defined by writing the start address to
SCx_TXBEGA/B (or SCx_RXBEGA/B) and the (inclusive) end address to SCx_TXENDA/B (or
SCx_RXENDA/B). Note that DMA buffers must be in RAM.
3. Configure and initialize SCx for the desired operating mode.
4. Enable second-level interrupts triggered when DMA buffers unload by setting the INT_SCTXULDA/B (or
INT_SCRXULDA/B) bits in the INT_SCxFLAG register.
5. Enable top-level NVIC interrupts by setting the INT_SCx bit in the INT_CFGSET register.
6. Start the DMA by loading the DMA buffers by setting the SC_TXLODA/B (or SC_RXLODA/B) bits in the
SCx_DMACTRL register.
A DMA buffer's end address, SCx_TXENDA/B (or SCx_RXENDA/B), can be written while the buffer is loaded or
active. This is useful for receiving messages that contain an initial byte count, since it allows software to set the
buffer end address at the last byte of the message.
As the DMA channel transfers data between the transmit or receive FIFO and a memory buffer, the DMA count
register contains the byte offset from the start of the buffer to the address of the next byte that will be written or
read. A transmit DMA channel has a single DMA count register (SCx_TXCNT) that applies to whichever transmit
buffer is active, but a receive DMA channel has two DMA count registers (SCx_RXCNTA/B), one for each receive
buffer. The DMA count register contents are preserved until the corresponding buffer, or either buffer in the case of
the transmit DMA count, is loaded, or until the DMA is reset.
The receive DMA count register may be written while the corresponding buffer is loaded. If the buffer is not loaded,
writing the DMA count register also loads the buffer while preserving the count value written. This feature can
simplify handling UART receive errors.
The DMA channel stops using a buffer and unloads it when the following is true:
(DMA buffer start address + DMA buffer count) > DMA buffer end address
Typically a transmit buffer is unloaded after all its data has been sent, and a receive buffer is unloaded after it is
filled with data, but writing to the buffer end address or buffer count registers can also cause a buffer to unload
early.
Serial controller DMA channels include additional features specific to the SPI and UART operation and are
described in those sections.
Rev 1.0
99
EM341
8.7.1. Registers
Note: Substitute “1” or “2” for “x” in the following detailed descriptions.
Register 8.17. SCx_DMACTRL
SC1_DMACTRL: Serial DMA Control Register
SC2_DMACTRL: Serial DMA Control Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
0
SC_TXDMARST SC_RXDMARST SC_TXLODB SC_TXLODA SC_RXLODB SC_RXLODA
SC1_DMACTRL: Address: 0x4000C830 Reset: 0x0
SC2_DMACTRL: Address: 0x4000C030 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
SC_TXDMARST
[5]
W
Setting this bit resets the transmit DMA. The bit clears automatically.
SC_RXDMARST
[4]
W
Setting this bit resets the receive DMA. The bit clears automatically.
SC_TXLODB
[3]
RW
Setting this bit loads DMA transmit buffer B addresses and allows the DMA controller
to start processing transmit buffer B. If both buffer A and B are loaded simultaneously, buffer A will be used first. This bit is cleared when DMA completes. Writing a
zero to this bit has no effect.
Reading this bit returns DMA buffer status:
0: DMA processing is complete or idle.
1: DMA processing is active or pending.
SC_TXLODA
[2]
RW
Setting this bit loads DMA transmit buffer A addresses and allows the DMA controller
to start processing transmit buffer A. If both buffer A and B are loaded simultaneously, buffer A will be used first. This bit is cleared when DMA completes. Writing a
zero to this bit has no effect.
Reading this bit returns DMA buffer status:
0: DMA processing is complete or idle.
1: DMA processing is active or pending.
SC_RXLODB
[1]
RW
Setting this bit loads DMA receive buffer B addresses and allows the DMA controller
to start processing receive buffer B. If both buffer A and B are loaded simultaneously,
buffer A will be used first. This bit is cleared when DMA completes. Writing a zero to
this bit has no effect.
Reading this bit returns DMA buffer status:
0: DMA processing is complete or idle.
1: DMA processing is active or pending.
SC_RXLODA
[0]
RW
Setting this bit loads DMA receive buffer A addresses and allows the DMA controller
to start processing receive buffer A. If both buffer A and B are loaded simultaneously,
buffer A will be used first. This bit is cleared when DMA completes. Writing a zero to
this bit has no effect.
Reading this bit returns DMA buffer status:
0: DMA processing is complete or idle.
1: DMA processing is active or pending.
100
Description
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 8.18. SCx_DMASTAT
SC1_DMASTAT: Serial DMA Status Register
SC2_DMASTAT: Serial DMA Status Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
SC_RXSSEL
4
3
SC_RXFRMB SC_RXFRMA
2
1
0
Name SC_RXPARB SC_RXPARA SC_RXOVFB SC_RXOVFA SC_TXACTB SC_TXACTA SC_RXACTB SC_RXACTA
SC1_DMASTAT: Address: 0x4000C82C Reset: 0x0
SC2_DMASTAT: Address: 0x4000C02C Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield Access
Description
SC_RXSSEL
[12:10]
R
Status of the receive count saved in SCx_RXCNTSAVED (SPI slave mode) when nSSEL
deasserts. Cleared when a receive buffer is loaded and when the receive DMA is reset.
0: No count was saved because nSSEL did not deassert.
2: Buffer A's count was saved, nSSEL deasserted once.
3: Buffer B's count was saved, nSSEL deasserted once.
6: Buffer A's count was saved, nSSEL deasserted more than once.
7: Buffer B's count was saved, nSSEL deasserted more than once.
1, 4, 5: Reserved.
SC_RXFRMB
[9]
R
This bit is set when DMA receive buffer B reads a byte with a frame error from the receive
FIFO. It is cleared the next time buffer B is loaded or when the receive DMA is reset. (SC1
in UART mode only)
SC_RXFRMA
[8]
R
This bit is set when DMA receive buffer A reads a byte with a frame error from the receive
FIFO. It is cleared the next time buffer A is loaded or when the receive DMA is reset. (SC1
in UART mode only)
SC_RXPARB
[7]
R
This bit is set when DMA receive buffer B reads a byte with a parity error from the receive
FIFO. It is cleared the next time buffer B is loaded or when the receive DMA is reset. (SC1
in UART mode only)
SC_RXPARA
[6]
R
This bit is set when DMA receive buffer A reads a byte with a parity error from the receive
FIFO. It is cleared the next time buffer A is loaded or when the receive DMA is reset. (SC1
in UART mode only)
SC_RXOVFB
[5]
R
This bit is set when DMA receive buffer B was passed an overrun error from the receive
FIFO. Neither receive buffer was capable of accepting any more bytes (unloaded), and the
FIFO filled up. Buffer B was the next buffer to load, and when it drained the FIFO the overrun error was passed up to the DMA and flagged with this bit. Cleared the next time buffer
B is loaded and when the receive DMA is reset.
Rev 1.0
101
EM341
SC_RXOVFA
[4]
R
This bit is set when DMA receive buffer A was passed an overrun error from the receive
FIFO. Neither receive buffer was capable of accepting any more bytes (unloaded), and the
FIFO filled up. Buffer A was the next buffer to load, and when it drained the FIFO the overrun error was passed up to the DMA and flagged with this bit. Cleared the next time buffer
A is loaded and when the receive DMA is reset.
SC_TXACTB
[3]
R
This bit is set when DMA transmit buffer B is active.
SC_TXACTA
[2]
R
This bit is set when DMA transmit buffer A is active.
SC_RXACTB
[1]
R
This bit is set when DMA receive buffer B is active.
SC_RXACTA
[0]
R
This bit is set when DMA receive buffer A is active.
Register 8.19. SCx_TXBEGA
SC1_TXBEGA: Transmit DMA Begin Address Register A
SC2_TXBEGA: Transmit DMA Begin Address Register A
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
Bit
7
6
1
0
SC_TXBEGA
5
Name
4
3
2
SC_TXBEGA
SC1_TXBEGA: Address: 0x4000C810 Reset: 0x20000000
SC2_TXBEGA: Address: 0x4000C010 Reset: 0x20000000
102
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
SC_TXBEGA
[13:0]
RW
Description
DMA transmit buffer A start address.
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 8.20. SCx_TXBEGB
SC1_TXBEGB: Transmit DMA Begin Address Register B
SC2_TXBEGB: Transmit DMA Begin Address Register B
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
Bit
7
6
1
0
SC_TXBEGB
5
Name
4
3
2
SC_TXBEGB
SC1_TXBEGB: Transmit DMA Begin Address Register B
SC2_TXBEGB: Transmit DMA Begin Address Register B
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
SC_TXBEGB
[13:0]
RW
Description
DMA transmit buffer B start address.
Register 8.21. SCx_TXENDA
SC1_TXENDA: Transmit DMA End Address Register A
SC2_TXENDA: Transmit DMA End Address Register A
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
Bit
7
6
1
0
Name
SC_TXENDA
5
4
3
2
SC_TXENDA
SC1_TXENDA: Address: 0x4000C814 Reset: 0x20000000
SC2_TXENDA: Address: 0x4000C014 Reset: 0x20000000
Bitname
SC_TXENDA
Bitfield Access
[13:0]
RW
Description
Address of the last byte that will be read from the DMA transmit buffer A.
Rev 1.0
103
EM341
Register 8.22. SCx_TXENDB
SC1_TXENDB: Transmit DMA End Address Register B
SC2_TXENDB: Transmit DMA End Address Register B
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
Bit
7
6
1
0
SC_TXENDB
5
Name
4
3
2
SC_TXENDB
SC1_TXENDB: Address: 0x4000C81C Reset: 0x20000000
SC2_TXENDB: Address: 0x4000C01C Reset: 0x20000000
Bitname
Bitfield Access
SC_TXENDB
[13:0]
RW
Description
Address of the last byte that will be read from the DMA transmit buffer B.
Register 8.23. SCx_TXCNT
SC1_TXCNT: Transmit DMA Count Register
SC2_TXCNT: Transmit DMA Count Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
Bit
7
6
1
0
SC_TXCNT
5
Name
4
3
2
SC_TXCNT
SC1_TXCNT: Address: 0x4000C828 Reset: 0x0
SC2_TXCNT: Address: 0x4000C028 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
SC_TXCNT
104
Bitfield Access
[13:0]
R
Description
The offset from the start of the active DMA transmit buffer from which the next
byte will be read. This register is set to zero when the buffer is loaded and
when the DMA is reset.
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 8.24. SCx_RXBEGA
SC1_RXBEGA: Receive DMA Begin Address Register A
SC2_RXBEGA: Receive DMA Begin Address Register A
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
Bit
7
6
1
0
SC_RXBEGA
5
Name
4
3
2
SC_RXBEGA
SC1_RXBEGA: Address: 0x4000C800 Reset: 0x20000000
SC2_RXBEGA: Address: 0x4000C000 Reset: 0x20000000
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
SC_RXBEGA
[13:0]
RW
Description
DMA receive buffer A start address.
Register 8.25. SCx_RXBEGB
SC1_RXBEGB: Receive DMA Begin Address Register B
SC2_RXBEGB: Receive DMA Begin Address Register B
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
Bit
7
6
1
0
Name
SC_RXBEGB
5
4
3
2
SC_RXBEGB
SC1_RXBEGB: Address: 0x4000C808 Reset: 0x20000000
SC2_RXBEGB: Address: 0x4000C008 Reset: 0x20000000
Rev 1.0
105
EM341
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
SC_RXBEGB
[13:0]
RW
Description
DMA receive buffer B start address.
Register 8.26. SCx_RXENDA
SC1_RXENDA: Receive DMA End Address Register A
SC2_RXENDA: Receive DMA End Address Register A
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
Bit
7
6
1
0
SC_RXENDA
5
Name
4
3
2
SC_RXENDA
SC1_RXENDA: Address: 0x4000C804 Reset: 0x20000000
SC2_RXENDA: Address: 0x4000C004 Reset: 0x20000000
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
SC_RXENDA
[13:0]
RW
106
Description
Address of the last byte that will be written in the DMA receive buffer A.
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 8.27. SCx_RXENDB
SC1_RXENDB: Receive DMA End Address Register B
SC2_RXENDB: Receive DMA End Address Register B
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
Bit
7
6
1
0
SC_RXENDB
5
Name
4
3
2
SC_RXENDB
SC1_RXENDB: Address: 0x4000C80C Reset: 0x20000000
SC2_RXENDB: Address: 0x4000C00C Reset: 0x20000000
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
SC_RXENDB
[13:0]
RW
Description
Address of the last byte that will be written in the DMA receive buffer B.
Rev 1.0
107
EM341
Register 8.28. SCx_RXCNTA
SC1_RXCNTA: Receive DMA Count Register A
SC2_RXCNTA: Receive DMA Count Register A
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
Bit
7
6
1
0
SC_RXCNTA
5
Name
4
3
2
SC_RXCNTA
SC1_RXCNTA: Address: 0x4000C820 Reset: 0x0
SC2_RXCNTA: Address: 0x4000C020 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
SC_RXCNTA
108
Bitfield Access
[13:0]
RW
Description
The offset from the start of DMA receive buffer A at which the next byte will
be written. This register is set to zero when the buffer is loaded and when
the DMA is reset. If this register is written when the buffer is not loaded, the
buffer is loaded.
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 8.29. SCx_RXCNTB
SC1_RXCNTB: Receive DMA Count Register B
SC2_RXCNTB: Receive DMA Count Register B
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
Bit
7
6
1
0
SC_RXCNTB
5
Name
4
3
2
SC_RXCNTB
SC1_RXCNTB: Address: 0x4000C824 Reset: 0x0
SC2_RXCNTB: Address: 0x4000C024 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
SC_RXCNTB
Bitfield Access
[13:0]
RW
Description
The offset from the start of DMA receive buffer B at which the next byte will
be written. This register is set to zero when the buffer is loaded and when the
DMA is reset. If this register is written when the buffer is not loaded, the buffer is loaded.
Rev 1.0
109
EM341
Register 8.30. SCx_RXCNTSAVED
SC1_RXCNTSAVED: Saved Receive DMA Count Register
SC2_RXCNTSAVED: Saved Receive DMA Count Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
Bit
7
6
1
0
SC_RXCNTSAVED
5
Name
4
3
2
SC_RXCNTSAVED
SC1_RXCNTSAVED: Address: 0x4000C870 Reset: 0x0
SC2_RXCNTSAVED: Address: 0x4000C070 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
SC_RXCNTSAVED
110
Bitfield Acces
s
[13:0]
R
Description
Receive DMA count saved in SPI slave mode when nSSEL deasserts.
The count is only saved the first time nSSEL deasserts.
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 8.31. SCx_RXERRA
SC1_RXERRA: DMA First Receive Error Register A
SC2_RXERRA: DMA First Receive Error Register A
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
Bit
7
6
1
0
SC_RXERRA
5
Name
4
3
2
SC_RXERRA
SC1_RXERRA: DMA First Receive Error Register A
SC2_RXERRA: DMA First Receive Error Register A
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
SC_RXERRA
[13:0]
R
The offset from the start of DMA receive buffer A of the first byte received
with a parity, frame, or overflow error. Note that an overflow error occurs at
the input to the receive FIFO, so this offset is 4 bytes before the overflow
position. If there is no error, it reads zero. This register will not be updated
by subsequent errors until the buffer unloads and is reloaded, or the
receive DMA is reset.
Rev 1.0
111
EM341
Register 8.32. SCx_RXERRB
SC1_RXERRB: DMA First Receive Error Register B
SC2_RXERRB: DMA First Receive Error Register B
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
Bit
7
6
1
0
SC_RXERRB
5
Name
4
3
2
SC_RXERRB
SC1_RXERRB: Address: 0x4000C838 Reset: 0x0
SC2_RXERRB: Address: 0x4000C038 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
SC_RXERRB
[13:0]
R
The offset from the start of DMA receive buffer B of the first byte received
with a parity, frame, or overflow error. Note that an overflow error occurs at
the input to the receive FIFO, so this offset is 4 bytes before the overflow
position. If there is no error, it reads zero. This register will not be updated
by subsequent errors until the buffer unloads and is reloaded, or the receive
DMA is reset.
112
Rev 1.0
EM341
9. General Purpose Timers (TIM1 and TIM2)
9.1. Introduction
Each of the EM341’s two general-purpose timers consists of a 16-bit auto-reload counter driven by a
programmable prescaler. They may be used for a variety of purposes, including measuring the pulse lengths of
input signals (input capture) or generating output waveforms (output compare and PWM). Pulse lengths and
waveform periods can be modulated from a few microseconds to several milliseconds using the timer prescaler.
The timers are completely independent, and do not share any resources. They can be synchronized together as
described in the "9.3.14. Timer Synchronization" on page 138.
The two general-purpose timers, TIM1 and TIM2, have the following features:
16-bit
up, down, or up/down auto-reload counter.
Programmable prescaler to divide the counter clock by any power of two from 1 through 32768.
4 independent channels for:
Input
capture
compare
PWM generation (edge- and center-aligned mode)
One-pulse mode output
Output
Synchronization
Flexible
circuit to control the timer with external signals and to interconnect the timers.
clock source selection:
Peripheral
clock (PCLK at 6 or 12 MHz)
kHz external clock (if available)
1 kHz clock
GPIO input
32.768
Interrupt
generation on the following events:
Update:
counter overflow/underflow, counter initialization (software or internal/external trigger)
event (counter start, stop, initialization or count by internal/external trigger)
Input capture
Output compare
Trigger
Supports
incremental (quadrature) encoders and Hall sensors for positioning applications.
Trigger input for external clock or cycle-by-cycle current management.
Figure 9.1 shows an overview of a timer's internal structure.
Note: Because the two timers are identical, the notation TIMx refers to either TIM1 or TIM2. For example, TIMx_PSC refers to
both TIM1_PSC and TIM2_PSC. Similarly, “y” refers to any of the four channels of a given timer, so for example, OCy
refers to OC1, OC2, OC3, and OC4.
Rev 1.0
113
EM341
Figure 9.1. General-Purpose Timer Block Diagram
Note: The internal signals shown in Figure 9.1 are described in the Timer Signal Descriptions "9.3.15. Timer Signal
Descriptions" on page 142, and are used throughout the text to describe how the timer components are interconnected.
114
Rev 1.0
EM341
9.2. GPIO Usage
The timers can optionally use GPIOs in the PA and PB ports for external inputs or outputs. As with all EM341 digital
inputs, a GPIO used as a timer input can be shared with other uses of the same pin. Available timer inputs include
an external timer clock, a clock mask, and four input channels. Any GPIO used as a timer output must be
configured as an alternate output and is controlled only by the timer.
Many of the GPIOs that can be assigned as timer outputs can also be used by another on-chip peripheral such as
a serial controller. Using a GPIO as a timer output takes precedence over another peripheral function, as long as
the channel is configured as an output in the TIMx_CCMR1 register and is enabled in the TIMx_CCER register.
The GPIOs that can be used by Timer 1 are fixed, but the GPIOs that can be used as Timer 2 channels can be
mapped to either of two pins, as shown in Table 9.1. The Timer 2 Option Register (TIM2_OR) has four single bit
fields (TIM_REMAPCy) that control whether a Timer 2 channel is mapped to its default GPIO in port PA, or
remapped to a GPIO in PB.
Table 9.1 specifies the pins that may be assigned to Timer 1 and Timer 2 functions.
Table 9.1. Timer GPIO Usage
Signal
(Direction)
TIMxC1
(In or Out)
TIMxC2
(In or Out)
TIMxC3
(In or Out)
TIMxC4
(In or Out)
TIMxCLK
(In)
TIMxMSK
(In)
Timer 1
PB6
PB7
PA6
PA7
PB0
PB5
Timer 2
(TIM_REMAPCy = 0)
PA0
PA3
PA1
PA2
PB5
PB0
Timer 2
(TIM_REMAPCy = 1)
PB1
PB2
PB3
PB4
PB5
PB0
The TIMxCLK and TIMxMSK inputs can be used only in the external clock modes; refer to "9.3.3.2. External Clock
Source Mode 1" on page 122 and "9.3.3.3. External Clock Source Mode 2" on page 123 for details concerning their
use.
9.3. Timer Functional Description
9.3.1. Time-Base Unit
The main block of the general purpose timer is a 16-bit counter with its related auto-reload register. The counter
can count up, down, or alternate up and down. The counter clock can be divided by a prescaler.
The counter, the auto-reload register, and the prescaler register can be written to or read by software. This is true
even when the counter is running.
The time-base unit includes:
Counter
Register (TIMx_CNT)
Register (TIMx_PSC)
Auto-Reload Register (TIMx_ARR)
Some timer registers cannot be directly accessed by software, which instead reads and writes a “buffer register”.
The internal registers actually used for timer operations are called “shadow registers”.
Prescaler
The auto-reload register is buffered. Writing to or reading from the auto-reload register accesses the buffer register.
The contents of the buffer register are transferred into the shadow register permanently or at each update event
(UEV), depending on the auto-reload buffer enable bit (TIM_ARBE) in the TIMx_CR1 register. The UEV is
generated when both the counter reaches the overflow (or underflow when down-counting) and when the
TIM_UDIS bit equals 0 in the TIMx_CR1 register. It can also be generated by software. UEV generation is
described in detail for each configuration.
The counter is clocked by the prescaler output CK_CNT, which is enabled only when the counter enable bit
(TIM_CEN) in the TIMx_CR1 register is set. Refer also to the slave mode controller description in "9.3.13. Timers
Rev 1.0
115
EM341
and External Trigger Synchronization" on page 135 to get more details on counter enabling.
Note that the actual counter enable signal CNT_EN is set one clock cycle after TIM_CEN.
Note: When the EM341 enters debug mode and the ARM® CortexTM-M3 core is halted, the counters continue to run normally.
9.3.1.1. Prescaler
The prescaler can divide the counter clock frequency by power of two from 1 through 32768. It is based on a 16-bit
counter controlled through the 4-bit TIM_PSCEXP bit field in the TIMx_PSC register. The factor by which the
counter is divided is two raised to the power TIM_PSCEXP (2TIM_PSCEXP).
It can be changed on the fly as this control register is buffered. The new prescaler ratio is used starting at the next
UEV.
Figure 9.2 gives an example of the counter behavior when the prescaler ratio is changed on the fly.
Figure 9.2. Counter Modes
9.3.2. Counter Modes
9.3.2.1. Up-Counting Mode
In up-counting mode, the counter counts from 0 to the auto-reload value (contents of the TIMx_ARR register), then
restarts from 0 and generates a counter overflow event.
A UEV can be generated at each counter overflow, by setting the TIM_UG bit in the TIMx_EGR register, or by
using the slave mode controller.
Software can disable the UEV by setting the TIM_UDIS bit in the TIMx_CR1 register, to avoid updating the shadow
registers while writing new values in the buffer registers. No UEV will occur until the TIM_UDIS bit is written to 0.
Both the counter and the prescaler counter restart from 0, but the prescale rate does not change. In addition, if the
TIM_URS bit in the TIMx_CR1 register is set, setting the TIM_UG bit generates a UEV but without setting the
INT_TIMUIF flag. Thus no interrupt request is sent. This avoids generating both update and capture interrupts
when clearing the counter on the capture event.
When a UEV occurs, the update flag (the INT_TIMUIF bit in the INT_TIMxFLAG register) is set (unless TIM_URS
is 1) and the following registers are updated:
The
buffer of the prescaler is reloaded with the buffer value (contents of the TIMx_PSC register).
The auto-reload shadow register is updated with the buffer value (TIMx_ARR).
Figures 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, and 9.6 show some examples of the counter behavior for different clock frequencies when
TIMx_ARR = 0x36.
116
Rev 1.0
EM341
Figure 9.3. Counter Timing Diagram, Internal Clock Divided by 1
Figure 9.4. Counter Timing Diagram, Internal Clock Divided by 4
Figure 9.5. Counter Timing Diagram, Update Event when TIM_ARBE = 0 (TIMx_ARR Not Buffered)
Rev 1.0
117
EM341
Figure 9.6. Counter Timing Diagram, Update Event when TIM_ARBE = 1 (TIMx_ARR Buffered)
9.3.2.2. Down-Counting Mode
In down-counting mode, the counter counts from the auto-reload value (contents of the TIMx_ARR register) down
to 0, then restarts from the auto-reload value and generates a counter underflow event.
A UEV can be generated at each counter underflow, by setting the TIM_UG bit in the TIMx_EGR register, or by
using the slave mode controller. Software can disable the UEV by setting the TIM_UDIS bit in the TIMx_CR1
register, to avoid updating the shadow registers while writing new values in the buffer registers. No UEV occurs
until the TIM_UDIS bit is written to 0. However, the counter restarts from the current auto-reload value, whereas the
prescaler's counter restarts from 0, but the prescale rate doesn't change.
In addition, if the TIM_URS bit in the TIMx_CR1 register is set, setting the TIM_UG bit generates a UEV, but
without setting the INT_TIMUIF flag. Thus no interrupt request is sent. This avoids generating both update and
capture interrupts when clearing the counter on the capture event.
When a UEV occurs, the update flag (the INT_TIMUIF bit in the INT_TIMxFLAG register) is set (unless TIM_URS
is 1) and the following registers are updated:
The
prescaler shadow register is reloaded with the buffer value (contents of the TIMx_PSC register).
auto-reload active register is updated with the buffer value (contents of the TIMx_ARR register). The
auto-reload is updated before the counter is reloaded, so that the next period is the expected one.
Figure 9.7 and Figure 9.8 show some examples of the counter behavior for different clock frequencies when
TIMx_ARR = 0x36.
The
118
Rev 1.0
EM341
Figure 9.7. Counter Timing Diagram, Internal Clock Divided by 1
Figure 9.8. Counter Timing Diagram, Internal Clock Divided by 4
9.3.2.3. Center-Aligned Mode (Up/Down Counting)
In center-aligned mode, the counter counts from 0 to the auto-reload value (contents of the TIMx_ARR register) – 1
and generates a counter overflow event, then counts from the autoreload value down to 1 and generates a counter
underflow event. Then it restarts counting from 0.
In this mode, the direction bit (TIM_DIR in the TIMx_CR1 register) cannot be written. It is updated by hardware and
gives the current direction of the counter.
The UEV can be generated at each counter overflow and at each counter underflow. Setting the TIM_UG bit in the
TIMx_EGR register by software or by using the slave mode controller also generates a UEV. In this case, the both
the counter and the prescaler’s counter restart counting from 0.
Software can disable the UEV by setting the TIM_UDIS bit in the TIMx_CR1 register. This avoids updating the
shadow registers while writing new values in the buffer registers. Then no UEV occurs until the TIM_UDIS bit has
been written to 0. However, the counter continues counting up and down, based on the current auto-reload value.
In addition, if the TIM_URS bit in the TIMx_CR1 register is set, setting the TIM_UG bit generates a UEV, but
without setting the INT_TIMUIF flag. Thus no interrupt request is sent. This avoids generating both update and
capture interrupt when clearing the counter on the capture event.
Rev 1.0
119
EM341
When a UEV occurs, the update flag (the INT_TIMUIF bit in the INT_TIMxFLAG register) is set (unless TIM_URS
is 1) and the following registers are updated:
The
prescaler shadow register is reloaded with the buffer value (contents of the TIMx_PSC register).
auto-reload active register is updated with the buffer value (contents of the TIMx_ARR register). If the
update source is a counter overflow, the auto-reload is updated before the counter is reloaded, so that the
next period is the expected one. The counter is loaded with the new value.
Figures 9.9, 9.10, and 9.11 show some examples of the counter behavior for different clock frequencies.
The
Figure 9.9. Counter Timing Diagram, Internal Clock Divided by 1, TIMx_ARR = 0x6
Figure 9.10. Counter Timing Diagram, Update Event with TIM_ARBE = 1 (Counter Underflow)
120
Rev 1.0
EM341
Figure 9.11. Counter Timing Diagram, Update Event with TIM_ARBE = 1 (Counter Overflow)
9.3.3. Clock Selection
The counter clock can be provided by the following clock sources:
Internal
clock (PCLK)
clock mode 1: external input pin (TIy)
External clock mode 2: external trigger input (ETR)
Internal trigger input (ITR0): using the other timer as prescaler. Refer to "9.3.14.1. Using One Timer as
Prescaler for the Other Timer" on page 138 for more details.
9.3.3.1. Internal Clock Source (CK_INT)
External
The internal clock is selected when the slave mode controller is disabled (TIM_SMS = 000 in the TIMx_SMCR
register). In this mode, the TIM_CEN, TIM_DIR (in the TIMx_CR1 register), and TIM_UG bits (in the TIMx_EGR
register) are actual control bits and can be changed only by software, except for TIM_UG, which remains cleared
automatically. As soon as the TIM_CEN bit is written to 1, the prescaler is clocked by the internal clock CK_INT.
Figure 9.12 shows the behavior of the control circuit and the up-counter in normal mode, without prescaling.
Figure 9.12. Control Circuit in Normal Mode, Internal Clock Divided by 1
Rev 1.0
121
EM341
9.3.3.2. External Clock Source Mode 1
This mode is selected when TIM_SMS = 111 in the TIMx_SMCR register. The counter can count at each rising or
falling edge on a selected input. Figure 9.13 shows the registers and signals used in the example that follows.
Figure 9.13. TI2 External Clock Connection Example
For example, to configure the up-counter to count in response to a rising edge on the TI2 input, use the following
procedure:
Configure
channel 2 to detect rising edges on the TI2 input: Write TIM_CC2S = 01 in the TIMx_CCMR1
register.
Configure the input filter duration: Write the TIM_IC2F bits in the TIMx_CCMR1 register (if no filter is
needed, keep TIM_IC2F = 0000).
Note: The capture prescaler is not used for triggering, so it does not need to be configured.
Select
rising edge polarity: Write TIM_CC2P = 0 in the TIMx_CCER register.
the timer in external clock mode 1: Write TIM_SMS = 111 in the TIMx_SMCR register.
Select TI2 as the input source: Write TIM_TS = 110 in the TIMx_SMCR register.
Enable the counter: Write TIM_CEN = 1 in the TIMx_CR1 register.
When a rising edge occurs on TI2, the counter counts once and the INT_TIMTIF flag is set. The delay between the
rising edge on TI2 and the actual clock of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit on the TI2 input. The
relationship between rising edges on TI2 and the resulting counter clocks is shown in Figure 9.14.
Configure
Figure 9.14. Control Circuit in External Clock Mode 1
122
Rev 1.0
EM341
9.3.3.3. External Clock Source Mode 2
This mode is selected by writing TIM_ECE = 1 in the TIMx_SMCR register. The counter can count at each rising or
falling edge on the external trigger input ETR.
The TIM_EXTRIGSEL bits in the TIMx_OR register select a clock signal that drives ETR, as shown in Table 9.2.
Table 9.2. TIM_EXTRIGSEL Clock Signal Selection
TIM_EXTRIGSEL Bits
Clock Signal Selection
00
PCLK (peripheral clock). When running from the 24 MHz crystal oscillator, the PCLK
frequency is 12 MHz. When the 12 MHz RC oscillator is in use, the frequency is
6 MHz.
01
Calibrated 1 kHz internal RC oscillator
10
Optional 32.786 kHz clock
11
TIMxCLK pin. If the TIM_CLKMSKEN bit in the TIMx_OR register is set, this signal is
AND’ed with the TIMxMSK pin providing a gated clock input.
Figure 9.15 gives an overview of the external trigger input block.
Figure 9.15. External Trigger Input Block
For example, to configure the up-counter to count each 2 rising edges on ETR, use the following procedure:
Since
no filter is needed in this example, write TIM_ETF = 0000 in the TIMx_SMCR register.
Set the prescaler: Write TIM_ETPS = 01 in the TIMx_SMCR register.
Select rising edge detection on ETR: WriteTIM_ETP = 0 in the TIMx_SMCR register.
Enable external clock mode 2: Write TIM_ECE = 1 in the TIMx_SMCR register.
Enable the counter: Write TIM_CEN = 1 in the TIMx_CR1 register.
The counter counts once each two ETR rising edges. The delay between the rising edge on ETR and the actual
clock of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit on the ETRP signal.
Figure 9.16 illustrates counting every two rising edges of ETR using external clock mode 2.
Rev 1.0
123
EM341
Figure 9.16. Control Circuit in External Clock Mode 2
9.3.4. Capture/Compare Channels
Each capture/compare channel is built around a capture/compare register including a shadow register, an input
stage for capture with digital filter, multiplexing and prescaler, and an output stage with comparator and output
control.
Figure 9.17 gives an overview of the input stage of one capture/compare channel. The input stage samples the
corresponding TIy input to generate a filtered signal (TIyF). Then an edge detector with polarity selection generates
a signal (TIyFPy) which can be used either as trigger input by the slave mode controller or as the capture
command. It is prescaled before the capture register (ICyPS).
Figure 9.17. Capture/Compare Channel (Example: Channel 1 Input Stage)
The output stage generates an intermediate reference signal, OCyREF, which is only used internally. OCyREF is
always active high, but it may be inverted to create the output signal, OCy, that controls a GPIO output. Figure 9.18
shows the basic elements of a capture/compare channel.
124
Rev 1.0
EM341
Figure 9.18. Capture/Compare Channel 1 Main Circuit
Rev 1.0
125
EM341
Figure 9.19. Output Stage of Capture/Compare Channel (Channel 1)
The capture/compare block is made of a buffer register and a shadow register. Writes and reads always access the
buffer register.
In capture mode, captures are first written to the shadow register, then copied into the buffer register.
In compare mode, the content of the buffer register is copied into the shadow register which is compared to the
counter.
9.3.5. Input Capture Mode
In input capture mode, a capture/compare register (TIMx_CCRy) latches the value of the counter after a transition
is detected by the corresponding ICy signal. When a capture occurs, the corresponding INT_TIMCCyIF flag in the
INT_TIMxFLAG register is set, and an interrupt request is sent if enabled.
If a capture occurs when the INT_TIMCCyIF flag is already high, then the missed capture flag INT_TIMMISSCCyIF
in the INT_TIMxMISS register is set. INT_TIMCCyIF can be cleared by software writing a 1 to its bit or reading the
captured data stored in the TIMx_CCRy register. To clear the INT_TIMMISSCCyIF bit, write a 1 to it.
The following example shows how to capture the counter value in the TIMx_CCR1 when the TI1 input rises.
Select
the active input: TIMx_CCR1 must be linked to the TI1 input, so write the TIM_CC1S bits to 01 in the
TIMx_CCMR1 register. As soon as TIM_CC1S becomes different from 00, the channel is configured in
input and the TIMx_CCR1 register becomes read-only.
Program the required input filter duration with respect to the signal connected to the timer, when the input
is one of the TIy (ICyF bits in the TIMx_CCMR1 register). Consider a situation in which, when toggling, the
input signal is unstable during at most 5 internal clock cycles. The filter duration must be longer than these
5 clock cycles. The transition on TI1 can be validated when 8 consecutive samples with the new level have
been detected (sampled at PCLK frequency). To do this, write the TIM_IC1F bits to 0011 in the
TIMx_CCMR1 register.
Select the edge of the active transition on the TI1 channel: Write the TIM_CC1P bit to 0 in the TIMx_CCER
register (rising edge in this case).
Program the input prescaler: In this example, the capture is to be performed at each valid transition, so the
prescaler is disabled (write the TIM_IC1PSC bits to 00 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register).
Enable capture from the counter into the capture register: Set the TIM_CC1E bit in the TIMx_CCER
register.
If needed, enable the related interrupt request by setting the INT_TIMCC1IF bit in the INT_TIMxCFG
register.
When an input capture occurs:
The
TIMx_CCR1 register gets the value of the counter on the active transition.
flag is set (capture/compare interrupt flag). The missed capture/compare flag INT_TIMMISSCC1IF
in INT_TIMxMISS is also set if another capture occurs before the INT_TIMCC1IF flag is cleared.
An interrupt may be generated if enabled by the INT_TIMCC1IF bit.
INT_TIMCC1IF
126
Rev 1.0
EM341
To detect missed captures reliably, read captured data in TIMxCCRy before checking the missed capture/compare
flag. This sequence avoids missing a capture that could happen after reading the flag and before reading the data.
Note: Software can generate IC interrupt requests by setting the corresponding TIM_CCyG bit in the TIMx_EGR register.
9.3.6. PWM Input Mode
This mode is a particular case of input capture mode. The procedure is the same except:
Two
ICy signals are mapped on the same TIy input.
two ICy signals are active on edges with opposite polarity.
One of the two TIyFP signals is selected as trigger input and the slave mode controller is configured in
reset mode.
For example, to measure the period in the TIMx_CCR1 register and the duty cycle in the TIMx_CCR2 register of
the PWM applied on TI1, use the following procedure depending on CK_INT frequency and prescaler value:
These
Select
the active input for TIMx_CCR1: write the TIM_CC1S bits to 01 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register (TI1
selected).
Select the active polarity for TI1FP1, used both for capture in the TIMx_CCR1 and counter clear, by writing
the TIM_CC1P bit to 0 (active on rising edge).
Select the active input for TIMx_CCR2by writing the TIM_CC2S bits to 10 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register
(TI1 selected).
Select the active polarity for TI1FP2 (used for capture in the TIMx_CCR2) by writing the TIM_CC2P bit to 1
(active on falling edge).
Select the valid trigger input by writing the TIM_TS bits to 101 in the TIMx_SMCR register (TI1FP1
selected).
Configure the slave mode controller in reset mode by writing the TIM_SMS bits to 100 in the TIMx_SMCR
register.
Enable the captures by writing the TIM_CC1E and TIM_CC2E bits to 1 in the TIMx_CCER register.
Figure 9.20 illustrates this example.
Figure 9.20. PWM Input Mode Timing
Rev 1.0
127
EM341
9.3.7. Forced Output Mode
In output mode (CCyS bits = 00 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register), software can force each output compare signal
(OCyREF and then OCy) to an active or inactive level independently of any comparison between the output
compare register and the counter.
To force an output compare signal (OCyREF/OCy) to its active level, write 101 in the TIM_OCyM bits in the
corresponding TIMx_CCMR1 register. OCyREF is forced high (OCyREF is always active high) and OCy gets the
opposite value to the TIM_CCyP polarity bit. For example, TIM_CCyP = 0 defines OCy as active high, so when
OCyREF is active, OCy is also set to a high level.
The OCyREF signal can be forced low by writing the TIM_OCyM bits to 100 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register.
The comparison between the TIMx_CCRy shadow register and the counter is still performed and allows the
INT_TIMxCCRyIF flag to be set. Interrupt requests can be sent accordingly. This is described in “9.3.8. Output
Compare Mode” .
9.3.8. Output Compare Mode
This mode is used to control an output waveform or to indicate when a period of time has elapsed.
When a match is found between the capture/compare register and the counter, the output compare function:
Assigns
the corresponding output pin to a programmable value defined by the output compare mode (the
TIM_OCyM bits in the TIMx_CCMR1 register) and the output polarity (the TIM_CCyP bit in the
TIMx_CCER register). The output can be frozen (TIM_OCyM = 000), be set active (TIM_OCyM = 001), be
set inactive (TIM_OCyM = 010), or can toggle (TIM_OCyM = 011) on the match.
Sets a flag in the interrupt flag register (the INT_TIMCCyIF bit in the INT_TIMxFLAG register).
Generates an interrupt if the corresponding interrupt mask is set (the TIM_CCyIF bit in the INT_TIMxCFG
register).
The TIMx_CCRy registers can be programmed with or without buffer registers using the TIM_OCyBE bit in the
TIMx_CCMR1 register.
In output compare mode, the UEV has no effect on OCyREF or the OCy output. The timing resolution is one count
of the counter. Output compare mode can also be used to output a single pulse (in one pulse mode).
Procedure:
1. Select the counter clock (internal, external, and prescaler).
2. Write the desired data in the TIMx_ARR and TIMx_CCRy registers.
3. Set the INT_TIMCCyIF bit in INT_TIMxCFG if an interrupt request is to be generated.
4. Select the output mode. For example, you must write TIM_OCyM = 011, TIM_OCyBE = 0, TIM_CCyP = 0
and TIM_CCyE = 1 to toggle the OCy output pin when TIMx_CNT matches TIMx_CCRy, TIMx_CCRy
buffer is not used, OCy is enabled and active high.
5. Enable the counter: Set the TIM_CEN bit in the TIMx_CR1 register.
To control the output waveform, software can update the TIMx_CCRy register at any time, provided that the buffer
register is not enabled (TIM_OCyBE = 0). Otherwise TIMx_CCRy shadow register is updated only at the next UEV.
An example is given in Figure 9.21.
128
Rev 1.0
EM341
Figure 9.21. Output Compare Mode, Toggle on OC1
9.3.9. PWM Mode
Pulse width modulation mode allows you to generate a signal with a frequency determined by the value of the
TIMx_ARR register, and a duty cycle determined by the value of the TIMx_CCRy register.
PWM mode can be selected independently on each channel (one PWM per OCy output) by writing 110 (PWM
mode 1) or 111 (PWM mode 2) in the TIM_OCyM bits in the TIMx_CCMR1 register. The corresponding buffer
register must be enabled by setting the TIM_OCyBE bit in the TIMx_CCMR1 register. Finally, in up-counting or
center-aligned mode the auto-reload buffer register must be enabled by setting the TIM_ARBE bit in the TIMx_CR1
register.
Because the buffer registers are only transferred to the shadow registers when a UEV occurs, before starting the
counter initialize all the registers by setting the TIM_UG bit in the TIMx_EGR register.
OCy polarity is software programmable using the TIM_CCyP bit in the TIMx_CCER register. It can be programmed
as active high or active low. OCy output is enabled by the TIM_CCyE bit in the TIMx_CCER register. Refer to the
TIMx_CCER register description in "9.5. Registers" on page 144 for more details.
In PWM mode (1 or 2), TIMx_CNT and TIMx_CCRy are always compared to determine whether TIMx_CCRy ?
TIMx_CNT or TIMx_CNT ? TIMx_CCRy, depending on the direction of the counter. The OCyREF signal is asserted
only:
When
the result of the comparison changes, or
When the output compare mode (TIM_OCyM bits in the TIMx_CCMR1 register) switches from the "frozen"
configuration (no comparison, TIM_OCyM = 000) to one of the PWM modes (TIM_OCyM = 110 or 111).
This allows software to force a PWM output to a particular state while the timer is running.
The timer is able to generate PWM in edge-aligned mode or center-aligned mode depending on the TIM_CMS bits
in the TIMx_CR1 register.
9.3.9.1. PWM Edge-Aligned Mode: Up-Counting Configuration
Up-counting is active when the TIM_DIR bit in the TIMx_CR1 register is low. Refer to "9.3.2.1. Up-Counting Mode"
on page 116.
The following example uses PWM mode 1. The reference PWM signal OCyREF is high as long as TIMx_CNT <
TIMx_CCRy, otherwise it becomes low. If the compare value in TIMx_CCRy is greater than the auto-reload value in
TIMx_ARR, then OCyREF is held at 1. If the compare value is 0, then OCyREF is held at 0. Figure 9.22 shows
some edge-aligned PWM waveforms in an example, where TIMx_ARR = 8.
Rev 1.0
129
EM341
Figure 9.22. Edge-Aligned PWM Waveforms (ARR = 8)
9.3.9.2. PWM Edge-Aligned Mode: Down-Counting Configuration
Down-counting is active when the TIM_DIR bit in the TIMx_CR1 register is high. Refer to "9.3.2.2. Down-Counting
Mode" on page 118 for more information.
In PWM mode 1, the reference signal OCyREF is low as long as TIMx_CNT > TIMx_CCRy, otherwise it becomes
high. If the compare value in TIMx_CCRy is greater than the auto-reload value in TIMx_ARR, then OCyREF is held
at 1. Zero-percent PWM is not possible in this mode.
9.3.9.3. PWM Center-Aligned Mode
Center-aligned mode is active except when the TIM_CMS bits in the TIMx_CR1 register are 00 (all configurations
where TIM_CMS is non-zero have the same effect on the OCyREF/OCy signals). The compare flag is set when the
counter counts up, when it counts down, or when it counts up and down, depending on the TIM_CMS bits
configuration. The direction bit (TIM_DIR) in the TIMx_CR1 register is updated by hardware and must not be
changed by software. Refer to the "9.3.2.3. Center-Aligned Mode (Up/Down Counting)" on page 119 for more
information.
Figure 9.23 shows some center-aligned PWM waveforms in an example where:
TIMx_ARR
=8
mode is the PWM mode 1
The output compare flag is set when the counter counts down corresponding to the center-aligned mode 1
selected for TIM_CMS = 01 in the TIMx_CR1 register
PWM
130
Rev 1.0
EM341
Figure 9.23. Center-Aligned PWM Waveforms (ARR = 8)
Hints on using center-aligned mode:
When
starting in center-aligned mode, the current up-down configuration is used. This means that the
counter counts up or down depending on the value written in the TIM_DIR bit in the TIMx_CR1 register.
The TIM_DIR and TIM_CMS bits must not be changed at the same time by the software.
Writing to the counter while running in center-aligned mode is not recommended as it can lead to
unexpected results. In particular:
The
direction is not updated when the value written to the counter that is greater than the auto-reload value
(TIMx_CNT > TIMx_ARR). For example, if the counter was counting up, it continues to count up.
The direction is updated when 0 or the TIMx_ARR value is written to the counter, but no UEV is generated.
The
safest way to use center-aligned mode is to generate an update by software (setting the TIM_UG bit in
the TIMx_EGR register) just before starting the counter, and not to write the counter while it is running.
Rev 1.0
131
EM341
9.3.10. One-Pulse Mode
One-pulse mode (OPM) is a special case of the previous modes. It allows the counter to be started in response to
a stimulus and to generate a pulse with a programmable length after a programmable delay.
Starting the counter can be controlled through the slave mode controller. Generating the waveform can be done in
output compare mode or PWM mode. Select OPM by setting the TIM_OPM bit in the TIMx_CR1 register. This
makes the counter stop automatically at the next UEV.
A pulse can be correctly generated only if the compare value is different from the counter initial value. Before
starting (when the timer is waiting for the trigger), the configuration must be:
In up-counting: TIMx_CNT < TIMx_CCRy ? TIMx_ARR (in particular, 0 < TIMx_CCRy),
In down-counting: TIMx_CNT > TIMx_CCRy.
For example, to generate a positive pulse on OC1 with a length of tPULSE and after a delay of tDELAY as soon as
a rising edge is detected on the TI2 input pin, using TI2FP2 as trigger 1:
Map
TI2FP2 on TI2: Write TIM_IC2S = 01 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register.
TI2FP2 must detect a rising edge. Write TIM_CC2P = 0 in the TIMx_CCER register.
Configure TI2FP2 as trigger for the slave mode controller (TRGI): Write TIM_TS = 110 in the TIMx_SMCR
register.
Use TI2FP2 to start the counter: Write TIM_SMS to 110 in the TIMx_SMCR register (trigger mode).
The OPM waveform is defined: Write the compare registers, taking into account the clock frequency and
the counter prescaler.
The
tDELAY is defined by the value written in the TIMx_CCR1 register.
The
tPULSE is defined by the difference between the auto-reload value and the compare value (TIMx_ARR TIMx_CCR1).
To
build a waveform with a transition from 0 to 1 when a compare match occurs and a transition from 1 to 0
when the counter reaches the auto-reload value:
Enable
PWM mode 2: Write TIM_OC1M = 111 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register.
enable the buffer registers: Write TIM_OC1BE = 1 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register and TIM_ARBE in the
TIMx_CR1 register. In this case, also write the compare value in the TIMx_CCR1 register, the auto-reload value in
the TIMx_ARR register, generate an update by setting the TIM_UG bit, and wait for external trigger event on TI2.
TIM_CC1P is written to 0 in this example.
Optionally,
In the example, the TIM_DIR and TIM_CMS bits in the TIMx_CR1 register should be low.
Since only one pulse is desired, software should set the TIM_OPM bit in the TIMx_CR1 register to stop the counter
at the next UEV (when the counter rolls over from the auto-reload value back to 0).
Figure 9.24 illustrates this example.
Figure 9.24. Example of One Pulse Mode
132
Rev 1.0
EM341
9.3.10.1. A Special Case: OCy Fast Enable
In one-pulse mode, the edge detection on the TIy input sets the TIM_CEN bit, which enables the counter. Then the
comparison between the counter and the compare value toggles the output. However, several clock cycles are
needed for this operation, and it limits the minimum delay (tDELAY min) achievable.
To output a waveform with the minimum delay, set the TIM_OCyFE bit in the TIMx_CCMR1 register. Then
OCyREF and OCy are forced in response to the stimulus, without taking the comparison into account. Its new level
is the same as if a compare match had occurred. TIM_OCyFE acts only if the channel is configured in PWM mode
1 or 2.
9.3.11. Encoder Interface Mode
To select encoder interface mode, write TIM_SMS = 001 in the TIMx_SMCR register to count only TI2 edges,
TIM_SMS = 010 to count only TI1 edges, and TIM_SMS = 011 to count both TI1 and TI2 edges.
Select the TI1 and TI2 polarity by programming the TIM_CC1P and TIM_CC2P bits in the TIMx_CCER register. If
needed, program the input filter as well.
The two inputs TI1 and TI2 are used to interface to an incremental encoder (see Table 9.3). Assuming that it is
enabled (the TIM_CEN bit in the TIMx_CR1 register = 1), the counter is clocked by each valid transition on TI1FP1
or TI2FP2 (TI1 and TI2 after input filter and polarity selection, TI1FP1 = TI1 if not filtered and not inverted,
TI2FP2 = TI2 if not filtered and not inverted.) The timer input logic evaluates the sequence of the two inputs’
values, and from this generates both count pulses and the direction signal. Depending on the sequence, the
counter counts up or down, and hardware modifies the TIM_DIR bit in the TIMx_CR1 register accordingly. The
TIM_DIR bit is calculated at each transition on any input (TI1 or TI2), whether the counter is counting on TI1 only,
TI2 only, or both TI1 and TI2.
Encoder interface mode acts simply as an external clock with direction selection. This means that the counter
counts continuously between 0 and the auto-reload value in the TIMx_ARR register (0 to TIMx_ARR or TIMx_ARR
down to 0 depending on the direction), so TIMx_ARR must be configured before starting. In the same way, the
capture, compare, prescaler, and trigger output features continue to work as normal.
In this mode the counter is modified automatically following the speed and the direction of the incremental encoder,
and therefore its contents always represent the encoder’s position. The count direction corresponds to the rotation
direction of the connected sensor. Table 9.3 summarizes the possible combinations, assuming TI1 and TI2 do not
switch at the same time.
Table 9.3. Counting Direction versus Encoder Signals
Active Edges
Level on
Opposite Signal
(TI1FP1 for TI2,
TI2FP2 for TI1)
Rising
Falling
Rising
Falling
Counting on TI1
only
High
Down
Up
No Count
No Count
Low
Up
Down
No Count
No Count
Counting on TI2
only
High
No Count
No Count
Up
Down
Low
No Count
No Count
Down
Up
Counting on TI1
and TI2
High
Down
Up
Up
Down
Low
Up
Down
Down
Up
TI1FP1 Signal
TI2FP2 Signal
An external incremental encoder can be connected directly to the MCU without external interface logic. However,
comparators are normally used to convert an encoder’s differential outputs to digital signals, and this greatly
increases noise immunity. If a third encoder output indicates the mechanical zero (or index) position, it may be
connected to an external interrupt input and can trigger a counter reset.
Rev 1.0
133
EM341
Figure 9.25 gives an example of counter operation, showing count signal generation and direction control. It also
shows how input jitter is compensated for when both inputs are used for counting. This might occur if the sensor is
positioned near one of the switching points. This example assumes the following configuration:
TIM_CC1S
= 01 (TIMx_CCMR1 register, IC1FP1 mapped on TI1).
= 01 (TIMx_CCMR2 register, IC2FP2 mapped on TI2).
TIM_CC1P = 0 (TIMx_CCER register, IC1FP1 non-inverted, IC1FP1 = TI1).
TIM_CC2P = 0 (TIMx_CCER register, IC2FP2 non-inverted, IC2FP2 = TI2).
TIM_SMS = 011 (TIMx_SMCR register, both inputs are active on both rising and falling edges).
TIM_CEN = 1 (TIMx_CR1 register, counter is enabled).
TIM_CC2S
Figure 9.25. Example of Counter Operation in Encoder Interface Mode
Figure 9.26 gives an example of counter behavior when IC1FP1 polarity is inverted (same configuration as above
except TIM_CC1P = 1).
Figure 9.26. Example of Encoder Interface Mode with IC1FP1 Polarity Inverted
The timer configured in encoder interface mode provides information on a sensor’s current position. To obtain
dynamic information (speed, acceleration/deceleration), measure the period between two encoder events using a
second timer configured in capture mode. The output of the encoder that indicates the mechanical zero can be
used for this purpose. Depending on the time between two events, the counter can also be read at regular times.
Do this by latching the counter value into a third input capture register. (In this case the capture signal must be
periodic and can be generated by another timer).
134
Rev 1.0
EM341
9.3.12. Timer Input XOR Function
The TIM_TI1S bit in the TIM1_CR2 register allows the input filter of channel 1 to be connected to the output of a
XOR gate that combines the three input pins TIMxC2 to TIMxC4.
The XOR output can be used with all the timer input functions such as trigger or input capture. It is especially useful
to interface to Hall effect sensors.
9.3.13. Timers and External Trigger Synchronization
The timers can be synchronized with an external trigger in several modes: reset mode, gated mode, and trigger
mode.
9.3.13.1. Slave Mode: Reset Mode
Reset mode reinitializes the counter and its prescaler in response to an event on a trigger input. Moreover, if the
TIM_URS bit in the TIMx_CR1 register is low, a UEV is generated. Then all the buffered registers (TIMx_ARR,
TIMx_CCRy) are updated.
In the following example, the up-counter is cleared in response to a rising edge on the TI1 input:
Configure
the channel 1 to detect rising edges on TI1:
Configure
the input filter duration. In this example, no filter is required so TIM_IC1F = 0000.
capture prescaler is not used for triggering, so it is not configured.
The TIM_CC1S bits select the input capture source only, TIM_CC1S = 01 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register.
Write TIM_CC1P = 0 in the TIMx_CCER register to validate the polarity, and detect rising edges only.
The
Configure
the timer in reset mode: Write TIM_SMS = 100 in the TIMx_SMCR register.
TI1 as the input source by writing TIM_TS = 101 in the TIMx_SMCR register.
Start the counter: Write TIM_CEN = 1 in the TIMx_CR1 register.
The counter starts counting on the internal clock, then behaves normally until the TI1 rising edge. When TI1 rises,
the counter is cleared and restarts from 0. In the meantime, the trigger flag is set (the INT_TIMTIF bit in the
INT_TIMxFLAG register) and an interrupt request can be sent if enabled (depending on the INT_TIMTIF bit in the
INT_TIMxCFG register).
Select
Figure 9.27 shows this behavior when the auto-reload register TIMx_ARR = 0x36. The delay between the rising
edge on TI1 and the actual reset of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit on the TI1 input.
Figure 9.27. Control Circuit in Reset Mode
Rev 1.0
135
EM341
9.3.13.2. Slave Mode: Gated Mode
In gated mode the counter is enabled depending on the level of a selected input.
In the following example, the up-counter counts only when the TI1 input is low:
Configure
channel 1 to detect low levels on TI1:
Configure
the input filter duration. In this example, no filter is required, so TIM_IC1F = 0000.
capture prescaler is not used for triggering, so it is not configured.
The TIM_CC1S bits select the input capture source only, TIM_CC1S = 01 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register.
Write TIM_CC1P = 1 in the TIMx_CCER register to validate the polarity (and detect low level only).
The
Configure
the timer in gated mode: Write TIM_SMS = 101 in the TIMx_SMCR register.
TI1 as the input source by writing TIM_TS = 101 in the TIMx_SMCR register.
Enable the counter: Write TIM_CEN = 1 in the TIMx_CR1 register. In gated mode, the counter does not
start if TIM_CEN = 0, regardless of the trigger input level.
The counter starts counting on the internal clock as long as TI1 is low and stops as soon as TI1 becomes high. The
INT_TIMTIF flag in the INT_TIMxFLAG register is set when the counter starts and when it stops. The delay
between the rising edge on TI1 and the actual stop of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit on the TI1
input.
Select
Figure 9.28 shows the counter in gated mode with counting enabled when TI1 is low.
Figure 9.28. Control Circuit in Gated Mode
9.3.13.3. Slave Mode: Trigger Mode
In trigger mode the counter starts in response to an event on a selected input.
In the following example, the up-counter starts in response to a rising edge on the TI2 input:
Configure
channel 2 to detect rising edges on TI2:
Configure
the input filter duration. In this example, no filter is required so TIM_IC2F = 0000.
capture prescaler is not used for triggering, so it is not configured.
The TIM_CC2S bits select the input capture source only, TIM_CC2S = 01 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register.
Write TIM_CC2P = 0 in the TIMx_CCER register to validate the polarity and detect high level only.
The
Configure
the timer in trigger mode: Write TIM_SMS = 110 in the TIMx_SMCR register.
Select TI2 as the input source by writing TIM_TS = 110 in the TIMx_SMCR register.
When a rising edge occurs on TI2, the counter starts counting on the internal clock and the INT_TIMTIF flag is set.
The delay between the rising edge on TI2 and the actual start of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit
on the TI2 input.
Figure 9.29 illustrates the example in which the counter is started by a rising edge on TI2.
136
Rev 1.0
EM341
Figure 9.29. Control Circuit in Trigger Mode
9.3.13.4. Slave Mode: External Clock Mode 2 +Trigger Mode
External clock mode 2 can be used in combination with another slave mode (except external clock mode 1 and
encoder mode). In this case, the ETR signal is used as external clock input, and another input can be selected as
trigger input when operating in reset mode, gated mode or trigger mode. It is not recommended to select ETR as
TRGI through the TIM_TS bits of TIMx_SMCR register.
In the following example (shown in Figure 9.30) the up-counter is incremented at each rising edge of the ETR
signal as soon as a rising edge of TI1 occurs:
Configure
the external trigger input circuit: Program the TIMx_SMCR register as follows:
TIM_ETF
= 0000: no filter.
= 00: prescaler disabled.
TIM_ETP = 0: detection of rising edges on ETR and TIM_ECE = 1 to enable the external clock mode 2.
TIM_ETPS
Configure
the channel 1 to detect rising edges on TI, as follows:
TIM_IC1F
= 0000: no filter.
capture prescaler is not used for triggering and does not need to be configured.
TIM_CC1S = 01 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register to select only the input capture source.
TIM_CC1P = 0 in the TIMx_CCER register to validate the polarity (and detect rising edge only).
The
Configure
the timer in trigger mode: WriteTIM_SMS = 110 in the TIMx_SMCR register.
Select TI1 as the input source by writing TIM_TS = 101 in the TIMx_SMCR register.
A rising edge on TI1 enables the counter and sets the INT_TIMTIF flag. The counter then counts on ETR rising
edges. The delay between the rising edge of the ETR signal and the actual reset of the counter is due to the
resynchronization circuit on ETRP input.
Figure 9.30. Control Circuit in External Clock Mode 2 + Trigger Mode
Rev 1.0
137
EM341
9.3.14. Timer Synchronization
The two timers can be linked together internally for timer synchronization or chaining. A timer configured in master
mode can reset, start, stop or clock the counter of the other timer configured in slave mode.
Figure 9.31 presents an overview of the trigger selection and the master mode selection blocks.
9.3.14.1. Using One Timer as Prescaler for the Other Timer
For example, to configure Timer 1 to act as a prescaler for Timer 2:
Configure
Timer 1 in master mode so that it outputs a periodic trigger signal on each UEV. Writing
TIM_MMS = 010 in the TIM1_CR2 register causes a rising edge to be output on TRGO each time a UEV is
generated.
To connect the TRGO output of Timer 1 to Timer 2, configure Timer 2 in slave mode using ITR0 as an
internal trigger. Write TIM_TS = 100 in the TIM2_SMCR register.
Put the slave mode controller in external clock mode 1: Write TIM_SMS = 111 in the TIM2_SMCR register.
This causes Timer 2 to be clocked by the rising edge of the periodic Timer 1 trigger signal, which
corresponds to the Timer 1 counter overflow.
Finally, enable both timers: Set their respective TIM_CEN bits in the TIMx_CR1 register.
Note: If OCy is selected on Timer 1 as trigger output (TIM_MMS = 1xx), its rising edge is used to clock the counter of Timer 2.
Figure 9.31. Master/Slave Timer Example
138
Rev 1.0
EM341
9.3.14.2. Using One Timer to Enable the Other Timer
In this example, shown in Figure 9.32, the enable of Timer 2 is controlled with the output compare 1 of Timer 1.
Timer 2 counts on the divided internal clock only when OC1REF of Timer 1 is high. Both counter clock frequencies
are divided by 3 by the prescaler compared to CK_INT (fCK_CNT = fCK_INT /3).
Configure
Timer 1 in master mode to send its Output Compare Reference (OC1REF) signal as trigger
output: Write TIM_MMS = 100 in the TIM1_CR2 register.
Configure the Timer 1 OC1REF waveform (TIM1_CCMR1 register).
Configure Timer 2 to get the input trigger from Timer 1: Write TIM_TS = 000 in the TIM2_SMCR register.
Configure Timer 2 in gated mode: Write TIM_SMS = 101 in the TIM2_SMCR register.
Enable Timer 2: Write 1 in the TIM_CEN bit in the TIM2_CR1 register.
Start Timer 1: Write 1 in the TIM_CEN bit in the TIM1_CR1 register.
Note: The counter 2 clock is not synchronized with counter 1, this mode only affects the Timer 2 counter enable signal.
Figure 9.32. Gating Timer 2 with OC1REF of Timer 1
In the example in Figure 9.32, the Timer 2 counter and prescaler are not initialized before being started. So they
start counting from their current value. It is possible to start from a given value by resetting both timers before
starting Timer 1, then writing the desired value in the timer counters. The timers can easily be reset by software
using the TIM_UG bit in the TIMx_EGR registers.
The next example, shown in Figure 9.33, synchronizes Timer 1 and Timer 2. Timer 1 is the master and starts from
0. Timer 2 is the slave and starts from 0xE7. The prescaler ratio is the same for both timers. Timer 2 stops when
Timer 1 is disabled by writing 0 to the TIM_CEN bit in the TIM1_CR1 register:
Configure
Timer 1 in master mode to send its Output Compare Reference (OC1REF) signal as trigger
output: Write TIM_MMS = 100 in the TIM1_CR2 register)
Configure the Timer 1 OC1REF waveform (TIM1_CCMR1 register).
Configure Timer 2 to get the input trigger from Timer 1: Write TIM_TS = 000 in the TIM2_SMCR register.
Configure Timer 2 in gated mode: Write TIM_SMS = 101 in the TIM2_SMCR register.
Reset Timer 1: Write 1 in the TIM_UG bit (TIM1_EGR register.
Reset Timer 2 by writing 1 in the TIM_UG bit (TIM2_EGR register).
Initialize Timer 2 to 0xE7: Write 0xE7 in the Timer 2 counter (TIM2_CNTL).
Enable Timer 2: Write 1 in the TIM_CEN bit in the TIM2_CR1 register.
Start Timer 1: Write 1 in the TIM_CEN bit in the TIM1_CR1 register.
Stop Timer 1: Write 0 in the TIM_CEN bit in the TIM1_CR1 register.
Rev 1.0
139
EM341
Figure 9.33. Gating Timer 2 with Enable of Timer 1
9.3.14.3. Using One Timer to Start the Other Timer
In this example (see Figure 9.34), the enable of Timer 2 is set with the UEV of Timer 1. Timer 2 starts counting from
its current value (which can be non-zero) on the divided internal clock as soon as Timer 1 generates the UEV.
When Timer 2 receives the trigger signal its TIM_CEN bit is automatically set and the counter counts until 0 is
written to the TIM_CEN bit in the TIM2_CR1 register. Both counter clock frequencies are divided by 3 by the
prescaler compared to CK_INT (fCK_CNT = fCK_INT/3).
Configure
Timer 1 in master mode to send its UEV as trigger output: WriteTIM_MMS = 010 in the
TIM1_CR2 register.
Configure the Timer 1 period (TIM1_ARR register).
Configure Timer 2 to get the input trigger from Timer 1: Write TIM_TS = 000 in the TIM2_SMCR register.
Configure Timer 2 in trigger mode. Write TIM_SMS = 110 in the TIM2_SMCR register.
Start Timer 1: Write 1 in the TIM_CEN bit in theTIM1_CR1 register.
Figure 9.34. Triggering Timer 2 with Update of Timer 1
As in the previous example, both counters can be initialized before starting counting. Figure 9.35 shows the
behavior with the same configuration shown in Figure 9.34, but in trigger mode instead of gated mode
(TIM_SMS = 110 in the TIM2_SMCR register).
140
Rev 1.0
EM341
Figure 9.35. Triggering Timer 2 with Enable of Timer 1
9.3.14.4. Starting both Timers Synchronously in Response to an External Trigger
This example sets the enable of Timer 1 when its TI1 input rises, and the enable of Timer 2 with the enable of Timer
1. To ensure the counters are aligned, Timer 1 must be configured in master/slave mode (slave with respect to TI1,
master with respect to Timer 2):
Configure
Timer 1 in master mode to send its Enable as trigger output: Write TIM_MMS = 001 in the
TIM1_CR2 register.
Configure Timer 1 slave mode to get the input trigger from TI1: Write TIM_TS = 100 in the TIM1_SMCR
register.
Configure Timer 1 in trigger mode: Write TIM_SMS = 110 in the TIM1_SMCR register.
Configure the Timer 1 in master/slave mode: Write TIM_MSM = 1 in the TIM1_SMCR register.
Configure Timer 2 to get the input trigger from Timer 1: Write TIM_TS = 000 in the TIM2_SMCR register.
Configure Timer 2 in trigger mode: Write TIM_SMS = 110 in the TIM2_SMCR register.
When a rising edge occurs on TI1 (Timer 1), both counters start counting synchronously on the internal clock and
both timers’ INT_TIMTIF flags are set. Figure 9.36 shows this in operation.
Note: In this example both timers are initialized before starting by setting their respective TIM_UG bits. Both counters starts
from 0, but an offset can be inserted between them by writing any of the counter registers (TIMx_CNT). The master/
slave mode inserts a delay between CNT_EN and CK_PSC on Timer 1.
Rev 1.0
141
EM341
Figure 9.36. Triggering Timer 1 and 2 with Timer 1 TI1 Input
9.3.15. Timer Signal Descriptions
Table 9.4. Timer Signal Descriptions
Signal
Internal/
External
CK_INT
Internal
Internal clock source: connects to EM341 peripheral clock (PCLK) in internal clock mode.
CK_PSC
Internal
Input to the clock prescaler.
ETR
Internal
External trigger input (used in external timer mode 2): a clock selected by TIM_EXTRIGSEL in
TIMx_OR.
ETRF
Internal
External trigger: ETRP after filtering.
ETRP
Internal
External trigger: ETR after polarity selection, edge detection and prescaling.
ICy
External
Input capture or clock: TIy after filtering and edge detection.
ICyPS
Internal
Input capture signal after filtering, edge detection and prescaling: input to the capture register.
ITR0
Internal
Internal trigger input: connected to the other timer’s output, TRGO.
OCy
External
Output compare: TIMxCy when used as an output. Same as OCyREF but includes possible
polarity inversion.
OCyREF
Internal
Output compare reference: always active high, but may be inverted to produce OCy.
PCLK
External
Peripheral clock connects to CK_INT and used to clock input filtering. Its frequency is 12 MHz
if using the 24 MHz crystal oscillator and 6 MHz if using the 12 MHz RC oscillator.
TIy
Internal
Timer input: TIMxCy when used as a timer input.
TIyFPy
Internal
Timer input after filtering and polarity selection.
TIMxCy
Internal
Timer channel at a GPIO pin: can be a capture input (ICy) or a compare output (OCy).
TIMxCLK
External
Clock input (if selected) to the external trigger signal (ETR).
TIMxMSK
External
Clock mask (if enabled) AND’ed with the other timer’s TIMxCLK signal.
TRGI
Internal
Trigger input for slave mode controller.
142
Description
Rev 1.0
EM341
9.4. Interrupts
Each timer has its own top-level NVIC interrupt. Writing 1 to the INT_TIMx bit in the INT_CFGSET register enables
the TIMx interrupt, and writing 1 to the INT_TIMx bit in the INT_CFGCLR register disables it. "9. Interrupt System"
on page 100 describes the interrupt system in detail.
Several kinds of timer events can generate a timer interrupt, and each has a status flag in the INT_TIMxFLAG
register to identify the reason(s) for the interrupt:
INT_TIMTIF
– set by a rising edge on an external trigger, either edge in gated mode
INT_TIMCCRyIF – set by a channel y input capture or output compare event
INT_TIMUIF – set by a UEV
Clear bits in INT_TIMxFLAG by writing a 1 to their bit position. When a channel is in capture mode, reading the
TIMx_CCRy register will also clear the INT_TIMCCRyIF bit.
The INT_TIMxCFG register controls whether or not the INT_TIMxFLAG bits actually request a top-level NVIC timer
interrupt. Only the events whose bits are set to 1 in INT_TIMxCFG can do so.
If an input capture or output compare event occurs and its INT_TIMMISSCCyIF is already set, the corresponding
capture/compare missed flag is set in the INT_TMRxMISS register. Clear a bit in the INT_TMRxMISS register by
writing a 1 to it.
Rev 1.0
143
EM341
9.5. Registers
Note: Substitute “1” or “2” for “x” in the following detailed descriptions.
Register 9.1. TIMx_CR1
TIM1_CR1: Timer 1 Control Register 1
TIM2_CR1: Timer 2 Control Register 1
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
TIM_ARBE
TIM_DIR
TIM_OPM
TIM_URS
TIM_UDIS
TIM_CEN
TIM_CMS
TIM1_CR1: Address: 0x4000E000 Reset: 0x0
TIM2_CR1: Address: 0x4000F000 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
TIM_ARBE
[7]
RW
Auto-Reload Buffer Enable.
0: TIMx_ARR register is not buffered.
1: TIMx_ARR register is buffered.
TIM_CMS
[6:5]
RW
Center-aligned Mode Selection.
00: Edge-aligned mode. The counter counts up or down depending on the direction bit
(TIM_DIR).
01: Center-aligned mode 1. The counter counts up and down alternatively.
Output compare interrupt flags of configured output channels (TIM_CCyS=00 in TIMx_CCMRy register) are set only when the counter is counting down.
10: Center-aligned mode 2. The counter counts up and down alternatively.
Output compare interrupt flags of configured output channels (TIM_CCyS=00 in TIMx_CCMRy register) are set only when the counter is counting up.
11: Center-aligned mode 3. The counter counts up and down alternatively.
Output compare interrupt flags of configured output channels (TIM_CCyS=00 in TIMx_CCMRy register) are set both when the counter is counting up or down.
Note: Software may not switch from edge-aligned mode to center-aligned mode when
the counter is enabled (TIM_CEN = 1).
TIM_DIR
[4]
RW
Direction.
0: Counter used as up-counter.
1: Counter used as down-counter.
TIM_OPM
[3]
RW
One Pulse Mode.
0: Counter does not stop counting at the next UEV.
1: Counter stops counting at the next UEV (and clears the bit TIM_CEN).
144
Rev 1.0
EM341
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
TIM_URS
[2]
RW
Update Request Source.
0: When enabled, update interrupt requests are sent as soon as registers are updated
(counter overflow/underflow, setting the TIM_UG bit, or update generation through the
slave mode controller).
1: When enabled, update interrupt requests are sent only when the counter reaches overflow or underflow.
TIM_UDIS
[1]
RW
Update Disable.
0: A UEV is generated as soon as a counter overflow occurs, a software update is generated, or a hardware reset is generated by the slave mode controller. Shadow registers
are then loaded with their buffer register values.
1: A UEV is not generated and shadow registers keep their value (TIMx_ARR, TIMx_PSC, TIMx_CCRy). The counter and the prescaler are reinitialized if the TIM_UG bit is
set or if a hardware reset is received from the slave mode controller.
TIM_CEN
[0]
RW
Counter Enable.
0: Counter disabled.
1: Counter enabled.
Note: External clock, gated mode and encoder mode can work only if the TIM_CEN bit
has been previously set by software. Trigger mode sets the TIM_CEN bit automatically
through hardware.
Rev 1.0
145
EM341
Register 9.2. TIMx_CR2
TIM1_CR2: Timer 1 Control Register 2
TIM2_CR2: Timer 2 Control Register 2
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
TIM_TI1S
0
0
0
0
TIM_MMS
TIM1_CR2: Address: 0x4000E004 Reset: 0x0
TIM2_CR2: Address: 0x4000F004 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
TIM_TI1S
[7]
RW
TI1 Selection.
0: TI1M (input of the digital filter) is connected to TI1 input.
1: TI1M is connected to the TI_HALL inputs (XOR combination).
TIM_MMS
[6:4]
RW
Master Mode Selection.
This selects the information to be sent in master mode to a slave timer for synchronization using the trigger output (TRGO).
000: Reset - the TIM_UG bit in the TMRx_EGR register is trigger output.
If the reset is generated by the trigger input (slave mode controller configured in
reset mode), then the signal on TRGO is delayed compared to the actual reset.
001: Enable - counter enable signal CNT_EN is trigger output.
This mode is used to start both timers at the same time or to control a window in
which a slave timer is enabled. The counter enable signal is generated by
either the TIM_CEN control bit or the trigger input when configured in gated
mode. When the counter enable signal is controlled by the trigger input there is
a delay on TRGO except if the master/slave mode is selected (see the
TIM_MSM bit description in TMRx_SMCR register).
010: Update - UEV is trigger output.
This mode allows a master timer to be a prescaler for a slave timer.
011: Compare Pulse.
The trigger output sends a positive pulse when the TIM_CC1IF flag is to be set
(even if it was already high) as soon as a capture or a compare match occurs.
100: Compare - OC1REF signal is trigger output.
101: Compare - OC2REF signal is trigger output.
110: Compare - OC3REF signal is trigger output.
111: Compare - OC4REF signal is trigger output.
146
Description
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 9.3. TIMx_SMCR
TIM1_SMCR: Timer 1 Slave Mode Control Register
TIM2_SMCR: Timer 2 Slave Mode Control Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
TIM_ETP
TIM_ECE
Bit
7
6
1
0
Name
TIM_MSM
TIM_ETPS
5
TIM_ETF
4
TIM_TS
3
2
0
TIM_SMS
TIM1_SMCR: Address: 0x4000E008 Reset: 0x0
TIM2_SMCR: Address: 0x4000F008 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
TIM_ETP
[15]
RW
External Trigger Polarity.
This bit selects whether ETR or the inverse of ETR is used for trigger operations.
0: ETR is non-inverted, active at a high level or rising edge.
1: ETR is inverted, active at a low level or falling edge.
TIM_ECE
[14]
RW
External Clock Enable.
This bit enables external clock mode 2.
0: External clock mode 2 disabled.
1: External clock mode 2 enabled. The counter is clocked by any active edge
on the ETRF signal.
Notes:
1. Setting the TIM_ECE bit has the same effect as selecting external clock mode
1 with TRGI connected to ETRF (TIM_SMS=111 and TIM_TS=111).
2. It is possible to use this mode simultaneously with the following slave modes:
reset mode, gated mode and trigger mode. TRGI must not be connected to
ETRF in this case (the TIM_TS bits must not be 111).
3. If external clock mode 1 and external clock mode 2 are enabled at the same
time, the external clock input will be ETRF.
TIM_ETPS
[13:12]
RW
External Trigger Prescaler.
External trigger signal ETRP frequency must be at most 1/4 of CK frequency.
A prescaler can be enabled to reduce ETRP frequency. It is useful with fast
external clocks.
00: ETRP prescaler off.
01: Divide ETRP frequency by 2.
10: Divide ETRP frequency by 4.
11: Divide ETRP frequency by 8.
Rev 1.0
147
EM341
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
TIM_ETF
[11:8]
RW
External Trigger Filter.
This defines the frequency used to sample the ETRP signal, Fsampling, and
the length of the digital filter applied to ETRP. The digital filter is made of an
event counter in which N events are needed to validate a transition on the
output:
0000: Fsampling = PCLK, no filtering.
0001: Fsampling = PCLK, N = 2.
0010: Fsampling = PCLK, N = 4.
0011: Fsampling = PCLK, N = 8.
0100: Fsampling = PCLK/2, N = 6.
0101: Fsampling = PCLK/2, N = 8.
0110: Fsampling = PCLK/4, N = 6.
0111: Fsampling = PCLK/4, N = 8.
1000: Fsampling = PCLK/8, N = 6.
1001: Fsampling = PCLK/8, N = 8.
1010: Fsampling = PCLK/16, N = 5.
1011: Fsampling = PCLK/16, N = 6.
1100: Fsampling = PCLK/16, N = 8.
1101: Fsampling = PCLK/32, N = 5.
1110: Fsampling = PCLK/32, N = 6.
1111: Fsampling = PCLK/32, N = 8.
Note: PCLK is 12 MHz when the EM341 is using the 24 MHz crystal oscillator, and
6 MHz if using the 12 MHz RC oscillator.
TIM_MSM
[7]
RW
Master/Slave Mode.
0: No action.
1: The effect of an event on the trigger input (TRGI) is delayed to allow exact
synchronization between the current timer and the slave (through TRGO). It is
useful for synchronizing timers on a single external event.
TIM_TS
[6:4]
RW
Trigger Selection.
This bit field selects the trigger input used to synchronize the counter.
000 : Internal Trigger 0 (ITR0).
100 : TI1 Edge Detector (TI1F_ED).
101 : Filtered Timer Input 1 (TI1FP1).
110 : Filtered Timer Input 2 (TI2FP2).
111 : External Trigger input (ETRF).
Note: These bits must be changed only when they are not used (when
TIM_SMS = 000) to avoid detecting spurious edges during the transition.
148
Rev 1.0
EM341
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
TIM_SMS
[2:0]
RW
Slave Mode Selection.
When external signals are selected the active edge of the trigger signal
(TRGI) is linked to the polarity selected on the external input.
000: Slave mode disabled.
If TIM_CEN = 1 then the prescaler is clocked directly by the internal clock.
001: Encoder mode 1. Counter counts up/down on TI1FP1 edge depending
on TI2FP2 level.
010: Encoder mode 2. Counter counts up/down on TI2FP2 edge depending
on TI1FP1 level.
011: Encoder mode 3. Counter counts up/down on both TI1FP1 and TI2FP2
edges depending on the level of the other input.
100: Reset Mode. Rising edge of the selected trigger signal (TRGI) >reinitializes the counter and generates an update of the registers.
101: Gated Mode. The counter clock is enabled when the trigger signal
(TRGI) is high. The counter stops (but is not reset) as soon as the trigger
becomes low. Both starting and stopping the counter are controlled.
110: Trigger Mode. The counter starts at a rising edge of the trigger TRGI (but
it is not reset). Only starting the counter is controlled.
111: External Clock Mode 1. Rising edges of the selected trigger (TRGI) clock
the counter.
Note: Gated mode must not be used if TI1F_ED is selected as the trigger input
(TIM_TS = 100). TI1F_ED outputs 1 pulse for each transition on TI1F, whereas
gated mode checks the level of the trigger signal.
Rev 1.0
149
EM341
Register 9.4. TIMx_EGR
TIM1_EGR: Timer 1 Event Generation Register
TIM2_EGR: Timer 2 Event Generation Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
TIM_TG
0
TIM_CC1G
TIM_UG
TIM_CC4G TIM_CC3G TIM_CC2G
TIM1_EGR: Address: 0x4000E014 Reset: 0x0
TIM2_EGR: Address: 0x4000F014 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield Access
Description
TIM_TG
[6]
W
Trigger Generation.
0: Does nothing.
1: Sets the TIM_TIF flag in the INT_TIMxFLAG register.
TIM_CC4G
[4]
W
Capture/Compare 4 Generation.
0: Does nothing.
1: If CC4 configured as output channel:
The TIM_CC4IF flag is set.
If CC4 configured as input channel:
The TIM_CC4IF flag is set.
The INT_TIMMISSCC4IF flag is set if the TIM_CC4IF flag was already high.
The current value of the counter is captured in TMRx_CCR4 register.
TIM_CC3G
[3]
W
Capture/Compare 3 Generation.
0: Does nothing.
1: If CC3 configured as output channel:
The TIM_CC3IF flag is set.
If CC3 configured as input channel:
The TIM_CC3IF flag is set.
The INT_TIMMISSCC3IF flag is set if the TIM_CC3IF flag was already high.
The current value of the counter is captured in TMRx_CCR3 register.
150
Rev 1.0
EM341
Bitname
Bitfield Access
Description
TIM_CC2G
[2]
W
Capture/Compare 2 Generation.
0: Does nothing.
1: If CC2 configured as output channel:
The TIM_CC2IF flag is set.
If CC2 configured as input channel:
The TIM_CC2IF flag is set.
The INT_TIMMISSCC2IF flag is set if the TIM_CC2IF flag was already high.
The current value of the counter is captured in TMRx_CCR2 register.
TIM_CC1G
[1]
W
Capture/Compare 1 Generation.
0: Does nothing.
1: If CC1 configured as output channel:
The TIM_CC1IF flag is set.
If CC1 configured as input channel:
The TIM_CC1IF flag is set.
The INT_TIMMISSCC1IF flag is set if the TIM_CC1IF flag was already high.
The current value of the counter is captured in TMRx_CCR1 register.
TIM_UG
[0]
W
Update Generation.
0: Does nothing.
1: Re-initializes the counter and generates an update of the registers. This also
clears the prescaler counter but the prescaler ratio is not affected. The counter is
cleared if center-aligned mode is selected or if TIM_DIR=0 (up-counting), otherwise it takes the auto-reload value (TMR1_ARR) if TIM_DIR=1 (down-counting).
Rev 1.0
151
EM341
Register 9.5. TIMx_CCMR1
TIM1_CCMR1: Timer 1 Capture/Compare Mode Register 1
TIM2_CCMR1: Timer 2 Capture/Compare Mode Register 1
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
TIM_OC2BE
TIM_OC2FE
TIM_OC2M
TIM_IC2F
Bit
7
Name
0
6
5
TIM_CC2S
TIM_IC2PSC
4
TIM_OC1M
TIM_IC1F
3
2
TIM_OC1BE
TIM_OC1FE
1
0
TIM_CC1S
TIM_IC1PSC
TIM1_CCMR1: Address: 0x4000E018 Reset: 0x0
TIM2_CCMR1: Address: 0x4000F018 Reset: 0x0
Timer channels can be programmed as inputs (capture mode) or outputs (compare mode). The direction of
channel y is defined by TIM_CCyS in this register.
The other bits in this register have different functions in input and in output modes. The TIM_OC* fields only apply
to a channel configured as an output (TIM_CCyS = 0), and the TIM_IC* fields only apply to a channel configured
as an input (TIM_CCyS > 0).
152
Rev 1.0
EM341
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
TIM_OC2M
[14:12]
RW
Output Compare 2 Mode. (Applies only if TIM_CC2S = 0.)
Define the behavior of the output reference signal OC2REF from which
OC2 derives. OC2REF is active high whereas OC2''s active level depends
on the TIM_CC2P bit.
000: Frozen - The comparison between the output compare register TIMx_CCR2 and the counter TIMx_CNT has no effect on the outputs.
001: Set OC2REF to active on match. The OC2REF signal is forced high
when the counter TIMx_CNT matches the capture/compare register 2
(TIMx_CCR2)
010: Set OC2REF to inactive on match. OC2REF signal is forced low
when the counter TIMx_CNT matches the capture/compare register 2
(TIMx_CCR2).
011: Toggle - OC2REF toggles when TIMx_CNT = TIMx_CCR2.
100: Force OC2REF inactive.
101: Force OC2REF active.
110: PWM mode 1 - In up-counting, OC2REF is active as long as
TIMx_CNT < TIMx_CCR2, otherwise OC2REF is inactive. In down-counting, OC2REF is inactive if TIMx_CNT > TIMx_CCR2, otherwise OC2REF
is active.
111: PWM mode 2 - In up-counting, OC2REF is inactive if
TIMx_CNT < TIMx_CCR2, otherwise OC2REF is active. In down-counting, OC2REF is active if TIMx_CNT > TIMx_CCR2, otherwise it is inactive.
Note: In PWM mode 1 or 2, the OC2REF level changes only when the result of
the comparison changes or when the output compare mode switches from
“frozen” mode to “PWM” mode.
TIM_OC2BE
[11]
RW
Output Compare 2 Buffer Enable. (Applies only if TIM_CC2S = 0.)
0: Buffer register for TIMx_CCR2 is disabled. TIMx_CCR2 can be written
at anytime, the new value is used by the shadow register immediately.
1: Buffer register for TIMx_CCR2 is enabled. Read/write operations
access the buffer register. TIMx_CCR2 buffer value is loaded in the
shadow register at each UEV.
Note: The PWM mode can be used without enabling the buffer register only in
one pulse mode (TIM_OPM bit set in the TIMx_CR2 register), otherwise the
behavior is undefined.
TIM_OC2FE
[10]
RW
Output Compare 2 Fast Enable. (Applies only if TIM_CC2S = 0.)
This bit speeds the effect of an event on the trigger in input on the OC2
output.
0: OC2 behaves normally depending on the counter and TIM_CCR2 values even when the trigger is ON. The minimum delay to activate OC2
when an edge occurs on the trigger input is 5 clock cycles.
1: An active edge on the trigger input acts like a compare match on the
OC2 output. OC2 is set to the compare level independently from the result
of the comparison. Delay to sample the trigger input and to activate OC2
output is reduced to 3 clock cycles. TIM_OC2FE acts only if the channel is
configured in PWM 1 or PWM 2 mode.
Rev 1.0
153
EM341
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
TIM_IC2F
[15:12]
RW
Input Capture 1 Filter. (Applies only if TIM_CC2S > 0.)
This defines the frequency used to sample the TI2 input, Fsampling, and
the length of the digital filter applied to TI2. The digital filter requires N consecutive samples in the same state before being output.
0000: Fsampling = PCLK, no filtering.
0001: Fsampling = PCLK, N = 2.
0010: Fsampling = PCLK, N = 4.
0011: Fsampling = PCLK, N = 8.
0100: Fsampling = PCLK/2, N = 6.
0101: Fsampling = PCLK/2, N = 8.
0110: Fsampling = PCLK/4, N = 6.
0111: Fsampling = PCLK/4, N = 8.
1000: Fsampling = PCLK/8, N = 6.
1001: Fsampling = PCLK/8, N = 8.
1010: Fsampling = PCLK/16, N = 5.
1011: Fsampling = PCLK/16, N = 6.
1100: Fsampling = PCLK/16, N = 8.
1101: Fsampling = PCLK/32, N = 5.
1110: Fsampling = PCLK/32, N = 6.
1111: Fsampling = PCLK/32, N = 8.
Note: PCLK is 12 MHz when using the 24 MHz crystal oscillator, and 6 MHz using
the 12 MHz RC oscillator.
TIM_IC2PSC
[11:10]
RW
Input Capture 1 Prescaler. (Applies only if TIM_CC2S > 0.)
00: No prescaling, capture each time an edge is detected on the capture
input.
01: Capture once every 2 events.
10: Capture once every 4 events.
11: Capture once every 8 events.
TIM_CC2S
[9:8]
RW
Capture / Compare 2 Selection.
This configures the channel as an output or an input. If an input, it selects
the input source.
00: Channel is an output.
01: Channel is an input and is mapped to TI2.
10: Channel is an input and is mapped to TI1.
11: Channel is an input and is mapped to TRGI. This mode requires an
internal trigger input selected by the TIM_TS bit in the TIMx_SMCR register.
Note: TIM_CC2S may be written only when the channel is off (TIM_CC2E = 0 in
the TIMx_CCER register).
154
TIM_OC1M
[6:4]
RW
Output Compare 1 Mode. (Applies only if TIM_CC1S = 0.)
See TIM_OC2M description above.
TIM_OC1BE
[3
RW
Output Compare 1 Buffer Enable. (Applies only if TIM_CC1S = 0.)
See TIM_OC2BE description above.
TIM_OC1FE
[2]
RW
Output Compare 1 Fast Enable. (Applies only if TIM_CC1S = 0.)
See TIM_OC2FE description above.
Rev 1.0
EM341
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
TIM_IC1F
[7:4]
RW
Input Capture 1 Filter. (Applies only if TIM_CC1S > 0.)
See TIM_IC2F description above.
TIM_IC1PSC
[3:2]
RW
Input Capture 1 Prescaler. (Applies only if TIM_CC1S > 0.)
See TIM_IC2PSC description above.
TIM_CC1S
[1:0]
RW
Capture / Compare 1 Selection.
This configures the channel as an output or an input. If an input, it selects
the input source.
00: Channel is an output.
01: Channel is an input and is mapped to TI1.
10: Channel is an input and is mapped to TI2.
11: Channel is an input and is mapped to TRGI. This requires an internal
trigger input selected by the TIM_TS bit in the TIM_SMCR register.
Note: TIM_CC1S may be written only when the channel is off (TIM_CC1E = 0 in
the TIMx_CCER register).
Rev 1.0
155
EM341
Register 9.6. TIMx_CCMR2
TIM1_CCMR2: Timer 1 Capture/Compare Mode Register 2
TIM2_CCMR2: Timer 2 Capture/Compare Mode Register 2
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
TIM_OC4BE
TIM_OC4FE
TIM_OC4M
TIM_IC4F
Bit
7
Name
0
6
TIM_CC4S
TIM_IC4PSC
5
4
TIM_OC3M
3
2
TIM_OC3BE
TIM_OC3FE
TIM_IC3F
1
0
TIM_CC3S
TIM_IC3PSC
TIM1_CCMR2: Address: 0x4000E01C Reset: 0x0
TIM2_CCMR2: Address: 0x4000F01C Reset: 0x0
Timer channels can be programmed as inputs (capture mode) or outputs (compare mode). The direction of
channel y is defined by TIM_CCyS in this register.
The other bits in this register have different functions in input and in output modes. The TIM_OC* fields only
apply to a channel configured as an output (TIM_CCyS = 0), and the TIM_IC* fields only apply to a channel
configured as an input (TIM_CCyS > 0).
156
Rev 1.0
EM341
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
TIM_OC4M
[14:12]
RW
Output Compare 4 Mode. (Applies only if TIM_CC4S = 0.)
Define the behavior of the output reference signal OC4REF from which
OC4 derives. OC4REF is active high whereas OC4’s active level depends
on the TIM_CC4P bit.
000: Frozen - The comparison between the output compare register TIMx_CCR4 and the counter TIMx_CNT has no effect on the outputs.
001: Set OC4REF to active on match. The OC4REF signal is forced high
when the counter TIMx_CNT matches the capture/compare register 4
(TIMx_CCR4)
010: Set OC4REF to inactive on match. OC4REF signal is forced low
when the counter TIMx_CNT matches the capture/compare register 4
(TIMx_CCR4).
011: Toggle - OC4REF toggles when TIMx_CNT = TIMx_CCR4.
100: Force OC4REF inactive.
101: Force OC4REF active.
110: PWM mode 1 - In up-counting, OC4REF is active as long as
TIMx_CNT < TIMx_CCR4, otherwise OC4REF is inactive. In down-counting, OC4REF is inactive if TIMx_CNT > TIMx_CCR4, otherwise OC4REF
is active.
111: PWM mode 2 - In up-counting, OC4REF is inactive if
TIMx_CNT < TIMx_CCR4, otherwise OC4REF is active. In down-counting, OC4REF is active if TIMx_CNT > TIMx_CCR4, otherwise it is inactive.
Note: In PWM mode 1 or 2, the OC4REF level changes only when the result of
the comparison changes or when the output compare mode switches from
“frozen” mode to “PWM” mode.
TIM_OC4BE
[11]
RW
Output Compare 4 Buffer Enable. (Applies only if TIM_CC4S = 0.)
0: Buffer register for TIMx_CCR4 is disabled. TIMx_CCR4 can be written
at anytime, the new value is used by the shadow register immediately.
1: Buffer register for TIMx_CCR4 is enabled. Read/write operations
access the buffer register. TIMx_CCR4 buffer value is loaded in the
shadow register at each UEV.
Note: The PWM mode can be used without enabling the buffer register only in
one pulse mode (TIM_OPM bit set in the TIMx_CR2 register), otherwise
the behavior is undefined.
TIM_OC4FE
[10]
RW
Output Compare 4 Fast Enable. (Applies only if TIM_CC4S = 0.)
This bit speeds the effect of an event on the trigger in input on the OC4
output.
0: OC4 behaves normally depending on the counter and TIM_CCR4 values even when the trigger is ON. The minimum delay to activate OC4
when an edge occurs on the trigger input is 5 clock cycles.
1: An active edge on the trigger input acts like a compare match on the
OC4 output. OC4 is set to the compare level independently from the result
of the comparison. Delay to sample the trigger input and to activate OC4
output is reduced to 3 clock cycles. TIM_OC4FE acts only if the channel is
configured in PWM 1 or PWM 2 mode.
Rev 1.0
157
EM341
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
TIM_IC4F
[15:12]
RW
Input Capture 4 Filter. (Applies only if TIM_CC4S > 0.)
This defines the frequency used to sample the TI4 input, Fsampling, and
the length of the digital filter applied to TI4. The digital filter requires N
consecutive samples in the same state before being output.
0000: Fsampling = PCLK, no filtering.
0001: Fsampling = PCLK, N = 2.
0010: Fsampling = PCLK, N = 4.
0011: Fsampling = PCLK, N = 8.
0100: Fsampling = PCLK/2, N = 6.
0101: Fsampling = PCLK/2, N = 8.
0110: Fsampling = PCLK/4, N = 6.
0111: Fsampling = PCLK/4, N = 8.
1000: Fsampling = PCLK/8, N = 6.
1001: Fsampling = PCLK/8, N = 8.
1010: Fsampling = PCLK/16, N = 5.
1011: Fsampling = PCLK/16, N = 6.
1100: Fsampling = PCLK/16, N = 8.
1101: Fsampling = PCLK/32, N = 5.
1110: Fsampling = PCLK/32, N = 6.
1111: Fsampling = PCLK/32, N = 8.
Note: PCLK is 12 MHz when using the 24 MHz crystal oscillator, and 6 MHz
using the 12 MHz RC oscillator.
TIM_IC4PSC
[11:10]
RW
Input Capture 4 Prescaler. (Applies only if TIM_CC4S > 0.)
00: No prescaling, capture each time an edge is detected on the capture
input.
01: Capture once every 2 events.
10: Capture once every 4 events.
11: Capture once every 8 events.
TIM_CC4S
[9:8]
RW
Capture / Compare 4 Selection.
This configures the channel as an output or an input. If an input, it selects
the input source.
00: Channel is an output.
01: Channel is an input and is mapped to TI4.
10: Channel is an input and is mapped to TI3.
11: Channel is an input and is mapped to TRGI. This mode requires an
internal trigger input selected by the TIM_TS bit in the TIMx_SMCR register.
Note: TIM_CC4S may be written only when the channel is off (TIM_CC4E = 0 in
the TIMx_CCER register).
TIM_OC3M
[6:4]
RW
Output Compare 3 Mode. (Applies only if TIM_CC3S = 0.)
See TIM_OC4M description above.
TIM_OC3BE
[3
RW
Output Compare 3 Buffer Enable. (Applies only if TIM_CC3S = 0.)
See TIM_OC4BE description above.
TIM_OC3FE
[2]
RW
Output Compare 3 Fast Enable. (Applies only if TIM_CC3S = 0.)
See TIM_OC4FE description above.
158
Rev 1.0
EM341
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
TIM_IC3F
[7:4]
RW
Input Capture 3 Filter. (Applies only if TIM_CC3S > 0.)
See TIM_IC4F description above.
TIM_IC3PSC
[3:2]
RW
Input Capture 3 Prescaler. (Applies only if TIM_CC3S > 0.)
See TIM_IC4PSC description above.
TIM_CC3S
[1:0]
RW
Capture / Compare 3 Selection.
This configures the channel as an output or an input. If an input, it selects
the input source.
00: Channel is an output.
01: Channel is an input and is mapped to TI3.
10: Channel is an input and is mapped to TI4.
11: Channel is an input and is mapped to TRGI. This requires an internal
trigger input selected by the TIM_TS bit in the TIM_SMCR register.
Note: TIM_CC3S may be written only when the channel is off (TIM_CC3E = 0 in
the TIMx_CCER register).
Rev 1.0
159
EM341
Register 9.7. TIMx_CCER
TIM1_CCER: Timer 1 Capture/Compare Enable Register
TIM2_CCER: Timer 2 Capture/Compare Enable Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
3
2
Name
0
0
0
0
TIM_CC4P TIM_CC4E
5
4
TIM_CC2P TIM_CC2E
TIM_CC3P TIM_CC3E
1
0
TIM_CC1P TIM_CC1E
TIM1_CCER: Address: 0x4000E020 Reset: 0x0
TIM2_CCER: Address: 0x4000F020 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
TIM_CC4P
[13]
RW
Description
Capture/Compare 4 output Polarity.
If CC4 is configured as an output channel:
0: OC4 is active high.
1: OC4 is active low.
If CC4 configured as an input channel:
0: IC4 is not inverted. Capture occurs on a rising edge of IC4. When used as
an external trigger, IC4 is not inverted.
1: IC4 is inverted. Capture occurs on a falling edge of IC4. When used as an
external trigger, IC4 is inverted.
TIM_CC4E
[12]
RW
Capture/Compare 4 output Enable.
If CC4 is configured as an output channel:
0: OC4 is disabled.
1: OC4 is enabled.
If CC4 configured as an input channel:
0: Capture is disabled.
1: Capture is enabled.
TIM_CC3P
[9]
RW
Refer to the CC4P description above.
TIM_CC3E
[8]
RW
Refer to the CC4E description above.
TIM_CC2P
[5]
RW
Refer to the CC4P description above.
TIM_CC2E
[4]
RW
Refer to the CC43 description above.
TIM_CC1P
[1]
RW
Refer to the CC4P description above.
TIM_CC1E
[0]
RW
Refer to the CC4E description above.
160
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 9.8. TIMx_CNT
TIM1_CNT: Timer 1 Counter Register
TIM2_CNT: Timer 2 Counter Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
Name
Bit
TIM_CNT
7
6
5
4
Name
TIM_CNT
TIM1_CNT: Address: 0x4000E024 Reset: 0x0
TIM2_CNT: Address: 0x4000F024 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
TIM_CNT
[15:0]
RW
Description
Counter value.
Register 9.9. TIMx_PSC
TIM1_PSC: Timer 1 Prescaler Register
TIM2_PSC: Timer 2 Prescaler Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
0
0
0
TIM_PSC
TIM1_PSC: Address: 0x4000E028 Reset: 0x0
TIM2_PSC: Address: 0x4000F028 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
TIM_PSC
[3:0]
RW
The prescaler divides the internal timer clock frequency. The counter clock
frequency CK_CNT is equal to fCK_PSC / (2 ^ TIM_PSC). Clock division
factors can range from 1 through 32768. The division factor is loaded into
the shadow prescaler register at each UEV (including when the counter is
cleared through TIM_UG bit of TMR1_EGR register or through the trigger
controller when configured in reset mode).
Rev 1.0
161
EM341
Register 9.10. TIMx_ARR
TIM1_ARR: Timer 1 Auto-Reload Register
TIM2_ARR: Timer 2 Auto-Reload Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
Name
Bit
TIM_ARR
7
6
5
Name
4
TIM_ARR
TIM1_ARR: Address: 0x4000E02C Reset: 0xFFFF
TIM2_ARR: Address: 0x4000F02C Reset: 0xFFFF
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
TIM_ARR
[15:0]
RW
TIM_ARR is the value to be loaded in the shadow auto-reload register.
The auto-reload register is buffered. Writing or reading the auto-reload register accesses the buffer register. The content of the buffer register is transfered in the shadow register permanently or at each UEV, depending on the
auto-reload buffer enable bit (TIM_ARBE) in TMRx_CR1 register. The UEV
is sent when the counter reaches the overflow point (or underflow point
when down-counting) and if the TIM_UDIS bit equals 0 in the TMRx_CR1
register. It can also be generated by software. The counter is blocked while
the auto-reload value is 0.
162
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 9.11. TIMx_CCR1
TIM1_CCR1: Timer 1 Capture/Compare Register 1
TIM2_CCR1: Timer 2 Capture/Compare Register 1
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
Name
Bit
TIM_CCR
7
6
5
Name
4
TIM_CCR
TIM1_CCR1: Address: 0x4000E034 Reset: 0x0
TIM2_CCR1: Address: 0x4000F034 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
TIM_CCR
[15:0]
RW
If the CC1 channel is configured as an output (TIM_CC1S = 0):
TIM_CCR1 is the buffer value to be loaded in the actual capture/compare 1
register. It is loaded permanently if the preload feature is not selected in the
TMR1_CCMR1 register (bit OC1PE). Otherwise the buffer value is copied to
the shadow capture/compare 1 register when an UEV occurs. The active
capture/compare register contains the value to be compared to the counter
TMR1_CNT and signaled on the OC1 output.
If the CC1 channel is configured as an input (TIM_CC1S is not 0):
CCR1 is the counter value transferred by the last input capture 1 event
(IC1).
Rev 1.0
163
EM341
Register 9.12. TIMx_CCR2
TIM1_CCR2: Timer 1 Capture/Compare Register 2
TIM2_CCR2: Timer 2 Capture/Compare Register 2
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
Name
Bit
TIM_CCR
7
6
5
4
Name
TIM_CCR
TIM1_CCR2: Address: 0x4000E038 Reset: 0x0
TIM2_CCR2: Address: 0x4000F038 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
TIM_CCR
[15:0]
RW
Description
See description in the TIMx_CCR1 register.
Register 9.13. TIMx_CCR3
TIM1_CCR3: Timer 1 Capture/Compare Register 3
TIM2_CCR3: Timer 2 Capture/Compare Register 3
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
Name
Bit
TIM_CCR
7
6
5
Name
4
TIM_CCR
TIM1_CCR3: Address: 0x4000E03C Reset: 0x0
TIM2_CCR3: Address: 0x4000F03C Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
TIM_CCR
[15:0]
RW
164
Description
See description in the TIMx_CCR1 register.
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 9.14. TIMx_CCR4
TIM1_CCR4: Timer 1 Capture/Compare Register 4
TIM2_CCR4: Timer 2 Capture/Compare Register 4
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
Name
Bit
TIM_CCR
7
6
5
Name
4
TIM_CCR
TIM1_CCR4: Address: 0x4000E040 Reset: 0x0
TIM2_CCR4: Address: 0x4000F040 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
TIM_CCR
[15:0]
RW
Description
See description in the TIMx_CCR1 register.
Rev 1.0
165
EM341
Register 9.15. TIM1_OR: Timer 1: Option Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
0
0
0
TIM_ORRSVD TIM_CLKMSKEN TIM_EXTRIGSEL
Timer 1: Address: 0x4000E050 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
TIM_ORRSVD
[3]
RW
Reserved: this bit must always be set to 0.
TIM_CLKMSKEN
[2]
RW
Enables TIM1MSK when TIM1CLK is selected as the external trigger:
0 = TIM1MSK not used, 1 = TIM1CLK is ANDed with the TIM1MSK
input.
TIM_EXTRIGSEL
[1:0]
RW
Selects the external trigger used in external clock mode 2: 0 = PCLK,
1 = calibrated 1 kHz clock, 2 = 32 kHz reference clock (if available),
3 = TIM1CLK pin.
166
Description
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 9.16. TIM2_OR: Timer 2 Option Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
TIM_
REMAPC4
TIM_
REMAPC3
TIM_
REMAPC2
TIM_
REMAPC1
TIM_
ORRSVD
TIM_
CLKMSKEN
TIM_
EXTRIGSEL
Address: 0x4000F050 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
TIM_REMAPC4
[7]
RW
Selects the GPIO used for TIM2C4: 0 = PA2, 1 = PB4.
TIM_REMAPC3
[6]
RW
Selects the GPIO used for TIM2C3: 0 = PA1, 1 = PB3.
TIM_REMAPC2
[5]
RW
Selects the GPIO used for TIM2C2: 0 = PA3, 1 = PB2.
TIM_REMAPC1
[4]
RW
Selects the GPIO used for TIM2C1: 0 = PA0, 1 = PB1.
TIM_ORRSVD
[3]
RW
Reserved: this bit must always be set to 0.
TIM_CLKMSKEN
[2]
RW
Enables TIM2MSK when TIM2CLK is selected as the external trigger:
0 = TIM2MSK not used, 1 = TIM2CLK is ANDed with the TIM2MSK input.
TIM_EXTRIGSEL
[1:0]
RW
Selects the external trigger used in external clock mode 2: 0 = PCLK,
1 = calibrated 1 kHz clock, 2 = 32 kHz reference clock (if available),
3 = TIM2CLK pin.
Rev 1.0
167
EM341
Register 9.17. INT_TIMxCFG
INT_TIM1CFG: Timer 1 Interrupt Configuration Register
INT_TIM2CFG: Timer 2 Interrupt Configuration Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
INT_TIMTIF
0
INT_TIMCC4IF INT_TIMCC3IF INT_TIMCC2IF INT_TIMCC1IF
INT_TIM1CFG: Address: 0x4000A840 Reset: 0x0
INT_TIM2CFG: Address: 0x4000A844 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
INT_TIMTIF
[6]
RW
Trigger interrupt enable.
INT_TIMCC4IF
[4]
RW
Capture or compare 4 interrupt enable.
INT_TIMCC3IF
[3]
RW
Capture or compare 3 interrupt enable.
INT_TIMCC2IF
[2]
RW
Capture or compare 2 interrupt enable.
INT_TIMCC1IF
[1]
RW
Capture or compare 1 interrupt enable.
INT_TIMUIF
[0]
RW
Update interrupt enable.
168
Description
Rev 1.0
INT_TIMUIF
EM341
Register 9.18. INT_TIMxFLAG
INT_TIM1FLAG: Timer 1 Interrupt Flag Register
INT_TIM2FLAG: Timer 2 Interrupt Flag Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
Name
0
INT_TIMTIF
0
INT_TIMRSVD
4
3
0
2
1
INT_TIMCC4IF INT_TIMCC3IF INT_TIMCC2IF INT_TIMCC1IF
0
INT_TIMUIF
INT_TIM1FLAG: Address: 0x4000A800 Reset: 0x0
INT_TIM2FLAG: Address: 0x4000A804 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
INT_TIMRSVD
[12:9]
R
INT_TIMTIF
[6]
RW
Trigger interrupt.
INT_TIMCC4IF
[4]
RW
Capture or compare 4 interrupt pending.
INT_TIMCC3IF
[3]
RW
Capture or compare 3 interrupt pending.
INT_TIMCC2IF
[2]
RW
Capture or compare 2 interrupt pending.
INT_TIMCC1IF
[1]
RW
Capture or compare 1 interrupt pending.
INT_TIMUIF
[0]
RW
Update interrupt pending.
May change during normal operation.
Rev 1.0
169
EM341
Register 9.19. INT_TIMxMISS
INT_TIM1MISS: Timer 1 Missed Interrupt Register
INT_TIM2MISS: Timer 2 Missed Interrupts Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
INT_
TIMMISSCC4IF
INT_
TIMMISSCC3IF
INT_
TIMMISSCC2IF
INT_
TIMMISSCC1IF
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
INT_TIMMISSRSVD
INT_TIM1MISS: Address: 0x4000A818 Reset: 0x0
INT_TIM2MISS: Address: 0x4000A81C Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
INT_TIMMISSCC4IF
[12]
RW
Capture or compare 4 interrupt missed.
INT_TIMMISSCC3IF
[11]
RW
Capture or compare 3 interrupt missed.
INT_TIMMISSCC2IF
[10]
RW
Capture or compare 2 interrupt missed.
INT_TIMMISSCC1IF
[9]
RW
Capture or compare 1 interrupt missed.
INT_TIMMISSRSVD
[6:0]
R
170
Description
May change during normal operation.
Rev 1.0
EM341
10. ADC (Analog to Digital Converter)
The EM341 ADC is a first-order sigma-delta converter with the following features:
Resolution
of up to 14 bits
times as fast as 5.33 µs (188 kHz)
Differential and single-ended conversions from six external and four internal sources
One voltage range (differential): -VREF to +VREF
Internal VREF may be output to PB0
Digital offset and gain correction
Dedicated DMA channel with one-shot and continuous operating modes
Figure 10.1 shows the basic ADC structure.
Sample
P input
GPIO
VDD_PADSA/2
`
VREF
VREF/2
GND
MUX
Delta
Sigma
ADC
Decimator
Offset and
Gain
Correction
ADC_DATA
register
or DMA
N input
GPIO
VDD_PADSA/2
`
`
VREF
VREF/2
GND
MUX
1MHz
6MHz
Sample clock
Figure 10.1. ADC Block Diagram
While the ADC Module supports both single-ended and differential inputs, the ADC input stage always operates in
differential mode. Single-ended conversions are performed by connecting one of the differential inputs to VREF/2
while fully differential operation uses two external inputs.
Note: The regulator input voltage, VDD_PADS, cannot be measured using the ADC, but it can be measured through Ember
software.
Rev 1.0
171
EM341
10.1. Setup and Configuration
To use the ADC follow this procedure, described in more detail in the next sections:
Configure
any GPIO pins to be used by the ADC in analog mode.
Set the offset and gain values.
If using DMA, reset the ADC DMA, define the DMA buffer, and start the DMA in the proper transfer mode.
If interrupts will be used, configure the top-level and second-level ADC interrupt bits.
Write the ADC configuration register to define the inputs, sample time, and start the conversions.
10.1.1. GPIO Usage
A GPIO pin used by the ADC as an input or voltage reference must be configured in analog mode by writing 0 to its
4-bit field in the proper GPIO_PxCFGH/L register. Note that a GPIO pin in analog mode cannot be used for any
digital functions, and GPIO_PxIN always reads it as 1. Only certain pins can be configured in analog mode. These
are listed in Table 10.1.
Table 10.1. ADC GPIO Pin Usage
Analog Signal
GPIO
Configuration control
ADC0 input
PB5
GPIO_PBCFGH[7:4]
ADC1 input
PB6
GPIO_PBCFGH[11:8]
ADC2 input
PB7
GPIO_PBCFGH[15:12]
ADC3 input
PC1
GPIO_PCCFGL[7:4]
ADC4 input
PA4
GPIO_PACFGH[3:0]
ADC5 input
PA5
GPIO_PACFGH[7:4]
VREF output
PB0
GPIO_PBCFGL[3:0]
See "7. GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output)" on page 48 for more information about how to configure GPIO.
10.1.2. Voltage Reference
The ADC voltage reference (VREF) may optionally be output on PB0. To output the internal VREF on PB0, the
ADC must be enabled (ADC_ENABLE bit set in the ADC_CFG register) and PB0 must be configured in analog
mode.
172
Rev 1.0
EM341
10.1.3. Offset/Gain Correction
When a conversion is complete, the 16-bit converted data is processed in several steps by offset/gain correction
hardware:
1. The initial signed ADC conversion result is added to the 16-bit signed (two's complement) value of the ADC
offset register (ADC_OFFSET).
2. The offset-corrected data is multiplied by the 16-bit ADC gain register, ADC_GAIN, to produce a 16-bit
signed result. If the product is greater than 0x7FFF (32767), or less than 0x8000 (–32768), it is limited to
that value and the INT_ADCSAT bit is set in the INT_ADCFLAG register.
3. The offset/gain corrected value is divided by two to produce the final result.
ADC_GAIN is an unsigned scaled 16-bit value: ADC_GAIN[15] is the integer part of the gain factor and
ADC_GAIN[14:0] is the fractional part. As a result, ADC_GAIN values can represent gain factors from 0 through (2
- 2-15). Although ADC_GAIN can represent a much greater range, its purpose is to correct small gain error, and in
practice is loaded with values within a range of about 0.95 to 1.05.
Reset initializes the offset to zero (ADC_OFFSET = 0) and gain factor to one (ADC_GAIN = 0x8000).
10.1.4. DMA
The ADC DMA channel writes converted data, which incorporates the offset/gain correction, into a DMA buffer in
RAM.
The ADC DMA buffer is defined by two registers:
ADC_DMABEG
is the start address of the buffer and must be even.
specifies the size of the buffer in 16-bit samples, or half its length in bytes.
To prepare the DMA channel for operation, reset it by writing the ADC_DMARST bit in the ADC_DMACFG register,
then start the DMA in either linear or auto wrap mode by setting the ADC_DMALOAD bit in the ADC_DMACFG
register. The ADC_DMAAUTOWRAP bit in the ADC_DMACFG register selects the DMA mode: 0 for linear mode,
1 for auto wrap mode.
ADC_DMASIZE
In
linear mode the DMA writes to the buffer until the number of samples given by ADC_DMASIZE has been
output. The DMA then stops and sets the INT_ADCULDFULL bit in the INT_ADCFLAG register. If another
ADC conversion completes before the DMA is reset or the ADC is disabled, the INT_ADCOVF bit in the
INT_ADCFLAG register is set.
In auto wrap mode the DMA writes to the buffer until it reaches the end, then resets its pointer to the start
of the buffer and continues writing samples. The DMA transfers continue until the ADC is disabled or the
DMA is reset.
When the DMA fills the lower and upper halves of the buffer, it sets the INT_ADCULDHALF and
INT_ADCULDFULL bits, respectively, in the INT_ADCFLAG register. The current location to which the DMA is
writing can also be determined by reading the ADC_DMACUR register.
10.1.5. ADC Configuration Register
The ADC configuration register (ADC_CFG) sets up most of the ADC operating parameters.
10.1.5.1. Input
The analog input of the ADC can be chosen from various sources. The analog input is configured with the
ADC_MUXP and ADC_MUXN bits within the ADC_CFG register. Table 10.2 shows the possible input selections.
Rev 1.0
173
EM341
Table 10.2. ADC Inputs
ADC_MUXn*
Analog Source at ADC
GPIO Pin
Purpose
0
ADC0
PB5
1
ADC1
PB6
2
ADC2
PB7
3
ADC3
PC1
4
ADC4
PA4
5
ADC5
PA5
6
No connection
7
No connection
8
GND
Internal connection
Calibration
9
VREF/2
Internal connection
Calibration
10
VREF
Internal connection
Calibration
11
VDD_PADSA/2
Internal connection
Supply monitoring and calibration
12
No connection
13
No connection
14
No connection
15
No connection
*Note: Denotes bits ADC_MUXP or ADC_MUXN in register ADC_CFG.
Table 10.3 shows the typical configurations of ADC inputs.
Table 10.3. Typical ADC Input Configurations
174
ADC P Input
ADC N Input
ADC_MUXP
ADC_MUXN
Purpose
ADC0
VREF/2
0
9
Single-ended
ADC1
VREF/2
1
9
Single-ended
ADC2
VREF/2
2
9
Single-ended
ADC3
VREF/2
3
9
Single-ended
ADC4
VREF/2
4
9
Single-ended
ADC5
VREF/2
5
9
Single-ended
ADC1
ADC0
1
0
Differential
ADC3
ADC2
3
2
Differential
ADC5
ADC4
5
4
Differential
GND
VREF/2
8
9
Calibration
VREF
VREF/2
10
9
Calibration
VDD_PADSA/2
VREF/2
11
9
Calibration
Rev 1.0
EM341
10.1.5.2. Input Range
The single-ended input range is fixed as 0 V to VREF and the differential input range is fixed as –VREF to +VREF.
10.1.5.3. Sample Time
ADC sample time is programmed by selecting the sampling clock and the clocks per sample.
The
sampling clock may be either 1 MHz or 6 MHz. If the ADC_1MHZCLK bit in the ADC_CFG register is
clear, the 6 MHz clock is used; if it is set, the 1 MHz clock is selected. The 6 MHz sample clock offers faster
conversion times but the ADC resolution is lower than that achieved with the 1 MHz clock.
The number of clocks per sample is determined by the ADC_PERIOD bits in the ADC_CFG register.
ADC_PERIOD values select from 32 to 4096 sampling clocks in powers of two. Longer sample times
produce more significant bits. Regardless of the sample time, converted samples are always 16-bits in size
with the significant bits left-aligned within the value.
Table 10.4 shows the options for ADC sample times and the significant bits in the conversion results.
Table 10.4. ADC Sample Times*
ADC_PERIOD
Sample
Clocks
Sample Time (µs)
Sample Frequency (kHz)
1 MHz Clock
6 MHz Clock
1 MHz Clock
6 MHz Clock
Significant
Bits
0
32
32
5.33
31.3
188
7
1
64
64
10.7
15.6
93.8
8
2
128
128
21.3
7.81
46.9
9
3
256
256
42.7
3.91
23.4
10
4
512
512
85.3
1.95
11.7
11
5
1024
1024
170
0.977
5.86
12
6
2048
2048
341
0.488
2.93
13
7
4096
4096
682
0.244
1.47
14
*Note: ADC sample timing is the same whether the EM341 is using the 24 MHz crystal oscillator or the 12 MHz high-speed
RC oscillator. This facilitates using the ADC soon after the CPU wakes from deep sleep, before switching to the crystal
oscillator.
10.2. Interrupts
The ADC has its own top-level interrupt in the NVIC. The ADC interrupt is enabled by writing the INT_ADC bit to
the INT_CFGSET register, and cleared by writing the INT_ADC bit to the INT_CFGCLR register. "9. Interrupt
System" on page 100, describes the interrupt system in detail.
Five kinds of ADC events can generate an ADC interrupt, and each has a bit flag in the INT_ADCFLAG register to
identify the reason(s) for the interrupt:
INT_ADCOVF
– an ADC conversion result was ready but the DMA was disabled (DMA buffer overflow).
the gain correction multiplication exceeded the limits for a signed 16-bit number (gain
INT_ADCSAT–
saturation).
INT_ADCULDFULL – the DMA wrote to the last location in the buffer (DMA buffer full).
INT_ADCULDHALF – the DMA wrote to the last location of the first half of the DMA buffer (DMA buffer half
full).
INT_ADCDATA – there is data ready in the ADC_DATA register.
Rev 1.0
175
EM341
Bits in INT_ADCFLAG register may be cleared by writing a 1 to their position. Writing 0 to any bit in the
INT_ADCFLAG register is ineffectual.
The INT_ADCCFG register controls whether or not INT_ADCFLAG register bits actually propagate the ADC
interrupt to the NVIC. Only the events whose bits are 1 in the INT_ADCCFG register can do so.
For non-interrupt (polled) ADC operation set the INT_ADCCFG register to zero, and read the bit flags in the
INT_ADCFLAG register to determine the ADC status.
Note: When making changes to the ADC configuration it is best to disable the DMA beforehand. If this isn’t done it can be difficult to determine at which point the sampled data in the DMA buffer switched from the old configuration to the new configuration. However, since the ADC will be left running, if it completes a conversion after the DMA is disabled, the
INT_ADCOVF flag will be set. To prevent these unwanted DMA buffer overflow indications, clear the INT_ADCOVF flag
immediately after enabling the DMA, preferably with interrupts off. Disabling the ADC in addition to the DMA is often
undesirable because of the additional analog startup time when it is re-enabled.
10.3. Operation
Setting the ADC_EN bit in the ADC_CFG register enables the ADC. Once the ADC is enabled, it performs
conversions continuously until it is disabled. If the ADC had previously been disabled, a 21 µs analog startup delay
is automatically imposed before the ADC starts conversions. The delay timing is performed in hardware and is
simply added to the time until the first conversion result is output.
When the ADC is first enabled, and/or if any change is made to ADC_CFG after it is enabled, the time until a result
is output is double the normal sample time. This is because the ADC’s internal design requires it to discard the first
conversion after startup or a configuration change. This is done automatically and is hidden from software.
Switching the system clock between OSCHF and OSC24M also causes the ADC to go through this startup cycle. If
the ADC was newly enabled, the analog delay time is added to the doubled sample time.
If the DMA is running when the ADC_CFG register is modified, the DMA does not stop, so the DMA buffer may
contain conversion results from both the old and new configurations.
The following procedure illustrates a simple polled method of using the ADC without DMA. This assumes that any
GPIOs and the voltage reference have already been configured.
1. Disable all ADC interrupts: Write 0 to the INT_ADCCFG register.
2. Write the desired offset and gain correction values to the ADC_OFFSET and ADC_GAIN registers.
3. Write the desired conversion configuration, with the ADC_EN bit set, to ADC_CFG register.
4. Clear the ADC data flag: Write the INT_ADCDATA bit to INT_ADCFLAG register.
5. Wait until the INT_ADCDATA bit is set in INT_ADCFLAG register, then read the result, as a 16-bit signed
variable, from the ADC_DATA register.
The following procedure illustrates a simple polled method of using the ADC with DMA. After completing the
procedure, the latest conversion results are available in the location written to by the DMA. This assumes that any
GPIOs and the voltage reference have already been configured.
1. Allocate a 16-bit signed variable, for example analogData, to receive the ADC output.
(Make sure that analogData is half-word aligned – that is, at an even address.)
2. Disable all ADC interrupts: Write 0 to the INT_ADCCFG register.
3. Set up the DMA to output conversion results to the variable, analogData.
Reset the DMA: Set the ADC_DMARST bit in ADC_DMACFG register.
Define a one sample buffer: Write analogData’s address to the ADC_DMABEG register and set the
ADC_DMASIZE register to 1.
4. Write the desired offset and gain correction values to the ADC_OFFSET and ADC_GAIN registers.
5. Start the ADC and the DMA.
Write the desired conversion configuration, with the ADC_EN bit set, to the ADC_CFG register.
Clear the ADC buffer full flag: Write the INT_ADCULDFULL bit to the INT_ADCFLAG register.
Start the DMA in auto wrap mode: Set the ADC_DMAAUTOWRAP and ADC_DMALOAD bits in the
ADC_DMACFG register.
176
Rev 1.0
EM341
6. Wait until the INT_ADCULDFULL bit is set in the INT_ADCFLAG register, then read the result from
analogData.
To convert multiple inputs using this approach, repeat steps 4 through 6, loading the desired input configurations to
the ADC_CFG register in Step 5. If the inputs can use the same offset/gain correction, just repeat steps 5 and 6.
10.4. Calibration
Sampling of internal connections GND, VREF/2, and VREF allow for offset and gain calibration of the ADC in
applications where absolute accuracy is important. Offset error is calculated from the minimum input, and gain
error is calculated from the full-scale input range. Correction using VREF is recommended because VREF is
calibrated by the Ember software against VDD_PADSA. The VDD_PADSA regulator is factory-trimmed to 1.80 V
±20 mV. The ADC calibrates as a single-ended measurement. Differential signals require correction of both their
inputs.
The following steps outline the calibration procedure:
1. Calibrate VREF against VDD_PADSA.
2. Determine the ADC gain by sampling independently VREF and GND. Gain is calculated from the slope of
these two measurements.
3. Apply gain correction.
4. Determine the ADC offset by sampling GND.
5. Apply offset correction.
Table 10.5 shows the equations used to calculate the gain and offset correction values.
Table 10.5. ADC Gain and Offset Correction Equations
Calibration
Gain
Offset (after applying gain correction)
Correction Value
16384
32768 ------------------------------------------- N VREF – N GND
2 57344 – N GND
Notes:
1. The ADC output is 2s complement. All N are therefore 16-bit 2s complement numbers.
2. Offset is a 16-bit 2s complement number.
3. Gain is a 16-bit number representing a gain of 0 to 65535/32768 in 1/32768 steps. The default value is 32768,
corresponding to a gain of 1.
4. NGND is a sampling of ground. Due to the ADC's internal design, VGND does not yield the minimum 16 bit 2s
complement value 32768 as the conversion result. Instead, VGND yields a value close to 57344 when the input buffer
is not selected. VGND cannot be measured when the input buffer is enabled because it is outside the buffer's input
range.
5. NVREF is a sampling of VREF. Due to the ADC's internal design, VREF does not yield the maximum positive 16-bit 2s
complement 32767 as the conversion result. Instead, VREF yields a value close to 8192.
6. NVREF/2 is a sampling of VREF/2. VREF/2 yields a value close to 0.
7. Offset correction is affected by the gain correction value. Offset correction is calculated after gain correction has been
applied.
Rev 1.0
177
EM341
10.5. ADC Key Parameters
Table 10.6 describes the key ADC parameters measured on Silicon Labs’ EM357 reference design at 25 °C and
VDD_PADS at 3.0 V, for a sampling clock of 1 MHz. The single-ended measurements were done at finput = 7.7%
fNyquist; 0 dBFS level (where full-scale is a 1.2 V p-p swing). The differential measurements were done at
finput = 7.7% fNyquist; –6 dBFS level (where full-scale is a 2.4 V p-p swing) and a common mode voltage of 0.6 V.
Table 10.6. ADC Module Key Parameters for 1 MHz Sampling
Parameter
Performance
ADC_PERIOD
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Conversion Time (µs)
32
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
Nyquist Freq (kHz)
15.6k
7.81k
3.91k
1.95k
977
488
244
122
3 dB Cut-off (kHz)
9.43k
4.71k
2.36k
1.18k
589
295
147
73.7
1
0.083
0.092
0.163
0.306
0.624
1.229
2.451
4.926
INL (codes peak)
RMS)1
0.047
0.051
0.093
0.176
0.362
0.719
1.435
2.848
1
0.028
0.035
0.038
0.044
0.074
0.113
0.184
0.333
DNL (codes RMS)1
0.008
0.009
0.011
0.014
0.019
0.029
0.048
0.079
5.6
7.0
8.6
10.1
11.5
12.6
13.0
13.2
SNR (dB)2
Single-Ended
Differential
35
35
44
44
53
53
62
62
70
71
75
77
77
79
77
80
SINAD (dB)2
Single-Ended
Differential
35
35
44
44
53
53
61
62
67
70
69
75
70
76
70
76
SDFR (dB)
Single-Ended
Differential
59
60
68
69
72
77
72
80
72
81
72
81
72
81
73
81
THD (dB)
Single-Ended
Differential
–45
–45
–54
–54
–62
–63
–67
–71
–69
–75
–69
–76
–69
–76
–69
–76
ENOB (from SNR)2
Single-Ended
Differential
5.6
5.6
7.1
7.1
8.6
8.6
10.0
10.1
11.3
11.4
12.2
12.5
12.4
12.9
12.5
12.9
ENOB (from SINAD)2
Single-Ended
Differential
5.5
5.6
7.0
7.0
8.5
8.5
9.9
10.0
10.9
11.3
11.2
12.1
11.3
12.3
11.3
12.4
7
[15:9]
8
[15:8]
9
[15:7]
10
[15:6]
11
[15:5]
12
[15:4]
13
[15:3]
14
[15:2]
INL (codes
DNL (codes peak)
ENOB
(from single-cycle test)
Equivalent ADC Bits1
Notes:
1. INL and DNL are referenced to a LSB of the Equivalent ADC Bits shown in the last row of this table.
2. ENOB (effective number of bits) can be calculated from either SNR (signal to non-harmonic noise ratio) or SINAD
(signal-to-noise and distortion ratio).
178
Rev 1.0
EM341
Table 10.7 describes the key ADC parameters measured on Silicon Labs’ EM341 reference design at 25 °C and
VDD_PADS at 3.0 V, for a sampling rate of 6 MHz. The single-ended measurements were done at finput = 7.7%
fNyquist, 0 dBFS level (where full-scale is a 1.2 V p-p swing). The differential measurements were done at
finput = 7.7% fNyquist; –6 dBFS level (where full-scale is a 2.4 V p-p swing) and a common mode voltage of 0.6 V.
Table 10.7. ADC Module Key Parameters for 6 MHz Sampling
Parameter
ADC_PERIOD
Performance
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Conversion Time (µs)
5.33
10.7
21.3
42.7
85.3
171
341
683
Nyquist Freq (kHz)
93.8k
46.9k
23.4k
11.7k
5.86k
2.93k
1.47k
732
3 dB Cut-off (kHz)
56.6k
28.3k
14.1k
7.07k
3.54k
1.77k
884
442
INL (codes peak)1
0.084
0.084
0.15
0.274
0.518
1.057
2.106
4.174
INL (codes RMS)1
0.046
0.044
0.076
0.147
0.292
0.58
1.14
2.352
DNL (codes peak)1
0.026
0.023
0.044
0.052
0.096
0.119
0.196
0.371
RMS)1
0.007
0.009
0.013
0.015
0.024
0.03
0.05
0.082
5.6
7.0
8.5
10.0
11.4
12.6
13.1
13.2
SNR (dB)2
Single-Ended
Differential
35
35
44
44
53
53
62
62
70
71
75
77
76
79
77
80
SINAD (dB)2
Single-Ended
Differential
35
35
44
44
53
53
62
62
68
70
71
75
71
77
71
77
SDFR (dB)
Single-Ended
Differential
60
60
68
69
75
77
75
80
75
80
75
80
75
80
75
80
THD (dB)
Single-Ended
Differential
–45
–45
–54
–54
–63
–63
–68
–71
–70
–76
–70
–77
–70
–78
–70
–78
ENOB (from SNR)2
Single-Ended
Differential
5.6
5.6
7.1
7.1
8.6
8.6
10.0
10.1
11.4
11.5
12.1
12.5
12.4
12.9
12.5
13.0
ENOB (from SINAD)2
Single-Ended
Differential
5.5
5.6
7.0
7.1
8.5
8.6
9.9
10.1
11.0
11.4
11.4
12.4
11.5
12.8
11.5
13.0
7
[15:9]
8
[15:8]
9
[15:7]
10
[15:6]
11
[15:5]
12
[15:4]
13
[15:3]
14
[15:2]
DNL (codes
ENOB
(from single-cycle test)
Equivalent ADC Bits1
Notes:
1. INL and DNL are referenced to a LSB of the Equivalent ADC Bits shown in the last row of this table.
2. ENOB (effective number of bits) can be calculated from either SNR (signal to non-harmonic noise ratio) or SINAD
(signal-to-noise and distortion ratio).
Rev 1.0
179
EM341
Table 10.8 describes the key ADC parameters measured on Silicon Labs’ EM341 reference design at 25 °C and
VDD_PADS at 3.0 V, for a sampling clock of 6 MHz. The single-ended measurements were done at finput = 7.7%
fNyquist; level = 1.2 V p-p swing centered on 1.5 V. The differential measurements were done at finput = 7.7%
fNyquist, level = 1.2 V p-p swing and a common mode voltage of 1.5 V.
Table 10.8. ADC Module Key Parameters for Input Buffer Enabled and 6 MHz Sampling
Parameter
Performance
ADC_PERIOD
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Conversion Time (µs)
32
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
Nyquist Freq (kHz)
93.8k
46.9k
23.4k
11.7k
5.86k
2.93k
1.47k
732
3 dB Cut-off (kHz)
56.6k
28.3k
14.1k
7.07k
3.54k
1.77k
884
442
INL (codes peak)1
0.055
0.032
0.038
0.07
0.123
0.261
0.522
1.028
INL (codes RMS)1
0.028
0.017
0.02
0.04
0.077
0.167
0.326
0.65
DNL (codes peak)1
0.028
0.017
0.02
0.04
0.077
0.167
0.326
0.65
RMS)1
0.01
0.006
0.006
0.007
0.008
0.013
0.023
0.038
3.6
5.0
6.6
8.1
9.5
10.7
11.3
11.6
SNR (dB)
Single-Ended
Differential2
23
23
32
32
41
41
50
50
59
59
65
66
67
69
68
71
SINAD (dB)
Single-Ended
Differential2
23
23
32
32
41
41
50
50
58
59
64
66
66
69
66
71
SDFR (dB)
Single-Ended
Differential
48
48
56
57
65
65
72
74
72
82
72
88
73
88
73
88
THD (dB)
Single-Ended
Differential
–33
–33
–42
–42
–51
–51
–59
–60
–66
–69
–68
–76
–68
–80
–68
–82
ENOB (from SNR)2
Single-Ended
Differential
3.6
3.6
5.1
5.1
6.6
6.6
8.1
8.1
9.5
9.5
10.5
10.7
10.9
11.3
11
11.5
ENOB (from SINAD)2
Single-Ended
Differential
3.6
3.6
5.0
5.1
6.5
6.6
8.0
8.0
9.4
9.5
10.3
10.6
10.7
11.3
10.7
11.4
7
[15:9]
8
[15:8]
9
[15:7]
10
[15:6]
11
[15:5]
12
[15:4]
13
[15:3]
14
[15:2]
DNL (codes
ENOB
(from single-cycle test)
Equivalent ADC Bits1
Notes:
1. INL and DNL are referenced to a LSB of the Equivalent ADC Bits shown in the last row of this table.
2. ENOB (effective number of bits) can be calculated from either SNR (signal to non-harmonic noise ratio) or SINAD
(signal-to-noise and distortion ratio).
180
Rev 1.0
EM341
Table 10.9 lists other specifications for the ADC not covered in Tables 10.6, 10.7, and 10.8.
Table 10.9. ADC Specifications*
Parameter
Min
Typ
Max
Units
1.17
1.2
1.23
V
VREF output current
1
mA
VREF load capacitance
10
nF
VREF
Minimum input voltage
0
V
VREF
V
0
VREF
V
–VREF
+VREF
V
0
VREF
V
Input referred ADC offset
–10
10
mV
Input Impedance
1 MHz sample clock
6 MHz sample clock
Not sampling
1
0.5
10
Maximum input voltage
Single-ended signal range
Differential signal range
Common mode range
M
*Note: The signal-ended ADC measurements are limited in their range and only guaranteed for accuracy within the limits
shown in this table. The ADC's internal design allows for measurements outside of this range (±200 mV), but the
accuracy of such measurements is not guaranteed. The maximum input voltage is of more interest to the differential
sampling where a differential measurement might be small, but a common mode can push the actual input voltage on
one of the signals towards the upper voltage limit.
Rev 1.0
181
EM341
10.6. Registers
Register 10.1. ADC_DATA: ADC Data Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
2
1
0
Name
Bit
ADC_DATA_FIELD
7
6
5
Name
4
3
ADC_DATA_FIELD
Address: 0x4000D000 Reset: 0x00000000
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
ADC_DATA_FIELD
[15:0]
R
182
Description
ADC conversion result. The result is a signed 2s complement value. The
significant bits of the value begin at bit 15 regardless of the sample period
used.
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 10.2. ADC_CFG: ADC Configuration Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
ADC_PERIOD
Bit
7
6
Name
ADC_MUXP
ADC_CFGRSVD2
5
4
ADC_MUXP
3
ADC_MUXN
2
1
ADC_1MHZCLK ADC_CFGRSVD
0
ADC_ENABLE
Address: 0x4000D004 Reset: 0x00001800
Bitname
Bitfield Access
Description
ADC_PERIOD
[15:13]
RW
ADC sample time in clocks and the equivalent significant bits in the conversion.
0: 32 clocks (7 bits).
1: 64 clocks (8 bits).
2: 128 clocks (9 bits).
3: 256 clocks (10 bits).
4: 512 clocks (11 bits).
5: 1024 clocks (12 bits).
6: 2048 clocks (13 bits).
7: 4096 clocks (14 bits).
ADC_CFGRSVD2
[12:11]
RW
Reserved: these bits must be set to 0.
ADC_MUXP
[10:7]
RW
Input selection for the P channel.
0x0: PB5 pin.
0x1: PB6 pin.
0x2: PB7 pin.
0x3: PC1 pin.
0x4: PA4 pin.
0x5: PA5 pin.
0x8: GND (0V) (not for high voltage range).
0x9: VREF/2 (0.6 V).
0xA: VREF (1.2 V).
0xB: VDD_PADSA/2 (0.9 V) (not for high voltage range).
0x6, 0x7, 0xC-0xF: Reserved.
ADC_MUXN
[6:3]
RW
Input selection for the N channel.
Refer to ADC_MUXP above for choices.
ADC_1MHZCLK
[2]
RW
Select ADC clock: 0 = 6 MHz, 1 = 1 MHz.
ADC_CFGRSVD
[1]
RW
Reserved: this bit must always be set to 0.
ADC_ENABLE
[0]
RW
Enable the ADC: write 1 to enable continuous conversions, write 0 to stop.
When the ADC is started the first conversion takes twice the usual number of clocks
plus 21 microseconds. If anything in this register is modified while the ADC is running, the next conversion takes twice the usual number of clocks.
Rev 1.0
183
EM341
Register 10.3. ADC_OFFSET: ADC Offset Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
2
1
0
Name
ADC_OFFSET_FIELD
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
3
ADC_OFFSET_FIELD
Address: 0x4000D008 Reset: 0x0000
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
ADC_OFFSET_FIELD
[15:0]
RW
Description
16-bit signed offset added to the basic ADC conversion result before gain
correction is applied.
Register 10.4. ADC_GAIN: ADC Gain Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
2
1
0
Name
Bit
ADC_GAIN_FIELD
7
6
5
Name
4
3
ADC_GAIN_FIELD
Address: 0x4000D00C Reset: 0x8000
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
ADC_GAIN_FIELD
[15:0]
RW
Gain factor that is multiplied by the offset-corrected ADC result to produce the
output value. The gain is a 16-bit unsigned scaled integer value with a binary
decimal point between bits 15 and 14. It can represent values from 0 to (almost)
2. The reset value is a gain factor of 1.
184
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 10.5. ADC_DMACFG: ADC DMA Configuration Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
0
0
ADC_DMARST
0
0
ADC_DMAAUTOWRAP
ADC_DMALOAD
Address: 0x4000D010 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
ADC_DMARST
[4]
W
ADC_DMAAUTOWRAP
[1]
RW
Selects DMA mode.
0: Linear mode, the DMA stops when the buffer is full.
1: Auto-wrap mode, the DMA output wraps back to the start when the buffer
is full.
ADC_DMALOAD
[0]
RW
Loads the DMA buffer.
Write 1 to start DMA (writing 0 has no effect). Cleared when DMA starts or is
reset.
Write 1 to reset the ADC DMA. This bit auto-clears.
Register 10.6. ADC_DMASTAT: ADC DMA Status Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
ADC_DMAOVF
ADC_DMAACT
Address: 0x4000D014 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
ADC_DMAOVF
[1]
R
DMA overflow: occurs when an ADC result is ready and the DMA is not
active. Cleared by DMA reset.
ADC_DMAACT
[0]
R
DMA status: reads 1 if DMA is active.
Rev 1.0
185
EM341
Register 10.7. ADC_DMABEG: ADC DMA Begin Address Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
Bit
7
6
1
0
ADC_DMABEG
5
Name
4
3
2
ADC_DMABEG
Address: 0x4000D018 Reset: 0x20000000
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
ADC_DMABEG
[13:0]
RW
Description
ADC buffer start address. Caution: this must be an even address - the
least significant bit of this register is fixed at zero by hardware.
Register 10.8. ADC_DMASIZE: ADC DMA Buffer Size Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
1
0
Name
ADC_DMASIZE_FIELD
4
3
2
ADC_DMASIZE_FIELD
Address: 0x4000D01C Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
ADC_DMASIZE_FIELD
[12:0]
RW
ADC buffer size. This is the number of 16-bit ADC conversion results the
buffer can hold, not its length in bytes. (The length in bytes is twice this
value.)
186
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 10.9. ADC_DMACUR: ADC DMA Current Address Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
Bit
7
6
1
0
ADC_DMACUR_FIELD
5
Name
4
3
2
ADC_DMACUR_FIELD
0
Address: 0x4000D020 Reset: 0x20000000
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
ADC_DMACUR_FIELD
[13:1]
R
Current DMA address: the location that will be written next by the DMA.
Register 10.10. ADC_DMACNT: ADC DMA Count Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
1
0
Name
ADC_DMACNT_FIELD
4
3
2
ADC_DMACNT_FIELD
Address: 0x4000D024 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
ADC_DMACNT_FIELD
[12:0]
R
DMA count: the number of 16-bit conversion results that have been written to the buffer.
Rev 1.0
187
EM341
Register 10.11. INT_ADCFLAG: ADC Interrupt Flag Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
0
0
INT_ADCOVF INT_ADCSAT INT_ADCULDFULL INT_ADCULDHALF INT_ADCFLAGRSVD
Address: 0x4000A810 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
INT_ADCOVF
[4]
RW
DMA buffer overflow interrupt pending.
INT_ADCSAT
[3]
RW
Gain correction saturation interrupt pending.
INT_ADCULDFULL
[2]
RW
DMA buffer full interrupt pending.
INT_ADCULDHALF
[1]
RW
DMA buffer half full interrupt pending.
INT_ADCDATA
[0]
RW
ADC_DATA register has data interrupt pending.
Register 10.12. INT_ADCCFG: ADC Interrupt Configuration Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
0
0
INT_ADCOVF
INT_ADCSAT
INT_ADCULDFULL INT_ADCULDHALF INT_ADCCFGRSVD
Address: 0x4000A850 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
INT_ADCOVF
[4]
RW
DMA buffer overflow interrupt enable.
INT_ADCSAT
[3]
RW
Gain correction saturation interrupt enable.
INT_ADCULDFULL
[2]
RW
DMA buffer full interrupt enable.
INT_ADCULDHALF
[1]
RW
DMA buffer half full interrupt enable.
INT_ADCDATA
[0]
RW
ADC_DATA register has data interrupt enable.
188
Description
Rev 1.0
EM341
9. Interrupt System
The EM341's interrupt system is composed of two parts: a standard ARM® CortexTM-M3 Nested Vectored
Interrupt Controller (NVIC) that provides top-level interrupts, and a proprietary Event Manager (EM) that provides
second-level interrupts. The NVIC and EM provide a simple hierarchy. All second-level interrupts from the EM feed
into top-level interrupts in the NVIC. This two-level hierarchy allows for both fine granular control of interrupt
sources and coarse granular control over entire peripherals, while allowing peripherals to have their own interrupt
vector.
"9.1. Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC)" on page 100 provides a description of the NVIC and an overview
of the exception table (ARM nomenclature refers to interrupts as exceptions). "9.2. Event Manager" on page 102
provides a more detailed description of the Event Manager including a table of all top-level peripheral interrupts
and their second-level interrupt sources.
In practice, top-level peripheral interrupts are only used to enable or disable interrupts for an entire peripheral.
Second-level interrupts originate from hardware sources, and therefore are the main focus of applications using
interrupts.
9.1. Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC)
The ARM® CortexTM-M3 Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) facilitates low-latency exception and
interrupt handling. The NVIC and the processor core interface are closely coupled, which enables low-latency
interrupt processing and efficient processing of late-arriving interrupts. The NVIC also maintains knowledge of the
stacked (nested) interrupts to enable tail-chaining of interrupts.
The ARM® CortexTM-M3 NVIC contains 10 standard interrupts that are related to chip and CPU operation and
management. In addition to the 10 standard interrupts, it contains 17 individually vectored peripheral interrupts
specific to the EM341.
The NVIC defines a list of exceptions. These exceptions include not only traditional peripheral interrupts, but also
more specialized events such as faults and CPU reset. In the ARM® CortexTM-M3 NVIC, a CPU reset event is
considered an exception of the highest priority, and the stack pointer is loaded from the first position in the NVIC
exception table. The NVIC exception table defines all exceptions and their position, including peripheral interrupts.
The position of each exception is important since it directly translates to the location of a 32-bit interrupt vector for
each interrupt, and defines the hardware priority of exceptions. Each exception in the table is a 32-bit address that
is loaded into the program counter when that exception occurs. Table 9.1 lists the entire exception table.
Exceptions 0 (stack pointer) through 15 (SysTick) are part of the standard ARM® CortexTM-M3 NVIC, while
exceptions 16 (Timer 1) through 32 (Debug) are the peripheral interrupts specific to the EM341 peripherals. The
peripheral interrupts are listed in greater detail in Table 9.2.
100
Rev 1.0
EM341
Table 9.1. NVIC Exception Table
Exception
Position
Description
—
0
Stack top is loaded from first entry of vector table on reset.
Reset
1
Invoked on power up and warm reset. On first instruction, drops to lowest priority (Thread mode). Asynchronous.
NMI
2
Cannot be stopped or preempted by any exception but reset. Asynchronous.
Hard Fault
3
All classes of fault, when the fault cannot activate because of priority or the
Configurable Fault handler has been disabled. Synchronous.
Memory Fault
4
MPU mismatch, including access violation and no match. Synchronous.
Bus Fault
5
Pre-fetch, memory access, and other address/memory-related faults. Synchronous when precise and asynchronous when imprecise.
Usage Fault
6
Usage fault, such as “undefined instruction executed” or “illegal state transition
attempt”. Synchronous.
—
7–10
SVCall
11
System service call with SVC instruction. Synchronous.
Debug Monitor
12
Debug monitor, when not halting. Synchronous, but only active when enabled.
It does not activate if lower priority than the current activation.
—
13
Reserved.
PendSV
14
Pendable request for system service. Asynchronous and only pended by software.
SysTick
15
System tick timer has fired. Asynchronous.
Timer 1
16
Timer 1 peripheral interrupt..
Timer 2
17
Timer 2 peripheral interrupt.
Management
18
Management peripheral interrupt.
Baseband
19
Baseband peripheral interrupt.
Sleep Timer
20
Sleep Timer peripheral interrupt.
Serial Controller 1
21
Serial Controller 1 peripheral interrupt.
Serial Controller 2
22
Serial Controller 2 peripheral interrupt.
Security
23
Security peripheral interrupt.
MAC Timer
24
MAC Timer peripheral interrupt.
MAC Transmit
25
MAC Transmit peripheral interrupt.
MAC Receive
26
MAC Receive peripheral interrupt.
ADC
27
ADC peripheral interrupt.
IRQA
28
IRQA peripheral interrupt.
IRQB
29
IRQB peripheral interrupt.
IRQC
30
IRQC peripheral interrupt.
IRQD
31
IRQD peripheral interrupt.
Debug
32
Debug peripheral interrupt.
Reserved.
Rev 1.0
EM341
The NVIC also contains a software-configurable interrupt prioritization mechanism. The Reset, NMI, and Hard
Fault exceptions, in that order, are always the highest priority, and are not software-configurable. All other
exceptions can be assigned a 5-bit priority number, with low values representing higher priority. If any exceptions
have the same software-configurable priority, then the NVIC uses the hardware-defined priority. The hardwaredefined priority number is the same as the position of the exception in the exception table. For example, if IRQA
and IRQB both fire at the same time and have the same software-defined priority, the NVIC handles IRQA, with
priority number 28, first because it has a higher hardware priority than IRQB with priority number 29.
The top-level interrupts are controlled through five ARM® CortexTM-M3 NVIC registers: INT_CFGSET,
INT_CFGCLR, INT_PENDSET, INT_PENDCLR, and INT_ACTIVE. Writing 0 into any bit in any of these five
register is ineffective.
INT_CFGSET—Writing
1 to a bit in INT_CFGSET enables that top-level interrupt.
1 to a bit in INT_CFGCLR disables that top-level interrupt.
INT_PENDSET—Writing 1 to a bit in INT_PENDSET triggers that top-level interrupt.
INT_PENDCLR—Writing 1 to a bit in INT_PENDCLR clears that top-level interrupt.
INT_ACTIVE cannot be written to and is used for indicating which interrupts are currently active.
INT_PENDSET and INT_PENDCLR set and clear a simple latch; INT_CFGSET and INT_CFGCLR set and clear a
mask on the output of the latch. Interrupts may be pended and cleared at any time, but any pended interrupt will
not be taken unless the corresponding mask (INT_CFGSET) is set, which allows that interrupt to propagate. If an
INT_CFGSET bit is set and the corresponding INT_PENDSET bit is set, then the interrupt will propagate and be
taken. If INT_CFGSET is set after INT_PENDSET is set, then the interrupt will also propagate and be taken.
Interrupt flags (signals) from the top-level interrupts are level-sensitive.
INT_CFGCLR—Writing
The second-level interrupt registers, which provide control of the second-level Event Manager peripheral interrupts,
are described in “9.2. Event Manager” .
For further information on the NVIC and ARM® CortexTM-M3 exceptions, refer to the ARM® CortexTM-M3
Technical Reference Manual and the ARM ARMv7-M Architecture Reference Manual.
9.2. Event Manager
While the standard ARM® CortexTM-M3 Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller provides top-level interrupts into the
CPU, the proprietary Event Manager provides second-level interrupts. The Event Manager takes a large variety of
hardware interrupt sources from the peripherals and merges them into a smaller group of interrupts in the NVIC.
Effectively, all second-level interrupts from a peripheral are “ORd” together into a single interrupt in the NVIC. In
addition, the Event Manager provides missed indicators for the top-level peripheral interrupts with the register
INT_MISS.
The description of each peripheral's interrupt configuration and flag registers can be found in the chapters of this
datasheet describing each peripheral. Figure 9.1 shows the Peripheral Interrupts Block Diagram.
102
Rev 1.0
EM341
Interrupts into NVIC/CPU
AND
Peripheral Interrupt Instance
read
Q
latch
S
OR
R
OR
AND
write 1
INT_CFGCLR
write 1
INT_CFGSET
INT_periphCFG
read
Q
latch
AND
S
read
Q
latch
S
R
OR
write 1
INT_PENDCLR
write 1
INT_PENDSET
INT_periphFLAG
R
read
Q
latch
write 1
S
R
write 1
INT_MISS
Source Interrupt Events
Interrupts from all Peripherals
Figure 9.1. Peripheral Interrupts Block Diagram
Given a peripheral, “periph”, the Event Manager registers (INT_periphCFG and INT_periphFLAG) follow the form:
INT_periphCFG
enables and disables second-level interrupts. Writing 1 to a bit in the INT_periphCFG
register enables the second-level interrupt. Writing 0 to a bit in the INT_periphCFG register disables it. The
INT_periphCFG register behaves like a mask, and is responsible for allowing the INT_periphFLAG bits to
propagate into the top-level NVIC interrupts.
INT_periphFLAG indicates second-level interrupts that have occurred. Writing 1 to a bit in a
INT_periphFLAG register clears the second-level interrupt. Writing 0 to any bit in the INT_periphFLAG
register is ineffective. The INT_periphFLAG register is always active and may be set or cleared at any time,
meaning if any second-level interrupt occurs, then the corresponding bit in the INT_periphFLAG register is
set regardless of the state of INT_periphCFG.
If a bit in the INT_periphCFG register is set after the corresponding bit in the INT_periphFLAG register is set then
the second-level interrupt propagates into the top-level interrupts. The interrupt flags (signals) from the secondlevel interrupts into the top-level interrupts are level-sensitive. If a top-level NVIC interrupt is driven by a secondlevel EM interrupt, then the top-level NVIC interrupt cannot be cleared until all second-level EM interrupts are
cleared.
The INT_periphFLAG register bits are designed to remain set if the second-level interrupt event re-occurs at the
same moment as the INT_periphFLAG register bit is being cleared. This ensures the re-occurring second-level
interrupt event is not missed.
If another enabled second-level interrupt event of the same type occurs before the first interrupt event is cleared,
the second interrupt event is lost because no counting or queuing is used. However, this condition is detected and
stored in the top-level INT_MISS register to facilitate software detection of such problems. The INT_MISS register
is “acknowledged” in the same way as the INT_periphFLAG register-by writing a 1 into the corresponding bit to be
cleared.
Rev 1.0
EM341
Table 9.2 provides a map of all peripheral interrupts. This map lists the top-level NVIC Interrupt bits and, if there is
one, the corresponding second-level EM Interrupt register bits that feed the top-level interrupts.
Table 9.2. NVIC and EM Peripheral Interrupt Map
NVIC Interrupt
(Top-Level)
EM Interrupt
(Second-Level)
NVIC Interrupt
(Top-Level)
EM Interrupt
(Second-Level)
16
INT_DEBUG
15
INT_IRQD
14
INT_SC1PARERR
14
INT_IRQC
13
INT_SC1FRMERR
13
INT_IRQB
12
INT_SCTXULDB
12
INT_IRQA
11
INT_SCTXULDA
11
INT_ADC
10
INT_SCRXULDB
5
INT_SC1
INT_ADCFLAG register
INT_SC1FLAG register
4
INT_ADCOVF
9
INT_SCRXULDA
3
INT_ADCSAT
8
INT_SCNAK
2
INT_ADCULDFULL
7
INT_SCCDMFIN
1
INT_ADCULDHALF
6
INT_SCTXFIN
0
INT_ADCDATA
5
INT_SCRXFIN
10
INT_MACRX
4
INT_SCTXUND
9
INT_MACTX
3
INT_SCRXOVF
8
INT_MACTMR
2
INT_SCTXIDLE
7
INT_SEC
1
INT_SCTXFREE
0
INT_SCRXVAL
6
104
INT_SC2
INT_SC2FLAG register
12
INT_SCTXULDB
4
INT_SLEEPTMR
11
INT_SCTXULDA
3
INT_BB
10
INT_SCRXULDB
2
INT_MGMT
9
INT_SCRXULDA
1
INT_TMR2
8
INT_SCNAK
6
INT_TMRTIF
7
INT_SCCDMFIN
4
INT_TMRCC4IF
6
INT_SCTXFIN
3
INT_TMRCC3IF
5
INT_SCRXFIN
2
INT_TMRCC2IF
4
INT_SCTXUND
1
INT_TMRCC1IF
3
INT_SCRXOVF
0
INT_TMRUIF
2
INT_SCTXIDLE
1
INT_SCTXFREE
6
INT_TMRTIF
0
INT_SCRXVAL
4
INT_TMRCC4IF
3
INT_TMRCC3IF
2
INT_TMRCC2IF
1
INT_TMRCC1IF
0
INT_TMRUIF
0
Rev 1.0
INT_TMR1
INT_TMR2FLAG register
INT_TMR1FLAG register
EM341
9.3. Non-Maskable Interrupt (NMI)
The non-maskable interrupt (NMI) is a special case. Despite being one of the 10 standard ARM® CortexTM-M3
NVIC interrupts, it is sourced from the Event Manager like a peripheral interrupt. The NMI has two second-level
sources; failure of the 24 MHz crystal and watchdog low water mark.
1. Failure of the 24 MHz crystal: If the EM341's main clock, SYSCLK, is operating from the 24 MHz crystal
and the crystal fails, the EM341 detects the failure and automatically switches to the internal 12 MHz RC
clock. When this failure detection and switch has occurred, the EM341 triggers the CLK24M_FAIL secondlevel interrupt, which then triggers the NMI.
2. Watchdog low water mark: If the EM341's watchdog is active and the watchdog counter has not been reset
for nominally 1.792 s, the watchdog triggers the WATCHDOG_INT second-level interrupt, which then
triggers the NMI.
9.4. Faults
Four of the exceptions in the NVIC are faults: Hard Fault, Memory Fault, Bus Fault, and Usage Fault. Of these,
three (Hard Fault, Memory Fault, and Usage Fault) are standard ARM® CortexTM-M3 exceptions.
The Bus Fault, though, is derived from EM341-specific sources. The Bus Fault sources are recorded in the
SCS_AFSR register. Note that it is possible for one access to set multiple SCS_AFSR bits. Also note that MPU
configurations could prevent most of these bus fault accesses from occurring, with the advantage that illegal writes
are made precise faults. The four bus faults are:
WRONGSIZE—Generated
by an 8-bit or 16-bit read or write of an APB peripheral register. This fault can
also result from an unaligned 32-bit access.
PROTECTED—Generated by a user mode (unprivileged) write to a system APB or AHB peripheral or
protected RAM (see "5.2.2.3. RAM Memory Protection" on page 31).
RESERVED—Generated by a read or write to an address within an APB peripheral's 4 kB block range, but
the address is above the last physical register in that block range. Also generated by a read or write to an
address above the top of RAM or flash.
MISSED—Generated by a second SCS_AFSR fault. In practice, this bit is not seen since a second fault
also generates a hard fault, and the hard fault preempts the bus fault.
Rev 1.0
EM341
9.5. Registers
Register 9.1. INT_CFGSET: Top-Level Set Interrupts Configuration Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
INT_DEBUG
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
INT_IRQD
INT_IRQC
INT_IRQB
INT_IRQA
INT_ADC
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
INT_SEC
INT_SC2
INT_SC1
INT_SLEEPTMR
INT_BB
INT_MGMT
INT_TIM2
INT_TIM1
INT_MACRX INT_MACTX INT_MACTMR
Address: 0xE000E100; Reset: 0x0
106
Bit Name
Bit Field
Access
Description
INT_DEBUG
[16]
RW
Write 1 to enable debug interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_IRQD
[15]
RW
Write 1 to enable IRQD interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_IRQC
[14]
RW
Write 1 to enable IRQC interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_IRQB
[13]
RW
Write 1 to enable IRQB interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_IRQA
[12]
RW
Write 1 to enable IRQA interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_ADC
[11]
RW
Write 1 to enable ADC interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_MACRX
[10]
RW
Write 1 to enable MAC receive interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_MACTX
[9]
RW
Write 1 to enable MAC transmit interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_MACTMR
[8]
RW
Write 1 to enable MAC timer interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_SEC
[7]
RW
Write 1 to enable security interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_SC2
[6]
RW
Write 1 to enable serial controller 2 interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_SC1
[5]
RW
Write 1 to enable serial controller 1 interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_SLEEPTMR
[4]
RW
Write 1 to enable sleep timer interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_BB
[3]
RW
Write 1 to enable baseband interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_MGMT
[2]
RW
Write 1 to enable management interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_TIM2
[1]
RW
Write 1 to enable timer 2 interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_TIM1
[0]
RW
Write 1 to enable timer 1 interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 9.2. INT_CFGCLR: Top-Level Clear Interrupts Configuration Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
INT_DEBUG
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
INT_IRQD
INT_IRQC
INT_IRQB
INT_IRQA
INT_ADC
INT_MACRX
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
INT_SEC
INT_SC2
INT_SC1
INT_SLEEPTMR
INT_BB
INT_MGMT
INT_TIM2
INT_TIM1
INT_MACTX INT_MACTMR
Address: 0xE000E180 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
INT_DEBUG
[16]
RW
Write 1 to disable debug interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_IRQD
[15]
RW
Write 1 to disable IRQD interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_IRQC
[14]
RW
Write 1 to disable IRQC interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_IRQB
[13]
RW
Write 1 to disable IRQB interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_IRQA
[12]
RW
Write 1 to disable IRQA interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_ADC
[11]
RW
Write 1 to disable ADC interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_MACRX
[10]
RW
Write 1 to disable MAC receive interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_MACTX
[9]
RW
Write 1 to disable MAC transmit interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_MACTMR
[8]
RW
Write 1 to disable MAC timer interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_SEC
[7]
RW
Write 1 to disable security interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_SC2
[6]
RW
Write 1 to disable serial controller 2 interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_SC1
[5]
RW
Write 1 to disable serial controller 1 interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_SLEEPTMR
[4]
RW
Write 1 to disable sleep timer interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_BB
[3]
RW
Write 1 to disable baseband interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_MGMT
[2]
RW
Write 1 to disable management interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_TIM2
[1]
RW
Write 1 to disable timer 2 interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_TIM1
[0]
RW
Write 1 to disable timer 1 interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 9.3. INT_PENDSET: Top-Level Set Interrupts Pending Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
INT_DEBUG
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
INT_IRQD
INT_IRQA
INT_ADC
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
INT_SEC
INT_SC2
INT_SC1
INT_SLEEPTMR
INT_BB
INT_MGMT
INT_TIM2
INT_TIM1
INT_IRQC INT_IRQB
INT_MACRX INT_MACTX
INT_MACTMR
Address: 0xE000E200 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
INT_DEBUG
[16]
RW
Write 1 to pend debug interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_IRQD
[15]
RW
Write 1 to pend IRQD interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_IRQC
[14]
RW
Write 1 to pend IRQC interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.).
INT_IRQB
[13]
RW
Write 1 to pend IRQB interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_IRQA
[12]
RW
Write 1 to pend IRQA interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_ADC
[11]
RW
Write 1 to pend ADC interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_MACRX
[10]
RW
Write 1 to pend MAC receive interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_MACTX
[9]
RW
Write 1 to pend MAC transmit interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_MACTMR
[8]
RW
Write 1 to pend MAC timer interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_SEC
[7]
RW
Write 1 to pend security interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_SC2
[6]
RW
Write 1 to pend serial controller 2 interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_SC1
[5]
RW
Write 1 to pend serial controller 1 interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_SLEEPTMR
[4]
RW
Write 1 to pend sleep timer interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_BB
[3]
RW
Write 1 to pend baseband interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_MGMT
[2]
RW
Write 1 to pend management interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_TIM2
[1]
RW
Write 1 to pend timer 2 interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_TIM1
[0]
RW
Write 1 to pend timer 1 interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
108
Description
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 9.4. INT_PENDCLR: Top-Level Clear Interrupts Pending Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
INT_DEBUG
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
INT_IRQD
INT_IRQC
INT_IRQB
INT_IRQA
INT_ADC
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
INT_SEC
INT_SC2
INT_SC1
INT_SLEEPTMR
INT_BB
INT_MGMT
INT_TIM2
INT_TIM1
INT_MACRX INT_MACTX INT_MACTMR
Address: 0xE000E280 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
INT_DEBUG
[16]
RW
Write 1 to unpend debug interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_IRQD
[15]
RW
Write 1 to unpend IRQD interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_IRQC
[14]
RW
Write 1 to unpend IRQC interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_IRQB
[13]
RW
Write 1 to unpend IRQB interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_IRQA
[12]
RW
Write 1 to unpend IRQA interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_ADC
[11]
RW
Write 1 to unpend ADC interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_MACRX
[10]
RW
Write 1 to unpend MAC receive interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_MACTX
[9]
RW
Write 1 to unpend MAC transmit interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_MACTMR
[8]
RW
Write 1 to unpend MAC timer interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_SEC
[7]
RW
Write 1 to unpend security interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_SC2
[6]
RW
Write 1 to unpend serial controller 2 interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_SC1
[5]
RW
Write 1 to unpend serial controller 1 interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_SLEEPTMR
[4]
RW
Write 1 to unpend sleep timer interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_BB
[3]
RW
Write 1 to unpend baseband interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_MGMT
[2]
RW
Write 1 to unpend management interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_TIM2
[1]
RW
Write 1 to unpend timer 2 interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
INT_TIM1
[0]
RW
Write 1 to unpend timer 1 interrupt. (Writing 0 has no effect.)
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 9.5. INT_ACTIVE: Top-Level Active Interrupts Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
INT_DEBUG
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
INT_IRQD
INT_IRQC
INT_IRQB
INT_IRQA
INT_ADC
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
INT_SEC
INT_SC2
INT_SC1
INT_SLEEPTMR
INT_BB
INT_MGMT
INT_TIM2
INT_TIM1
INT_MACRX INT_MACTX
Address: 0xE000E300 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
INT_DEBUG
[16]
R
Debug interrupt active.
INT_IRQD
[15]
R
IRQD interrupt active.
INT_IRQC
[14]
R
IRQC interrupt active.
INT_IRQB
[13]
R
IRQB interrupt active.
INT_IRQA
[12]
R
IRQA interrupt active.
INT_ADC
[11]
R
ADC interrupt active.
INT_MACRX
[10]
R
MAC receive interrupt active.
INT_MACTX
[9]
R
MAC transmit interrupt active.
INT_MACTMR
[8]
R
MAC timer interrupt active.
INT_SEC
[7]
R
Security interrupt active.
INT_SC2
[6]
R
Serial controller 2 interrupt active.
INT_SC1
[5]
R
Serial controller 1 interrupt active.
INT_SLEEPTMR
[4]
R
Sleep timer interrupt active.
INT_BB
[3]
R
Baseband interrupt active.
INT_MGMT
[2]
R
Management interrupt active.
INT_TIM2
[1]
R
Timer 2 interrupt active.
INT_TIM1
[0]
R
Timer 1 interrupt active.
110
Description
Rev 1.0
INT_MACTMR
EM341
Register 9.6. INT_MISS: Top-Level Missed Interrupts Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
INT_
MISSIRQD
INT_
MISSIRQC
INT_
MISSIRQB
INT_
MISSIRQA
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
INT_
MISSSEC
INT_
MISSSC2
INT_
MISSSC1
INT_
MISSSLEEP
INT_
MISSBB
INT_
MISSMGMT
0
0
INT_
INT_
INT_
INT_
MISSADC MISSMACRX MISSMACTX MISSMACTMR
Address: 0x4000A820 Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
INT_MISSIRQD
[15]
RW
IRQD interrupt missed.
INT_MISSIRQC
[14]
RW
IRQC interrupt missed.
INT_MISSIRQB
[13]
RW
IRQB interrupt missed.
INT_MISSIRQA
[12]
RW
IRQA interrupt missed.
INT_MISSADC
[11]
RW
ADC interrupt missed.
INT_MISSMACRX
[10]
RW
MAC receive interrupt missed.
INT_MISSMACTX
[9]
RW
MAC transmit interrupt missed.
INT_MISSMACTMR
[8]
RW
MAC Timer interrupt missed.
INT_MISSSEC
[7]
RW
Security interrupt missed.
INT_MISSSC2
[6]
RW
Serial controller 2 interrupt missed.
INT_MISSSC1
[5]
RW
Serial controller 1 interrupt missed.
INT_MISSSLEEP
[4]
RW
Sleep timer interrupt missed.
INT_MISSBB
[3]
RW
Baseband interrupt missed.
INT_MISSMGMT
[2]
RW
Management interrupt missed.
Rev 1.0
EM341
Register 9.7. SCS_AFSR: Auxiliary Fault Status Register
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
0
0
0
0
WRONGSIZE
PROTECTED
RESERVED
MISSED
Address: 0xE000ED3C Reset: 0x0
Bitname
Bitfield
Access
Description
WRONGSIZE
[3]
RW
A bus fault resulted from an 8-bit or 16-bit read or write of an APB peripheral register.
This fault can also result from an unaligned 32-bit access.
PROTECTED
[2]
RW
A bus fault resulted from a user mode (unprivileged) write to a system APB or AHB
peripheral or protected RAM.
RESERVED
[1]
RW
A bus fault resulted from a read or write to an address within an APB peripheral's 4 kB
block range, but above the last physical register in that block. Can also result from a
read or write to an address above the top of RAM or flash.
MISSED
[0]
RW
A bus fault occurred when a bit was already set in this register.
112
Rev 1.0
EM341
10. Trace Port Interface Unit (TPIU)
The EM341 integrates the standard ARM® Trace Port Interface Unit (TPIU). The TPIU receives a data stream from
the on-chip trace data generated by the standard ARM® Instrument Trace Macrocell (ITM), buffers the data in a
FIFO, formats the data, and serializes the data to be sent off-chip through alternate functions of the GPIO. Since
the primary function of the TPIU is to provide a bridge between on-chip ARM system debug components and
external GPIO, the TPIU itself does not generate data. Figure 10.1 illustrates the three primary components of the
TPIU.
SWO
TRACECLK
ITM
Asynchronous
FIFO
Trace Out
(Serializer)
Formatter
TRACEDATA0
TRACEDATA1
TRACEDATA2
TRACEDATA3
Figure 10.1. TPIU Block Diagram
The TPIU is composed of:
Asynchronous
FIFO: The asynchronous FIFO receives a data stream generated by the ITM and enables
the trace data to be sent off-chip at a speed that is not dependent on the speed of the data source.
Formatter: The formatter inserts source ID signals into the data packet stream so that trace data can be reassociated with its trace source. Since the EM341 has only one trace source, the ITM, it is not necessary to
use the formatter, and, therefore, the formatter only adds overhead into the data stream. Since certain
modes of the TPIU automatically enable the formatter, these modes should be avoided whenever possible.
Trace Out: The trace out block serializes the data and sends it off-chip by the proper alternate output GPIO
functions.
The six pins available to the TPIU are:
SWO
TRACECLK
TRACEDATA0
TRACEDATA1
TRACEDATA2
TRACEDATA3
Since these pins are alternate outputs of GPIO, refer to "17. Pin Definitions" on page 121 and "7. GPIO (General
Purpose Input/Output)" on page 48 for complete pin descriptions and configurations.
Notes:
1. The SWO alternate output is mirrored on GPIO PC1 and PC2.
2. GPIO PC1 shares both the SWO and TRACEDATA0 alternate outputs. This is possible because SWO and
TRACEDATA0 are mutually exclusive, and only one may be selected at a time in the trace-out block.
The Ember software utilizes the TPIU to efficiently output debug data. Altering the TPIU configuration may conflict
with Ember debug output.
For further information on the TPIU, contact Silicon Labs support for the ARM® CortexTM-M3 Technical Reference
Manual, the ARM® CoreSightTM Components Technical Reference Manual, the ARM® v7-M Architecture
Reference Manual, and the ARM® v7-M Architecture Application Level Reference Manual.
Rev 1.0
EM341
11. Instrumentation Trace Macrocell (ITM)
The EM341 integrates the standard ARM® Instrumentation Trace Macrocell (ITM). The ITM is an application-driven
trace source that supports printf style debugging to trace software events and emits diagnostic system information
from the ARM® Data Watchpoint and Trace (DWT). Software using the ITM generates Software Instrumentation
Trace (SWIT). In addition, the ITM provides coarse-grained timestamp functionality. The ITM emits trace
information as packets, and these packets are sent to the Trace Port Interface Unit (TPIU). Three sources can
generate packets. If multiple sources generate packets at the same time, the ITM arbitrates the order in which the
packets are output. The three sources, in decreasing order of priority, are:
Software
trace. Software can write directly to ITM stimulus registers, emitting packets.
trace. The DWT generates packets that the ITM emits.
Time stamping. Timestamps are emitted relative to packets, and the ITM contains a 21-bit counter to
generate the timestamps.
The Ember software utilizes the ITM for efficiently generating debug data. Altering the ITM configuration may
conflict with Ember debug output.
Hardware
For further information on the ITM, contact Silicon Labs support for the ARM® CortexTM-M3 Technical Reference
Manual, the ARM® CoreSight™ Components Technical Reference Manual, the ARM® v7-M Architecture
Reference Manual, and the ARM® v7-M Architecture Application Level Reference Manual.
114
Rev 1.0
EM341
12. Data Watchpoint and Trace (DWT)
The EM341 integrates the standard ARM® Data Watchpoint and Trace (DWT). The DWT provides hardware
support for profiling and debugging functionality. The DWT offers the following features:
PC
sampling
Comparators
to support:
Watchpoints
- enters debug state
tracing
Cycle count matched PC sampling
Data
Exception
trace support
cycle count calculation support
Apart from exception tracing, DWT functionality is counter- or comparator-based. Watchpoint and data trace
support use a set of compare, mask, and function registers. DWT-generated events result in one of two actions:
Instruction
Generation
of a hardware event packet. Packets are generated and combined with software events and
timestamp packets for transmission through the ITM/TPIU.
A core halt - entry to debug state.
When exception tracing is enabled, the DWT emits an exception trace packet under the following conditions:
Exception
entry (from thread mode or pre-emption of a thread or handler).
Exception exit when exiting a handler.
Exception return when reentering a preempted thread or handler code sequence.
The DWT is designed for use with advanced profiling and debug tools, available from multiple vendors. Altering
DWT configuration may conflict with the operation of advanced profiling and debug tools.
For further information on the DWT, contact Silicon Labs support for the ARM® CortexTM-M3 Technical Reference
Manual, the ARM® CoreSight™ Components Technical Reference Manual, the ARM® v7-M Architecture
Reference Manual, and the ARM® v7-M Architecture Application Level Reference Manual.
Rev 1.0
EM341
13. Flash Patch and Breakpoint (FPB)
The EM341 integrates the standard ARM® Flash Patch and Breakpoint (FPB). The FPB implements hardware
breakpoints. The FPB also provides support for remapping of specific instruction or literal locations from flash
memory to an address in RAM memory. The FPB contains:
Two
literal comparators for matching against literal loads from flash space and remapping to a
corresponding RAM space.
Six instruction comparators for matching against instruction fetches from flash space and remapping to a
corresponding RAM space. Alternatively, the comparators can be individually configured to return a
breakpoint instruction to the processor core on a match, implementing hardware breakpoint capability.
The FPB contains a global enable, but also individual enables for the eight comparators. If the comparison for an
entry matches, the address is remapped to the address defined in the remap register plus and offset corresponding
to the comparator that matched. Alternately, the address is remapped to a breakpoint instruction. The comparison
happens on the fly, but the result of the comparison occurs too late to stop the original instruction fetch or literal
load taking place from the flash space. The processor ignores this transaction, however, and only the remapped
transaction is used.
Memory Protection Unit (MPU) lookups are performed for the original address, not the remapped address.
Unaligned literal accesses are not remapped. The original access to the bus takes place in this case.
The FPB is designed for use with advanced debug tools, available from multiple vendors. Altering the FPB
configuration may conflict with the operation of advanced debug tools.
For further information on the FPB, contact Silicon Labs support for the ARM® CortexTM-M3 Technical Reference
Manual, the ARM® CoreSight™ Components Technical Reference Manual, the ARM® v7-M Architecture
Reference Manual, and the ARM® v7-M Architecture Application Level Reference Manual.
116
Rev 1.0
EM341
14. Integrated Voltage Regulator
The EM341 integrates two low dropout regulators to provide 1.8 V and 1.25 V power supplies as detailed in
Table 14.1. The 1V8 regulator supplies the analog and memories, and the 1V25 regulator supplies the digital core.
In deep sleep, the voltage regulators are disabled.
When enabled, the 1V8 regulator steps down the pads supply voltage (VDD_PADS) from a nominal 3.0 V to 1.8 V.
The regulator output pin (VREG_OUT) must be decoupled externally with a suitable capacitor. VREG_OUT should
be connected to the 1.8 V supply pins VDDA, VDD_RF, VDD_VCO, VDD_SYNTH, VDD_IF, and VDD_MEM. The
1V8 regulator can supply a maximum of 50 mA.
When enabled, the 1V25 regulator steps down VDD_PADS to 1.25 V. The regulator output pin (VDD_CORE, Pin
17) must be decoupled externally with a suitable capacitor. It should connect to the other VDD_CORE pin (Pin 44).
The 1V25 regulator can supply a maximum of 10 mA.
The regulators are controlled by the digital portion of the chip as described in "6. System Modules" on page 33.
An example of decoupling capacitors and PCB layout can be found in the application notes (see the various Ember
EM35x reference design documentation).
Table 14.1. Integrated Voltage Regulator Specifications
Spec Point
Supply range for regulator
Min
Typ
2.1
Max
Units
3.6
V
VDD_PADS
V
Regulator output after initialization
1V8 regulator output
–5%
1.8
+5%
1V8 regulator output after
reset
–5%
1.75
+5%
1V25 regulator output
–5%
1.25
+5%
1V25 regulator output after
reset
–5%
1.45
+5%
Comments
Regulator output after reset
V
Regulator output after initialization
Regulator output after reset
1V8 regulator capacitor
2.2
µF
Low ESR tantalum capacitor
ESR greater than 2
ESR less than 10
de-coupling less than 100 nF ceramic
1V25 regulator capacitor
1.0
µF
Ceramic capacitor (0603)
1V8 regulator output current
0
50
mA
Regulator output current
1V25 regulator output
current
0
10
mA
Regulator output current
No load current
600
µA
No load current (bandgap and regulators)
1V8 regulator current limit
200
mA
Short circuit current limit
1V25 regulator current limit
25
mA
Short circuit current limit
1V8 regulator start-up time
50
µs
0 V to POR threshold
2.2 µF capacitor
1V25 regulator start-up time
50
µs
0 V to POR threshold
1.0 µF capacitor
Rev 1.0
EM341
An external 1.8 V regulator may replace both internal regulators. The EM341 can control external regulators during
deep sleep using open-drain GPIO PA7, as described in "7. GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output)" on page 48.
The EM341 drives PA7 low during deep sleep to disable the external regulator, and an external pull-up is required
to release this signal to indicate that supply voltage should be provided. Current consumption increases
approximately 2 mA when using an external regulator. When using an external regulator, the internal regulators
should be disabled through Ember software. The always-on domain needs to be minimally powered at 2.1 V and
cannot be powered from the external 1.8 V regulator.
118
Rev 1.0
EM341
15. Serial Wire and JTAG (SWJ) Interface
The EM341 includes a standard Serial Wire and JTAG (SWJ) Interface. The SWJ is the primary debug and
programming interface of the EM341. The SWJ gives debug tools access to the internal buses of the EM341 and
allows for non-intrusive memory and register access as well as CPU halt-step style debugging. Therefore, any
design implementing the EM341 should make the SWJ signals readily available.
Serial Wire is an ARM® standard, bidirectional, two-wire protocol designed to replace JTAG and provides all the
normal JTAG debug and test functionality. JTAG is a standard five-wire protocol providing debug and test
functionality. In addition, the two Serial Wire signals (SWDIO and SWCLK) are overlaid on two of the JTAG signals
(JTMS and JTCK). This keeps the design compact and allows debug tools to switch between Serial Wire and JTAG
as needed, without changing pin connections.
While Serial Wire and JTAG offer the same debug and test functionality, Silicon Labs recommends Serial Wire.
Serial Wire uses only two pins instead of five, and offers a simple communication protocol, high performance data
rates, low power, built-in error detection, and protection from glitches.
The ARM CoreSight™ Debug Access Port (DAP) comprises the Serial Wire and JTAG Interface (SWJ). As
illustrated in Figure 15.1, the DAP includes two primary components: a debug port (the SWJ-DP) and an access
port (the AHB-AP). The SWJ-DP provides external debug access while the AHB-AP provides internal bus access.
An external debug tool connected to the EM341's debug pins communicates with the SWJ-DP. The SWJ-DP then
communicates with the AHB-AP. Finally, the AHB-AP communicates on the internal bus.
SW J-DAP
SW J-DP
Pins
SW J-DP
Select
SW
Interface
JTAG
Interface
Control and
AP Interface
AHB-AP
AHB
Figure 15.1. SWJ Block Diagram
Serial Wire and JTAG share five pins:
JRST
JTDO
JTDI
SWDIO/JTMS
SWCLK/JTCK
Note: The SWJ pins are forced functions, and their corresponding GPIO_PxCFGH/L configurations are overridden when the
EM341 resets. An application must disable all debug SWJ debug functionality to reclaim any of the four SWJ GPIOs:
PC0, PC2, PC3, and PC4.
Since these pins can be repurposed, refer to "17. Pin Definitions" on page 121 and "7.3. Forced Functions" on
page 50 for complete pin descriptions and configurations.
For further information on the SWJ, contact customer support for application notes and ARM® CoreSight™
documentation.
Rev 1.0
EM341
16. Ordering Information
Use the following part number to order the EM341:
Part Number
Part
Packaging Material
Configuration
EM341-RTR
EM341
2000 unit reel
Standard
The EM300 Series package is RoHS-compliant. It conforms to the European Court of Justice decision regarding
the Deca-BDE exemption of the RoHS Directive. It is PFOS-compliant in accordance with European Directive
2006/122/EC*1 released in December 2006. The EM341-RTR reel conforms to EIA Specification 481.
To order parts, contact Silicon Labs at 1+(877) 444-3032, or find a sales office or distributor on our website,
www.silabs.com.
120
Rev 1.0
EM341
17. Pin Definitions
VDD_24MHZ
1
VDD_ VCO
2
PB5, ADC0, TIM2CLK, TIM1MSK
PB6, ADC1, IRQB, TIM1C1
44
43
42
41 40
39
38 37
VDD_PADS
VDD_CORE
45
PC1, ADC3, SWO, TRACEDATA0
VDD_PRE
46
VDD_MEM
VDD_SYNTH
47
PC0, JRST, IRQD, TRACEDATA1
OSCB
48
PB7, ADC2, IRQC, TM1C2
OSCA
17.1. Pin Definitions
49
GND
36
PB0 , VREF, IRQA , TRACECLK, TIM1CLK, TIM2 MSK
35
PC4 , JTMS, SWDIO
RF_P
3
34
PC3 , JTDI
RF_N
4
33
PC2 , JTDO, SWO
VDD_RF
5
32
SWCLK, JTCK
RF_TX_ALT_P
6
31
PB2 , SC1 MISO, SC1 MOSI, SC1SCL, SC1 RXD, TIM2C2
RF_TX_ALT_N
7
30
PB1 , SC1MISO , SC1 MOSI, SC1SDA, SC1TXD, TIM2C1
VDD_IF
8
29
PA6 , TIM1C3
NC
9
28
VDD_ PADS
VDD_ PADSA
10
27
PA5 , ADC5 , PTI_ DATA, nBOOTMODE, TRACEDATA3
PC5 , TX_ ACTIVE
11
26
PA4 , ADC4 , PTI_EN, TRACEDATA2
nRESET
12
25
PA3 , SC2n SSEL, TRACECLK, TIM2C2
18
19
PC7, OSC32A, OSC32_EXT
VREG_OUT
VDD_PADS
VDD_CORE
PA7, TIM1C4, REG_EN
PB3, TIM2C3, SC1nCTS, SC1SCLK
20 21
22
23 24
PA2, TIM2C4, SC2SCL, SC2SCLK
17
VDD_PADS
16
PA1, TIM2C3, SC2SDA, SC2MISO
15
PA0, TIM2C1, SC2MOSI
14
PB4, TIM2C4, SC1nRTS, SC1nSSEL
13
PC6, OSC32B, nTX_ACTIVE
EM341
Figure 17.1. EM341 Pin Definitions
Refer to "7. GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output)" on page 48 for details about selecting GPIO pin functions.
Rev 1.0
EM341
Table 17.1. EM341 Pin Descriptions
Pin #
Signal
Direction
1
VDD_24MHZ
Power
1.8 V high-frequency oscillator supply
2
VDD_VCO
Power
1.8 V VCO supply
3
RF_P
I/O
Differential (with RF_N) receiver input/transmitter output
4
RF_N
I/O
Differential (with RF_P) receiver input/transmitter output
5
VDD_RF
Power
6
RF_TX_ALT_P
O
Differential (with RF_TX_ALT_N) transmitter output (optional)
7
RF_TX_ALT_N
O
Differential (with RF_TX_ALT_P) transmitter output (optional)
8
VDD_IF
Power
9
NC
10
VDD_PADSA
Power
11
PC5
I/O
Digital I/O
TX_ACTIVE
O
Logic-level control for external RX/TX switch. The EM341 baseband controls TX_ACTIVE and drives it high (VDD_PADS) when in TX mode.
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PCCFGH[7:4]
12
nRESET
I
Active low chip reset (internal pull-up)
13
PC6
I/O
Digital I/O
OSC32B
I/O
32.768 kHz crystal oscillator
Select analog function with GPIO_PCCFGH[11:8]
nTX_ACTIVE
O
Inverted TX_ACTIVE signal (see PC5)
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PCCFGH[11:8]
PC7
I/O
Digital I/O
OSC32A
I/O
32.768 kHz crystal oscillator
Select analog function with GPIO_PCCFGH[15:12]
OSC32_EXT
I
15
VREG_OUT
Power
Regulator output (1.8 V while awake, 0 V during deep sleep)
16
VDD_PADS
Power
Pads supply (2.1–3.6 V)
17
VDD_CORE
Power
1.25 V digital core supply decoupling
14
122
Description
1.8 V RF supply (LNA and PA)
1.8 V IF supply (mixers and filters)
Do not connect
Analog pad supply (1.8 V)
Digital 32.768 kHz clock input source
Rev 1.0
EM341
Table 17.1. EM341 Pin Descriptions (Continued)
Pin #
Signal
Direction
18
PA7
I/O
High
current
TIM1C4
O
Timer 1 Channel 4 output
Enable timer output with TIM1_CCER
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PACFGH[15:12]
Disable REG_EN with GPIO_DBGCFG[4]
TIM1C4
I
Timer 1 Channel 4 input
Cannot be remapped
REG_EN
O
External regulator open drain output
Enabled after reset
PB3
I/O
Digital I/O
TIM2C3
(see also Pin 22)
O
Timer 2 channel 3 output
Enable remap with TIM2_OR[6]
Enable timer output in TIM2_CCER
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PBCFGL[15:12]
TIM2C3
(see also Pin 22)
I
Timer 2 channel 3 input
Enable remap with TIM2_OR[6]
SC1nCTS
I
UART CTS handshake of Serial Controller 1
Enable with SC1_UARTCFG[5]
Select UART with SC1_MODE
SC1SCLK
O
SPI master clock of Serial Controller 1
Either disable timer output in TIM2_CCER,
or disable remap with TIM2_OR[6]
Enable master with SC1_SPICFG[4]
Select SPI with SC1_MODE
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PBCFGL[15:12]
SC1SCLK
I
SPI slave clock of Serial Controller 1
Enable slave with SC1_SPICFG[4]
Select SPI with SC1_MODE
19
Description
Digital I/O
Disable REG_EN with GPIO_DBGCFG[4]
Rev 1.0
EM341
Table 17.1. EM341 Pin Descriptions (Continued)
Pin #
Signal
Direction
20
PB4
I/O
Digital I/O
TIM2C4
(see also Pin 24)
O
Timer 2 channel 4 output
Enable remap with TIM2_OR[7]
Enable timer output in TIM2_CCER
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PBCFGH[3:0]
TIM2C4
(see also Pin 24)
I
Timer 2 channel 4 input
Enable remap with TIM2_OR[7]
SC1nRTS
O
UART RTS handshake of Serial Controller 1
Either disable timer output in TIM2_CCER,
or disable remap with TIM2_OR[7]
Enable with SC1_UARTCFG[5]
Select UART with SC1_MODE
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PBCFGH[3:0]
SC1nSSEL
I
SPI slave select of Serial Controller 1
Enable slave with SC1_SPICFG[4]
Select SPI with SC1_MODE
PA0
I/O
Digital I/O
TIM2C1
(see also Pin 30)
O
Timer 2 channel 1 output
Disable remap with TIM2_OR[4]
Enable timer output in TIM2_CCER
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PACFGL[3:0]
TIM2C1
(see also Pin 30)
I
Timer 2 channel 1 input
Disable remap with TIM2_OR[4]
SC2MOSI
O
SPI master data out of Serial Controller 2
Either disable timer output in TIM2_CCER,
or enable remap with TIM2_OR[4]
Enable master with SC2_SPICFG[4]
Select SPI with SC2_MODE
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PACFGL[3:0]
SC2MOSI
I
SPI slave data in of Serial Controller 2
Enable slave with SC2_SPICFG[4]
Select SPI with SC2_MODE
21
124
Description
Rev 1.0
EM341
Table 17.1. EM341 Pin Descriptions (Continued)
Pin #
Signal
Direction
22
PA1
I/O
Digital I/O
TIM2C3
(see also Pin 19)
O
Timer 2 channel 3 output
Disable remap with TIM2_OR[6]
Enable timer output in TIM2_CCER
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PACFGL[7:4]
TIM2C3
(see also Pin 19)
I
Timer 2 channel 3 input
Disable remap with TIM2_OR[6]
SC2SDA
I/O
TWI data of Serial Controller 2
Either disable timer output in TIM2_CCER,
or enable remap with TIM2_OR[6]
Select TWI with SC2_MODE
Select alternate open-drain output function with GPIO_PACFGL[7:4]
SC2MISO
O
SPI slave data out of Serial Controller 2
Either disable timer output in TIM2_CCER,
or enable remap with TIM2_OR[6]
Enable slave with SC2_SPICFG[4]
Select SPI with SC2_MODE
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PACFGL[7:4]
SC2MISO
I
SPI master data in of Serial Controller 2
Enable slave with SC2_SPICFG[4]
Select SPI with SC2_MODE
VDD_PADS
Power
23
Description
Pads supply (2.1–3.6 V)
Rev 1.0
EM341
Table 17.1. EM341 Pin Descriptions (Continued)
Pin #
Signal
Direction
24
PA2
I/O
Digital I/O
TIM2C4
(see also Pin 20)
O
Timer 2 channel 4 output
Disable remap with TIM2_OR[7]
Enable timer output in TIM2_CCER
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PACFGL[11:8]
TIM2C4
(see also Pin 20)
I
Timer 2 channel 4 input
Disable remap with TIM2_OR[7]
SC2SCL
I/O
TWI clock of Serial Controller 2
Either disable timer output in TIM2_CCER,
or enable remap with TIM2_OR[7]
Select TWI with SC2_MODE
Select alternate open-drain output function with GPIO_PACFGL[11:8]
SC2SCLK
O
SPI master clock of Serial Controller 2
Either disable timer output in TIM2_CCER,
or enable remap with TIM2_OR[7]
Enable master with SC2_SPICFG[4]
Select SPI with SC2_MODE
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PACFGL[11:8]
SC2SCLK
I
SPI slave clock of Serial Controller 2
Enable slave with SC2_SPICFG[4]
Select SPI with SC2_MODE
PA3
I/O
SC2nSSEL
I
SPI slave select of Serial Controller 2
Enable slave with SC2_SPICFG[4]
Select SPI with SC2_MODE
TRACECLK
(see also Pin 36)
O
Synchronous CPU trace clock
Either disable timer output in TIM2_CCER,
or enable remap with TIM2_OR[5]
Enable trace interface in ARM core
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PACFGL[15:12]
TIM2C2
(see also Pin 31)
O
Timer 2 channel 2 output
Disable remap with TIM2_OR[5]
Enable timer output in TIM2_CCER
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PACFGL[15:12]
TIM2C2
(see also Pin 31)
I
Timer 2 channel 2 input
Disable remap with TIM2_OR[5]
25
126
Description
Digital I/O
Rev 1.0
EM341
Table 17.1. EM341 Pin Descriptions (Continued)
Pin #
Signal
Direction
26
PA4
I/O
ADC4
Analog
PTI_EN
O
Frame signal of Packet Trace Interface (PTI)
Disable trace interface in ARM core
Enable PTI in Ember software
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PACFGH[3:0]
TRACEDATA2
O
Synchronous CPU trace data bit 2
Select 4-wire synchronous trace interface in ARM core
Enable trace interface in ARM core
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PACFGH[3:0]
PA5
I/O
Digital I/O
ADC5
Analog
PTI_DATA
O
Data signal of Packet Trace Interface (PTI)
Disable trace interface in ARM core
Enable PTI in Ember software
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PACFGH[7:4]
nBOOTMODE
I
Activate FIB monitor instead of main program or bootloader when coming
out of reset.
Signal is active during and immediately after a reset on nRESET. See "7.5.
Boot Configuration" on page 51.
TRACEDATA3
O
Synchronous CPU trace data bit 3
Select 4-wire synchronous trace interface in ARM core
Enable trace interface in ARM core
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PACFGH[7:4]
28
VDD_PADS
Power
29
PA6
27
Description
Digital I/O
ADC Input 4
Select analog function with GPIO_PACFGH[3:0]
ADC Input 5
Select analog function with GPIO_PACFGH[7:4]
Pads supply (2.1–3.6 V)
I/O
Digital I/O
High current
TIM1C3
O
Timer 1 channel 3 output
Enable timer output in TIM1_CCER
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PACFGH[11:8]
TIM1C3
I
Timer 1 channel 3 input
Cannot be remapped
Rev 1.0
EM341
Table 17.1. EM341 Pin Descriptions (Continued)
Pin #
Signal
Direction
30
PB1
I/O
Digital I/O
SC1MISO
O
SPI slave data out of Serial Controller 1
Either disable timer output in TIM2_CCER,
or disable remap with TIM2_OR[4]
Select SPI with SC1_MODE
Select slave with SC1_SPICR
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PBCFGL[7:4]
SC1MOSI
O
SPI master data out of Serial Controller 1
Either disable timer output in TIM2_CCER,
or disable remap with TIM2_OR[4]
Select SPI with SC1_MODE
Select master with SC1_SPICR
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PBCFGL[7:4]
SC1SDA
I/O
TWI data of Serial Controller 1
Either disable timer output in TIM2_CCER,
or disable remap with TIM2_OR[4]
Select TWI with SC1_MODE
Select alternate open-drain output function with GPIO_PBCFGL[7:4]
SC1TXD
O
UART transmit data of Serial Controller 1
Either disable timer output in TIM2_CCER,
or disable remap with TIM2_OR[4]
Select UART with SC1_MODE
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PBCFGL[7:4]
TIM2C1
(see also Pin 21)
O
Timer 2 channel 1 output
Enable remap with TIM2_OR[4]
Enable timer output in TIM2_CCER
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PACFGL[7:4]
TIM2C1
(see also Pin 21)
I
Timer 2 channel 1 input
Disable remap with TIM2_OR[4]
128
Description
Rev 1.0
EM341
Table 17.1. EM341 Pin Descriptions (Continued)
Pin #
Signal
Direction
31
PB2
I/O
SC1MISO
I
SPI master data in of Serial Controller 1
Select SPI with SC1_MODE
Select master with SC1_SPICR
SC1MOSI
I
SPI slave data in of Serial Controller 1
Select SPI with SC1_MODE
Select slave with SC1_SPICR
SC1SCL
I/O
SC1RXD
I
UART receive data of Serial Controller 1
Select UART with SC1_MODE
TIM2C2
(see also Pin 25)
O
Timer 2 channel 2 output
Enable remap with TIM2_OR[5]
Enable timer output in TIM2_CCER
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PBCFGL[11:8]
TIM2C2
(see also Pin 25)
I
Timer 2 channel 2 input
Enable remap with TIM2_OR[5]
SWCLK
I/O
Serial Wire clock input/output with debugger
Selected when in Serial Wire mode (see JTMS description, Pin 35)
JTCK
I
JTAG clock input from debugger
Selected when in JTAG mode (default mode, see JTMS description,
Pin 35)
Internal pull-down is enabled
PC2
I/O
Digital I/O
Enable with GPIO_DBGCFG[5]
JTDO
O
JTAG data out to debugger
Selected when in JTAG mode (default mode, see JTMS description,
Pin 35)
SWO
O
Serial Wire Output asynchronous trace output to debugger
Select asynchronous trace interface in ARM core
Enable trace interface in ARM core
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PCCFGL[11:8]
Enable Serial Wire mode (see JTMS description, Pin 35)
Internal pull-up is enabled
32
33
Description
Digital I/O
TWI clock of Serial Controller 1
Either disable timer output in TIM2_CCER,
or disable remap with TIM2_OR[5]
Select TWI with SC1_MODE
Select alternate open-drain output function with GPIO_PBCFGL[11:8]
Rev 1.0
EM341
Table 17.1. EM341 Pin Descriptions (Continued)
Pin #
Signal
Direction
34
PC3
I/O
JTDI
I
PC4
I/O
JTMS
I
JTAG mode select from debugger
Selected when in JTAG mode (default mode)
JTAG mode is enabled after power-up or by forcing nRESET low
Select Serial Wire mode using the ARM-defined protocol through a debugger
Internal pull-up is enabled
SWDIO
I/O
Serial Wire bidirectional data to/from debugger
Enable Serial Wire mode (see JTMS description)
Select Serial Wire mode using the ARM-defined protocol through a debugger
Internal pull-up is enabled
PB0
I/O
Digital I/O
35
36
VREF
37
130
Description
Digital I/O
Either Enable with GPIO_DBGCFG[5],
or enable Serial Wire mode (see JTMS description)
JTAG data in from debugger
Selected when in JTAG mode (default mode, see JTMS description,
Pin 35)
Internal pull-up is enabled
Digital I/O
Enable with GPIO_DBGCFG[5]
Analog O ADC reference output
Enable analog function with GPIO_PBCFGL[3:0]
IRQA
I
External interrupt source A
TRACECLK
(see also Pin 25)
O
Synchronous CPU trace clock
Enable trace interface in ARM core
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PBCFGL[3:0]
TIM1CLK
I
Timer 1 external clock input
TIM2MSK
I
Timer 2 external clock mask input
VDD_PADS
Power
Pads supply (2.1–3.6 V)
Rev 1.0
EM341
Table 17.1. EM341 Pin Descriptions (Continued)
Pin #
Signal
Direction
38
PC1
I/O
ADC3
Analog
SWO
(see also Pin 33)
O
Serial Wire Output asynchronous trace output to debugger
Select asynchronous trace interface in ARM core
Enable trace interface in ARM core
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PCCFGL[7:4]
TRACEDATA0
O
Synchronous CPU trace data bit 0
Select 1-, 2- or 4-wire synchronous trace interface in ARM core
Enable trace interface in ARM core
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PCCFGL[7:4]
39
VDD_MEM
Power
1.8 V supply (flash, RAM)
40
PC0
I/O
High
current
Digital I/O
Either enable with GPIO_DBGCFG[5],
or enable Serial Wire mode (see JTMS description, Pin 35) and disable
TRACEDATA1
JRST
I
JTAG reset input from debugger
Selected when in JTAG mode (default mode, see JTMS description) and
TRACEDATA1 is disabled
Internal pull-up is enabled
IRQD
I
Default external interrupt source D.
IRQC and IRQD external interrupts can be mapped to any digital I/O pin
using the GPIO_IRQSEL and GPIO_IRQDSEL registers.
TRACEDATA1
O
Synchronous CPU trace data bit 1
Select 2- or 4-wire synchronous trace interface in ARM core
Enable trace interface in ARM core
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PCCFGL[3:0]
PB7
I/O
High
current
Digital I/O
ADC2
Analog
ADC Input 2
Enable analog function with GPIO_PBCFGH[15:12]
IRQC
I
Default external interrupt source C.
IRQC and IRQD external interrupts can be mapped to any digital I/O pin
using the GPIO_IRQSEL and GPIO_IRQDSEL registers.
TIM1C2
O
Timer 1 channel 2 output
Enable timer output in TIM1_CCER
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PBCFGH[15:12]
TIM1C2
I
Timer 1 channel 2 input
Cannot be remapped
41
Description
Digital I/O
ADC Input 3
Enable analog function with GPIO_PCCFGL[7:4]
Rev 1.0
EM341
Table 17.1. EM341 Pin Descriptions (Continued)
Pin #
Signal
Direction
42
PB6
I/O
High
current
Digital I/O
ADC1
Analog
ADC Input 1
Enable analog function with GPIO_PBCFGH[11:8]
IRQB
I
External interrupt source B
TIM1C1
O
Timer 1 channel 1 output
Enable timer output in TIM1_CCER
Select alternate output function with GPIO_PBCFGH[11:8]
TIM1C1
I
Timer 1 channel 1 input
Cannot be remapped
PB5
I/O
ADC0
Analog
TIM2CLK
I
Timer 2 external clock input
TIM1MSK
I
Timer 1 external clock mask input
44
VDD_CORE
Power
1.25 V digital core supply decoupling
45
VDD_PRE
Power
1.8 V prescaler supply
46
VDD_SYNTH
Power
1.8 V synthesizer supply
47
OSCB
I/O
24 MHz crystal oscillator or left open when using external clock input on
OSCA
48
OSCA
I/O
24 MHz crystal oscillator or external clock input.
(An external clock input should only be used for test and debug purposes.
If used in this manner, the external clock input should be a 1.8 V, 50% duty
cycle, square wave.)
49
GND
Ground
Ground supply pad in the bottom center of the package forms Pin 49. See
the various Ember EM35x Reference Design documentation for PCB considerations.
43
132
Description
Digital I/O
ADC Input 0
Enable analog function with GPIO_PBCFGH[7:4]
Rev 1.0
EM341
18. Package
The EM341 package is a plastic 48-pin QFN that is 7 mm x 7 mm. Figure 18.1 illustrates the package drawing.
Figure 18.1. Package Drawing
128
Rev 1.0
EM341
Table 18.1. Package Dimensions
Dimension
MIN
NOM
MAX
A
0.80
0.85
0.90
A1
0
0.035
0.05
A2
—
0.65
0.67
A3
b
0.203 REF
0.2
0.25
D
7 BSC
E
7 BSC
e
0.5 BSC
0.3
J
5.2
5.3
5.4
K
5.2
5.3
5.4
L
0.35
0.40
0.45
aaa
0.10
bbb
0.1
ccc
0.08
ddd
0.1
eee
0.1
Notes:
1. All dimensions shown are in millimeters (mm) unless otherwise noted.
2. Dimensioning and Tolerancing per ANSI Y14.5M-1994.
3. This drawing conforms to the JEDEC Solid State Outline MO-220, Variation VKKD-4.
4. Recommended card reflow profile is per the JEDEC/IPC J-STD-020 specification for Small
Body Components.
Rev 1.0
129
EM341
Figure 18.2. Solder Mask Dimensions
Table 18.2. PCB Land Pattern
Dimension
Min
Max
C1
6.80
6.90
C2
6.80
6.90
E
0.50 BSC
X1
0.20
0.30
X2
5.20
5.40
Y1
0.75
0.85
Y2
5.20
5.40
Notes:
General
1. All dimensions shown are in millimeters (mm) unless otherwise noted.
2. This Land Pattern Design is based on the IPC-7351 guidelines.
Solder Mask Design
1. All metal pads are to be non-solder mask defined (NSMD). Clearance between the solder mask and the metal pad is
to be 60mm minimum, all the way around the pad.
Stencil Design
1. A stainless steel, laser-cut and electro-polished stencil with trapezoidal walls should be used to assure good solder
paste release.
2. The stencil thickness should be 0.125 mm (5 mils).
3. The ratio of stencil aperture to land pad size should be 1:1 for all perimeter pads.
4. A 4x4 array of 1.1 mm square openings on 1.3 mm pitch can be used for the center ground pad.
Card Assembly
1. A No-Clean, Type-3 solder paste is recommended.
2. The recommended card reflow profile is per the JEDEC/IPC J-STD-020C specification for Small Body Components.
130
Rev 1.0
EM341
19. Top Marking
Figure 19.1 shows the part marking for the EM341 Series. The circle in the top corner indicates Pin 1. Pins are
numbered counter-clockwise from Pin 1 with 12 pins per package edge.
Figure 19.1. Part Marking for EM341
Table 19.1. 48-Pin QFN Top Marking Explanation
Mark Method:
Laser
Pin 1 Marking:
Circle = 0.40 mm Diameter
(Top-Left Justified)
Line 1 Marking:
Logo and Device Part Number
Right Justified
Silicon Labs logo and EM341.
Line 2 Marking:
TTTTTT = Mfg Code
YY=Year
WW-Work Week
Manufacturing Code from the Assembly Purchase
form. Assigned by the Assembly House. Corresponds to the year and work week.
Right Justified
Line 3 Marking:
Circle = 1.3 mm Diameter
Center Justified
“e3” indicates Sn solder finish.
Country of Origin
ISO abbreviation
Right Justified
TW
Rev 1.0
131
EM341
APPENDIX A—REGISTER ADDRESS TABLE
BLOCK
CM_LV
40004000–40004038 CM_LV
Address
Name
Type
Reset
Description
40004038
PERIPHERAL_DISABLE
RW
0
Peripheral Disable Register
BLOCK
INTERRUPTS
Address
Name
Type
Reset
4000A800
INT_TIM1FLAG
RW
0
Timer 1 Interrupt Flag Register
4000A804
INT_TIM2FLAG
RW
0
Timer 2 Interrupt Flag Register
4000A808
INT_SC1FLAG
RW
0
Serial Controller 1 Interrupt Flag Register
4000A80C
INT_SC2FLAG
RW
0
Serial Controller 2 Interrupt Flag Register
4000A810
INT_ADCFLAG
RW
0
ADC Interrupt Flag Register
4000A814
INT_GPIOFLAG
RW
0
GPIO Interrupt Flag Register
4000A818
INT_TIM1MISS
RW
0
Timer 1 Missed Interrupt Register
4000A81C
INT_TIM2MISS
RW
0
Timer 2 Missed Interrupts Register
4000A820
INT_MISS
RW
0
Top-Level Missed Interrupts Register
4000A840
INT_TIM1CFG
RW
0
Timer 1 Interrupt Configuration Register
4000A844
INT_TIM2CFG
RW
0
Timer 2 Interrupt Configuration Register
4000A848
INT_SC1CFG
RW
0
Serial Controller 1 Interrupt Configuration Register
4000A84C
INT_SC2CFG
RW
0
Serial Controller 2 Interrupt Configuration Register
4000A850
INT_ADCCFG
RW
0
ADC Interrupt Configuration Register
4000A854
SC1_INTMODE
RW
0
Serial Controller 1 Interrupt Mode Register
4000A858
SC2_INTMODE
RW
0
Serial Controller 2 Interrupt Mode Register
4000A860
GPIO_INTCFGA
RW
0
GPIO Interrupt A Configuration Register
4000A864
GPIO_INTCFGB
RW
0
GPIO Interrupt B Configuration Register
4000A868
GPIO_INTCFGC
RW
0
GPIO Interrupt C Configuration Register
4000A86C
GPIO_INTCFGD
RW
0
GPIO Interrupt D Configuration Register
132
4000A000–4000AFFF Interrupts
Rev 1.0
Description
EM341
BLOCK
GPIO
4000B000–4000BFFF General Purpose IO
Address
Name
Type
Reset
4000B000
GPIO_PACFGL
RW
4444
Port A Configuration Register (Low)
4000B004
GPIO_PACFGH
RW
4444
Port A Configuration Register (High)
4000B008
GPIO_PAIN
RW
0
Port A Input Data Register
4000B00C
GPIO_PAOUT
RW
0
Port A Output Data Register
4000B010
GPIO_PASET
RW
0
Port A Output Set Register
4000B014
GPIO_PACLR
RW
0
Port A Output Clear Register
4000B400
GPIO_PBCFGL
RW
4444
Port B Configuration Register (Low)
4000B404
GPIO_PBCFGH
RW
4444
Port B Configuration Register (High)
4000B408
GPIO_PBIN
RW
0
Port B Input Data Register
4000B40C
GPIO_PBOUT
RW
0
Port B Output Data Register
4000B410
GPIO_PBSET
RW
0
Port B Output Set Register
4000B414
GPIO_PBCLR
RW
0
Port B Output Clear Register
4000B800
GPIO_PCCFGL
RW
4444
Port C Configuration Register (Low)
4000B804
GPIO_PCCFGH
RW
4444
Port C Configuration Register (High)
4000B808
GPIO_PCIN
RW
0
Port C Input Data Register
4000B80C
GPIO_PCOUT
RW
0
Port C Output Data Register
4000B810
GPIO_PCSET
RW
0
Port C Output Set Register
4000B814
GPIO_PCCLR
RW
0
Port C Output Clear Register
4000BC00
GPIO_DBGCFG
RW
10
GPIO Debug Configuration Register
4000BC04
GPIO_DBGSTAT
R
0
GPIO Debug Status Register
4000BC08
GPIO_PAWAKE
RW
0
Port A Wakeup Monitor Register
4000BC0C
GPIO_PBWAKE
RW
0
Port B Wakeup Monitor Register
4000BC10
GPIO_PCWAKE
RW
0
Port C Wakeup Monitor Register
4000BC14
GPIO_IRQCSEL
RW
F
Interrupt C Select Register
4000BC18
GPIO_IRQDSEL
RW
10
Interrupt D Select Register
4000BC1C
GPIO_WAKEFILT
RW
0
GPIO Wakeup Filtering Register
Rev 1.0
Description
133
EM341
BLOCK
SERIAL
Address
Name
Type
Reset
4000C000
SC2_RXBEGA
RW
20000000
Receive DMA Begin Address Register A
4000C004
SC2_RXENDA
RW
20000000
Receive DMA End Address Register A
4000C008
SC2_RXBEGB
RW
20000000
Receive DMA Begin Address Register B
4000C00C
SC2_RXENDB
RW
20000000
Receive DMA End Address Register B
4000C010
SC2_TXBEGA
RW
20000000
Transmit DMA Begin Address Register A
4000C014
SC2_TXENDA
RW
20000000
Transmit DMA End Address Register A
4000C018
SC2_TXBEGB
RW
20000000
Transmit DMA Begin Address Register B
4000C01C
SC2_TXENDB
RW
20000000
Transmit DMA End Address Register B
4000C020
SC2_RXCNTA
R
0
Receive DMA Count Register A
4000C024
SC2_RXCNTB
R
0
Receive DMA Count Register B
4000C028
SC2_TXCNT
R
0
Transmit DMA Count Register
4000C02C
SC2_DMASTAT
R
0
Serial DMA Status Register
4000C030
SC2_DMACTRL
RW
0
Serial DMA Control Register
4000C034
SC2_RXERRA
R
0
DMA First Receive Error Register A
4000C038
SC2_RXERRB
R
0
DMA First Receive Error Register B
4000C03C
SC2_DATA
RW
0
Serial Data Register
4000C040
SC2_SPISTAT
R
0
SPI Status Register
4000C044
SC2_TWISTAT
R
0
TWI Status Register
4000C04C
SC2_TWICTRL1
RW
0
TWI Control Register 1
4000C050
SC2_TWICTRL2
RW
0
TWI Control Register 2
4000C054
SC2_MODE
RW
0
Serial Mode Register
4000C058
SC2_SPICFG
RW
0
SPI Configuration Register
4000C060
SC2_RATELIN
RW
0
Serial Clock Linear Prescaler Register
4000C064
SC2_RATEEXP
RW
0
Serial Clock Exponential Prescaler Register
4000C070
SC2_RXCNTSAVED
R
0
Saved Receive DMA Count Register
4000C800
SC1_RXBEGA
RW
20000000
Receive DMA Begin Address Register A
4000C804
SC1_RXENDA
RW
20000000
Receive DMA End Address Register A
4000C808
SC1_RXBEGB
RW
20000000
Receive DMA Begin Address Register B
134
4000C000–4000CFFF Serial Controllers
Rev 1.0
Description
EM341
BLOCK
SERIAL
4000C000–4000CFFF Serial Controllers
Address
Name
Type
Reset
4000C80C
SC1_RXENDB
RW
20000000
Receive DMA End Address Register B
4000C810
SC1_TXBEGA
RW
20000000
Transmit DMA Begin Address Register A
4000C814
SC1_TXENDA
RW
20000000
Transmit DMA End Address Register A
4000C818
SC1_TXBEGB
RW
20000000
Transmit DMA Begin Address Register B
4000C81C
SC1_TXENDB
RW
20000000
Transmit DMA End Address Register B
4000C820
SC1_RXCNTA
R
0
Receive DMA Count Register A
4000C824
SC1_RXCNTB
R
0
Receive DMA Count Register B
4000C828
SC1_TXCNT
R
0
Transmit DMA Count Register
4000C82C
SC1_DMASTAT
R
0
Serial DMA Status Register
4000C830
SC1_DMACTRL
RW
0
Serial DMA Control Register
4000C834
SC1_RXERRA
R
0
DMA First Receive Error Register A
4000C838
SC1_RXERRB
R
0
DMA First Receive Error Register B
4000C83C
SC1_DATA
RW
0
Serial Data Register
4000C840
SC1_SPISTAT
R
0
SPI Status Register
4000C844
SC1_TWISTAT
R
0
TWI Status Register
4000C848
SC1_UARTSTAT
R
40
UART Status Register
4000C84C
SC1_TWICTRL1
RW
0
TWI Control Register 1
4000C850
SC1_TWICTRL2
RW
0
TWI Control Register 2
4000C854
SC1_MODE
RW
0
Serial Mode Register
4000C858
SC1_SPICFG
RW
0
SPI Configuration Register
4000C85C
SC1_UARTCFG
RW
0
UART Configuration Register
4000C860
SC1_RATELIN
RW
0
Serial Clock Linear Prescaler Register
4000C864
SC1_RATEEXP
RW
0
Serial Clock Exponential Prescaler Register
4000C868
SC1_UARTPER
RW
0
UART Baud Rate Period Register
4000C86C
SC1_UARTFRAC
RW
0
UART Baud Rate Fractional Period Register
4000C870
SC1_RXCNTSAVED
R
0
Saved Receive DMA Count Register
Rev 1.0
Description
135
EM341
BLOCK
ADC
4000D000 - 4000DFFF Analog to Digital Converter
Address
Name
Type
Reset
4000D000
ADC_DATA
R
0
4000D004
ADC_CFG
RW
00001800
4000D008
ADC_OFFSET
RW
0000
ADC Offset Register
4000D00C
ADC_GAIN
RW
8000
ADC Gain Register
4000D010
ADC_DMACFG
RW
0
ADC DMA Configuration Register
4000D014
ADC_DMASTAT
R
0
ADC DMA Status Register
4000D018
ADC_DMABEG
RW
20000000
4000D01C
ADC_DMASIZE
RW
0
4000D020
ADC_DMACUR
R
20000000
4000D024
ADC_DMACNT
R
0
Description
ADC Data Register
ADC Configuration Register
ADC DMA Begin Address Register
ADC DMA Buffer Size Register
ADC DMA Current Address Register
ADC DMA Count Register
BLOCK
TIM1
Address
Name
Type
Reset
4000E000
TIM1_CR1
RW
0
Timer 1 Control Register 1
4000E004
TIM1_CR2
RW
0
Timer 1 Control Register 2
4000E008
TIM1_SMCR
RW
0
Timer 1 Slave Mode Control Register
4000E014
TIM1_EGR
RW
0
Timer 1 Event Generation Register
4000E018
TIM1_CCMR1
RW
0
Timer 1 Capture/Compare Mode Register 1
4000E01C
TIM1_CCMR2
RW
0
Timer 1 Capture/Compare Mode Register 2
4000E020
TIM1_CCER
RW
0
Timer 1 Capture/Compare Enable Register
4000E024
TIM1_CNT
RW
0
Timer 1 Counter Register
4000E028
TIM1_PSC
RW
0
Timer 1 Prescaler Register
4000E02C
TIM1_ARR
RW
FFFF
4000E034
TIM1_CCR1
RW
0
Timer 1 Capture/Compare Register 1
4000E038
TIM1_CCR2
RW
0
Timer 1 Capture/Compare Register 2
4000E03C
TIM1_CCR3
RW
0
Timer 1 Capture/Compare Register 3
4000E040
TIM1_CCR4
RW
0
Timer 1 Capture/Compare Register 4
4000E050
TIM1_OR
RW
0
Timer 1 Option Register
136
4000E000 - 4000EFFF General Purpose Timer 1
Rev 1.0
Description
Timer 1 Auto-Reload Register
EM341
BLOCK
TIM2
4000F000 - 4000FFFF General Purpose Timer 2
Address
Name
Type
Reset
4000F000
TIM2_CR1
RW
0
Timer 2 Control Register 1
4000F004
TIM2_CR2
RW
0
Timer 2 Control Register 2
4000F008
TIM2_SMCR
RW
0
Timer 2 Slave Mode Control Register
4000F014
TIM2_EGR
RW
0
Timer 2 Event Generation Register
4000F018
TIM2_CCMR1
RW
0
Timer 2 Capture/Compare Mode Register 1
4000F01C
TIM2_CCMR2
RW
0
Timer 2 Capture/Compare Mode Register 2
4000F020
TIM2_CCER
RW
0
Timer 2 Capture/Compare Enable Register
4000F024
TIM2_CNT
RW
0
Timer 2 Counter Register
4000F028
TIM2_PSC
RW
0
Timer 2 Prescaler Register
4000F02C
TIM2_ARR
RW
FFFF
4000F034
TIM2_CCR1
RW
0
Timer 2 Capture/Compare Register 1
4000F038
TIM2_CCR2
RW
0
Timer 2 Capture/Compare Register 2
4000F03C
TIM2_CCR3
RW
0
Timer 2 Capture/Compare Register 3
4000F040
TIM2_CCR4
RW
0
Timer 2 Capture/Compare Register 4
4000F050
TIM2_OR
RW
0
Timer 2 Option Register
BLOCK
NVIC
Address
Name
Type
Reset
E000E100
INT_CFGSET
RW
0
Top-Level Set Interrupts Configuration Register
E000E180
INT_CFGCLR
RW
0
Top-Level Clear Interrupts Configuration Register
E000E200
INT_PENDSET
RW
0
Top-Level Set Interrupts Pending Register
E000E280
INT_PENDCLR
RW
0
Top-Level Clear Interrupts Pending Register
E000E300
INT_ACTIVE
R
0
Top-Level Active Interrupts Register
E000ED3C
SCS_AFSR
RW
0
Auxiliary Fault Status Register
Description
Timer 2 Auto-Reload Register
E000E000 - E000EFFF Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller
Rev 1.0
Description
137
EM341
APPENDIX B—ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
Acronym/Abbreviation
Meaning
ACK
Acknowledgment
ADC
Analog to Digital Converter
AES
Advanced Encryption Standard
AGC
Automatic Gain Control
AHB
Advanced High Speed Bus
APB
Advanced Peripheral Bus
CBC-MAC
Cipher Block Chaining—Message Authentication Code
CCA
Clear Channel Assessment
CCM
Counter with CBC-MAC Mode for AES encryption
CCM*
Improved Counter with CBC-MAC Mode for AES encryption
CIB
Customer Information Block
CLK1K
1 kHz Clock
CLK32K
32.768 kHz Crystal Clock
CPU
Central Processing Unit
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check
CSMA-CA
Carrier Sense Multiple Access-Collision Avoidance
CTR
Counter Mode
CTS
Clear to Send
DNL
Differential Non-Linearity
DMA
Direct Memory Access
DWT
Data Watchpoint and Trace
EEPROM
EM
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
Event Manager
ENOB
effective number of bits
ESD
Electro Static Discharge
ESR
Equivalent Series Resistance
ETR
External Trigger Input
FCLK
ARM® CortexTM-M3 CPU Clock
Rev 1.0
137
EM341
Acronym/Abbreviation
FIB
Fixed Information Block
FIFO
First-in, First-out
FPB
Flash Patch and Breakpoint
GPIO
General Purpose I/O (pins)
HF
High Frequency
I2C
Inter-Integrated Circuit
IDE
Integrated Development Environment
IF
IEEE
Intermediate Frequency
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
INL
Integral Non-linearity
ITM
Instrumentation Trace Macrocell
JTAG
LF
138
Meaning
Joint Test Action Group
Low Frequency
LNA
Low Noise Amplifier
LQI
Link Quality Indicator
LSB
Least significant bit
MAC
Medium Access Control
MFB
Main Flash Block
MISO
Master in, slave out
MOS
Metal Oxide Semiconductor (P-channel or N-channel)
MOSI
Master out, slave in
MPU
Memory Protection Unit
MSB
Most significant bit
MSL
Moisture Sensitivity Level
NACK
Negative Acknowledge
NIST
National Institute of Standards and Technology
NMI
Non-Maskable Interrupt
NVIC
Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller
OPM
One-Pulse Mode
Rev 1.0
EM341
Acronym/Abbreviation
Meaning
O-QPSK
Offset-Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
OSC24M
High Frequency Crystal Oscillator
OSC32K
Low-Frequency 32.768 kHz Oscillator
OSCHF
High-Frequency Internal RC Oscillator
OSCRC
Low-Frequency RC Oscillator
PA
Power Amplifier
PCLK
Peripheral clock
PER
Packet Error Rate
PHY
Physical Layer
PLL
Phase-Locked Loop
POR
Power-On-Reset
PRNG
Pseudo Random Number Generator
PSD
Power Spectral Density
PTI
Packet Trace Interface
PWM
Pulse Width Modulation
QFN
Quad Flat Pack
RAM
Random Access Memory
RC
Resistive/Capacitive
RF
Radio Frequency
RMS
Root Mean Square
RoHS
Restriction of Hazardous Substances
RSSI
Receive Signal Strength Indicator
RTS
Request to Send
Rx
SYSCLK
SDFR
SFD
SINAD
SPI
Receive
System clock
Spurious Free Dynamic Range
Start Frame Delimiter
Signal-to-noise and distortion ratio
Serial Peripheral Interface
Rev 1.0
139
EM341
Acronym/Abbreviation
Meaning
SWJ
Serial Wire and JTAG Interface
THD
Total Harmonic Distortion
TRNG
TWI
Tx
UART
True random number generator
Two Wire serial interface
Transmit
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
UEV
Update event
VCO
Voltage Controlled Oscillator
Abbreviation
dB
decibel
dBc
decibels relative to the carrier
dBm
decibels relative to 1 mW
GHz
GigaHerz
kB
Kilobyte
kbps
kilobits/second
kHz
kiloherz
kΩ
kiloOhm
kV
kiloVolt
mA
milliAmpere
Mbps
Megabits per second
MHz
megaherz
MΩ
megaOhm
MSPS
Megasamples per second
µA
microAmpere
µsec
microsecond
nH
nanohenry
ns
nanoseconds
Ω
Ohm
pF
picofarad
ppm
V
140
Meaning
part per million
Volt
Rev 1.0
EM341
APPENDIX C—REFERENCES
ZigBee
Specification (www.zigbee.org; ZigBee Document 053474)
Stack Profile (www.zigbee.org; ZigBee Document 074855)
ZigBee RF4CE: ZRC Profile Specification v 1.2 (www.zigbee.org; ZigBee Document 0368-16)
ZigBee Stack Profile (www.zigbee.org; ZigBee Document 064321)
Bluetooth Core Specification v2.1
(http://www.bluetooth.org/docman/handlers/downloaddoc.ashx?doc_id=241363)
IEEE 802.15.4-2003 (http://standards.ieee.org/getieee802/download/802.15.4-2003.pdf)
IEEE 802.11g (standards.ieee.org/getieee802/download/802.11g-2003.pdf)
ZigBee-PRO
ARM®
Cortex-M3 reference manual (http://infocenter.arm.com/help/topic/com.arm.doc.subset.cortexm.m3/
index.html#cortexm3)
Rev 1.0
141
EM341
DOCUMENT CHANGE LIST
Revision 0.1 to 1.0
Production Release
142
Rev 1.0
Smart.
Connected.
Energy-Friendly.
Products
Quality
www.silabs.com/products
www.silabs.com/quality
Support and Community
community.silabs.com
Disclaimer
Silicon Labs intends to provide customers with the latest, accurate, and in-depth documentation of all peripherals and modules available for system and software implementers using or
intending to use the Silicon Labs products. Characterization data, available modules and peripherals, memory sizes and memory addresses refer to each specific device, and "Typical"
parameters provided can and do vary in different applications. Application examples described herein are for illustrative purposes only. Silicon Labs reserves the right to make changes
without further notice and limitation to product information, specifications, and descriptions herein, and does not give warranties as to the accuracy or completeness of the included
information. Silicon Labs shall have no liability for the consequences of use of the information supplied herein. This document does not imply or express copyright licenses granted
hereunder to design or fabricate any integrated circuits. The products are not designed or authorized to be used within any Life Support System without the specific written consent of
Silicon Labs. A "Life Support System" is any product or system intended to support or sustain life and/or health, which, if it fails, can be reasonably expected to result in significant
personal injury or death. Silicon Labs products are not designed or authorized for military applications. Silicon Labs products shall under no circumstances be used in weapons of mass
destruction including (but not limited to) nuclear, biological or chemical weapons, or missiles capable of delivering such weapons.
Trademark Information
Silicon Laboratories Inc.® , Silicon Laboratories®, Silicon Labs®, SiLabs® and the Silicon Labs logo®, Bluegiga®, Bluegiga Logo®, Clockbuilder®, CMEMS®, DSPLL®, EFM®,
EFM32®, EFR, Ember®, Energy Micro, Energy Micro logo and combinations thereof, "the world’s most energy friendly microcontrollers", Ember®, EZLink®, EZRadio®, EZRadioPRO®,
Gecko®, ISOmodem®, Precision32®, ProSLIC®, Simplicity Studio®, SiPHY®, Telegesis, the Telegesis Logo®, USBXpress® and others are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Silicon Labs. ARM, CORTEX, Cortex-M3 and THUMB are trademarks or registered trademarks of ARM Holdings. Keil is a registered trademark of ARM Limited. All other products or
brand names mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective holders.
Silicon Laboratories Inc.
400 West Cesar Chavez
Austin, TX 78701
USA
http://www.silabs.com